FujiXerox C1110 Service Manual

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B Service Manual 1st Edition

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B Service Manual 1st Edition •

•

•

This service manual covers the following modelsFUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. Color Laser Printer DocuPrint C1110/C1110B Related Materials No other related materials issued other than this service manual. Confidentiality • This service manual is issued intending use by maintenance service personnel authorized by FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. Copying, transferring or leasing this manual without prior consent by FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. is prohibited. • When a page becomes irrelavant (e.g. superceded by a replacement page), destroy the page by burning or shredding it.

Edited by:

Issued: October 2007 •

•

Handle with care to avoid loss or damage of the manual. Revision and Modification Information When design changes or revisions relating to this service manual occur, the overseas technical information or overseas service bulletin may be issued as supplementary information until such changes are accomodated in the updated version of this service manual.

CAUTION

Important changes including revisions of spare part numbers and adjustment specifications must immediately be reflected on the respective pages of this

Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. CS&S TSC SDEG KSP R&D Business Park Bldg 6A7 3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa, JAPAN 213-8508 TEL 044-812-7637 [XEROX] [The Document Company] are registered trademarks. PRINTED IN JAPAN

Company Name Department Name Telephone No. Full Name

Employee No.

Introduction Getting to know the Service Manual How to use the Service Manual Terms and Symbols Abbreviations

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments Chapter 5 Parts List Chapter 6 General Chapter 7 Wiring Data Chapter 8 Accessories Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) Not yet issued Chapter 10 Machine Overview

Preface

Preface Table of Contents

Table of Contents 1

Getting to know the Service Manual .............................................................. Preface-1

2

How to use the Service Manual ..................................................................... Preface-1 2.1 2.2

Contents of Manual ......................................................................................................Preface-1 Information on Updating ...............................................................................................Preface-2

3

Terms and Symbols ....................................................................................... Preface-3

4

Abbreviations ................................................................................................. Preface-4

Introduction 1. Getting to know the Service Manual

1.

Getting to know the Service Manual This manual is used as the standard service manual for the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. •

2.

Publication Comment Sheet Enter any comments and/or corrections regarding the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B service manual into the Publication Comment Sheet, and send it to FX/CSS/IBS through the OpCo TS or CS department.

How to use the Service Manual This manual describes the standard procedures for the servicing of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Refer to Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure for efficient and effective servicing during maintenance calls.

2.1

Contents of Manual • •

Hardware This manual summarizes all technical information on the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapters This manual is divided into ten chapters as described below. Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure This chapter describes the general work and servicing procedures for the maintenance of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapter 2 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting procedures other than image quality troubleshooting of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. It also describes how to use the diagnostics and some programs. Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting This chapter describes the image quality troubleshooting procedures of DocuPrint C1110/ C1110B. Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments This chapter describes the disassembly, assembly, adjustment and replacement procedures for components of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapter 5 Parts List This chapter contains spare parts list for DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. Chapter 6 General This chapter contains the following general information on DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. 6.1 Configuration of Printer 6.2 Electrical Properties 6.3 Mechanical Properties 6.4 Functions 6.5 Consumables 6.6 Operating Environment 6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions 6.8 Print Image Quality 6.9 Option 6.10 ESS Specification 6.11 Tools and Service Consumables 6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110 6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B 6.14 Printer Environment Settings

Preface-1

Introduction 2. How to use the Service Manual 6.15

Control Panel Menu Tree

Chapter 7 Wiring Data This chapter describes the wiring data of DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. 7.1 Connectors [P (Plug)/J (Jack)] 7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts Chapter 8 Accessories This chapter provides information on accessories and options specific to DocuPrint C1110/ C1110B. 8.1 Network Expansion Card 8.2 Additional Memory Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) (Not yet issued) Chapter 10 Machine Overview This chapter gives an overview of the functions of the main components of DocuPrint C1110/ C1110B.

2.2

Information on Updating This manual will be revised and sent to each customer engineer as specified below. Revisions must be incorporated correctly to keep the manual up-to-date. Updating Procedure • When the entire manual is revised, "1st Edition" on the front cover will be renewed to 1st Edition, 2nd Edition, 3rd Edition and so on. • When this manual is partially revised, revisions will be sequentially indicated as Revision A, Revision B, Revision C, etc. All revised pages will be marked accordingly with "Revision A", "Revision B", "Revision C" and so on. Revision Sidebar When any paragraph, table or figure has been added or amended, a revision sidebar will be added to indicate where the revision was made.

(Example) If the same page is changed again due to a subsequent revision, revision sidebars associated with the previous revision(s) will be deleted.

Preface-2

Introduction 3. Terms and Symbols

3.

Terms and Symbols Specific terms and symbols used in any particular chapter are described in the Preface for that section. The terms and symbols described here are used throughout this manual. •

The terms and symbols used at the beginning of a text are defined as follows:

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding the statement.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding the statement.

CAUTION

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as injury or property damage if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding the statement.

INSTRUCTION

Indicates that the printer or its components may be damaged if the instructed procedure is not strictly observed.

NOTE

Used to emphasize the procedure, servicing, and regulation.

REFERENCE

Used to describe the technical terminology and supplementary explanations.

OBJECTIVE

Used to explain purpose of adjustment.

• REP • ADJ • PL • ASSY

: : : :

Indicates the disassembly/assembly procedure for reference. Indicates the adjustment procedure for reference. Indicates the parts list for reference. Means Assembly.

Safety Critical Components (SCC) Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to Fuji Xerox Co. Ltd-stipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components. Important Information Stored Component (ISC) Important Information Stored Components store customers’ important information they have entered after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care never to let customer information leak out.

Preface-3

Introduction 4. Abbreviations

4.

Abbreviations Abbreviations This manual contains abbreviations that are specific to this manual, as well as general abbreviations, which include: ADC AG APS ARC ASSY ATS B BCR Bk BLK BLU BRN BTR C CLN CRU CRUM CTRG DET DEVE. DIAG. DISP dpi DTS DUP ESB ESS F FEED, FDR FIP GND GRN GRY HT HUM HVPS ICDC ID IBT INTL, INLK IOT K L L/H LD LDD LED LEF LH LV LVPS M

Automatic Density Control Analog Ground Auto Paper Select Auto Registration Control Assembly Auto Tray Switching Black Bias Charge Roll Black Black Blue Brown Bias Transfer Roll Cyan Cleaner Customer Replaceable Unit CRU Monitor Cartridge Detoner Roll Developer Diagnostic Dispense dots per inch Detack Saw Duplex Electro Static Brush Electric Subsystem Front Feeder Fault Isolation Procedure Ground Green Gray Half Tone Humidity High Voltage Power Supply Image Count Dispense Control Image Density, or Identification Intermediate Belt Transfer Interlock Image Output Terminal Black Left Left Hand Laser diode Lightly Doped Drain Light-emitting diode Long Edge Feed Left Hand Low Voltage Low Voltage Power Supply Magenta

Preface-4

MAG MCU MOB MOT MSI N/P NVM OEM

Mag. Roll Machine Control Unit Marks On Belt Motor Multi Sheet Inserter No Paper Non Volatile Memory Original Equipment Manufacuring OHP Overhead Project OP Operation OPC Organic Photo Conductor ORN ORANGE PC Personal Computer PCDC Pixel Count Dispense Control PH Paper Handling PHD Printer Head PNK Pink POP Paper On Photoreceptor PPM Prints Per Minute PR,P/R Process PV Print Volume PWB(A) Printed Wiring Boad (Assembly) R Right R Rear R/H Right Hand REF Refresher REGI. Registration RH Right Hand ROS Raster Output Scanner ROT Rotary RTC Rubber Tube Charger RTN Return SEF Short Edge Feed SG Signal Ground SMH Special Material Handler SNR Sensor SOL. Solenoid SOS Start Of Scan STM Single Tray Module SW Switch TEMP. Temperature TM Tray Module TNER, TNR Toner TP Thermopile TR Transfer VIO Violet WHT White XERO Xerographic Y Yellow YEL Yellow

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure Table of Contents

Table of Contents 1.1 Before Starting the Servicing ....................................................................................1-1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3

Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1 Notes on the Handling of Customer Information .................................................................... 1-2 Other Things to Note .............................................................................................................. 1-3

1.2 Servicing Call Procedure ..........................................................................................1-4 1.3 TRIM Servicing .........................................................................................................1-5 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3

TRIM Servicing Procedure ..................................................................................................... 1-5 Machine Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts ...................................................... 1-6 TRIM Check List ..................................................................................................................... 1-7

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.1 Before Starting the Servicing

1.1

Before Starting the Servicing

1.1.1

Safety To prevent any accident that may occur during maintenance servicing, any WARNING or CAUTION regarding the servicing must be strictly observed. Do not perform any hazardous operation. 1. Power Supply To prevent electrical shocks, burns, or injury, etc., be sure to switch OFF the machine and disconnect the plug before starting the maintenance servicing. If the machine has to be switched ON, such as when measuring the voltage, take extra care to prevent an electrical shock. 2. Drive Area Never inspect or lubricate the drive area such as the gears during the machine operation. 3. Heavy Parts The weight of the machine is 18kg. When moving the machine to ensure sufficient working space, take extra care to prevent back pain. 4. Safety Device See that safety devices for preventing mechanical accidents, such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock switches, etc., and those for protecting customers from injury, such as panels and covers, function properly. Modifications that hinder the function of any safety devices are strictly prohibited. 5. Installing and removing the parts The edge of parts and covers may be sharp, take care not to touch them. If the oil gets onto your hand, wipe it off before getting on with the servicing. When removing parts or cables, do not pull them out by force but remove them slowly. 6. Specified Tools Follow the instruction when a tool is specified. 7. Organic Solvents When using an organic solvent such as the Drum Cleaner or Machine Cleaner, pay attention to the following: • Ensure good ventilation in the room to prevent too much intake of the solvent. • Do not use heated solvent. • Keep away from fire. 8. Cleaning the Toner and Developer As the toner may cause a dust explosion, sweep the spilt toner into a waste container. When using a cleaner to clean the remaining toner, be sure to use the FX standard toner-proof cleaner and not a customer's cleaner. Also, as the developer also contains toner, exercise the same caution during cleaning. 9. Modifications If any modifications are deemed necessary for the printer, submit an Application for Approval of Modification prior to performing any work. 10.Other Safety Precautions For safety, you should also pay attention to precautions other than the above 1 to 9 items. Follow the SAFE WORKING PRACTICES FOR ENGINEERS issued by FXAP EH & S (Environmental Health and Safety) to ensure greater safety during servicing,

1-1

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.1 Before Starting the Servicing 1.1.2

Notes on the Handling of Customer Information 1. Handling electronic customer information such as copy/print/received Fax samples (paper information) and log files (activity report, etc.). When taking samples back to your base for the purpose of investigation/analysis, obtain consent from the customer without fail. Besides, be sure to tell him/her the samples will be used only for the primary purpose If asked by the customer to submit an application for taking samples out, use ”FX Security Code: separate document 15 ’Administration Table for Giving and Receiving Confidential/Personal Information (IS-019)’” or obtain consent in writing as directed by the customer. 2. Handling PWB and HDD storing customer information Take great care in handling PWB/HDD. Fax speed dial numbers and URLs the customer has entered in the machine are important customer information, which is stored in PWB/HDD in the machine. 1) At the time of replacement, be sure to transfer customer information onto the new PWB/HDD and clear the information from the old one before discarding it, in order never to let the information leak out. (Detailed in the prefaces to chapters 4 and 5.) 2) If the replacement of PWB/HDD proves that it is not the cause of a specific problem, be sure to reinstall it in the machine. (If having installed/removed PWB/HDD temporarily for diagnostics, clear information in Diag.) 3) If/When it is impossible to clear information electrically from HDD, shred the HDD (at a charge) as requested by the customer. 3. Rewritten-in-maintenance NVMs involving security concerns If having conducted a test by rewriting an NVM, such as polling, which involves security concerns, be sure to return the NVM to the former value after the work. (E.g.: For the details of polling, see FTO 2-202 common to all the models.) 4. If/When maintenance work requires that our device be connected to the customer’s network, be sure to obtain permission of the customer’s information system administrator through the person in charge (or of the person in charge), in order to do so. 5. Other notes on the handling of customer information You need to take many other precautions besides the above items 1 to 4 in handling customer information. Do the work, following rules and regulations on safety stipulated by your OpCo and taking great care not to let information leak out.

1-2

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.1 Before Starting the Servicing 1.1.3

Other Things to Note Pay attention to the following when performing maintenance service to avoid wrong or redundant servicing: 1. Reference Materials Before performing maintenance servicing, read all relevant technical materials such as SB, FTI, or FTO for a systematic approach. 2. Disassembling Make sure to check the assembled condition before removing parts or disassembling the machine. 3. Installation/Adjustment After the installation or adjustment is complete, check that no parts or tools are left inside or on the assemblies before using the machine. 4. Handling of parts/consumables replaced Make sure that the replaced parts or consumables as well as the packaging materials are collected back to the Service Center.

NOTE

For the separation and processing methods for the collected items, refer to the Common Technical Information No. 2-138 for all machines.

If you have replaced the following consumables, affix the "U" sticker for the recyclable parts to be handled appropriately. • Drum Cartridge • Individual Color Toner Cartridge For recyclable parts, fill the necessary items in the "U-TAG" and perform collection. 5. General precautions • Take care not to disturb the customer's daily work. • Place the drip cloth or paper on the customer's floor during work in the machine because color toners may dirty the floor and are difficult to clean. • Throw any trash generated during the maintenance service into the trash bag and bring them to the servicing office. • Record the service details and the consumables and parts replaced at visit in the Machine Service Log.

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B weighs 18kg. Always have 2 people available to move the printer. Refer to the Installation Procedures for details.

1-3

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.2 Servicing Call Procedure

1.2

Servicing Call Procedure

Initial Actions

1. 2. 3. 4.

Ask the operator(s) about the machine condition. Record the billing meter readings. Inspect any printing error, then check the machine. Check the Service Log.

1. 2. 3. 4.

UM Call

Troubleshoot on Level 1. Troubleshoot. Check the print quality using the test patterns on the machine. Feed paper from the respective trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the Feed Roll. 5. Repair all the secondary problems. 6. Perform TRIM servicing.

SM Call

1. Check the print quality using the test patterns on the machine. 2. Feed paper from the respective trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the Feed Roll. 3. Repair all the secondary problems. 4. Perform TRIM servicing.

Final Actions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Check overall operation/features. Check the machine exterior and consumables. Train the operator as required. Complete the Service Log and Service Report. Keep the print sample with the Service Log.

1-4

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.3 TRIM Servicing

1.3

TRIM Servicing TRIM Servicing for DocuPrint C1110/C1110B is performed in all SM/UM to maintain the performance of the machine. Independent visits for TRIM Servicing does not take place.

1.3.1

TRIM Servicing Procedure 1. Check overall operation before servicing • Make prints with a test pattern containing 20% color pattern for each color, gradation pattern and grid pattern. 1. 20% color pattern for each color: Checks for any scratches on the Transfer Assy and Drum, and for fusing failure. 2. Gradation pattern : Checks for improper low-density reproducibility, color balance and fusing failure. 3. Grid pattern : Checks for color misalignment and fusing failure. *

Refer to Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6.7.8 Test Print on executing test print.

2. Clean the interior of the machine • Clean toner residues and paper powder etc. in the paper delivery system. (Clean especially the operation section of the operator.) 3. Inspect parts that require periodic replacement (consumables) and replace them if necessary. 4. Safety Precautions • Check the connection of the power plug and any damage on the cord and the plug. 5. Check the overall operation after servicing as follows: • Check machine operation. • Check the print quality. • Check the billing meter reading.

1-5

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.3 TRIM Servicing 1.3.2

Machine Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts • Check the total number of copies printed during TRIM Servicing before replacing the machine consumables. Machine Consumables Product Name Print Cartridge 2K (Black) *1 Print Cartridge 2K (Cyan) *1 Print Cartridge 2K (Magenta) *1 Print Cartridge 2K (Yellow) *1 PHD Unit

Country

Product Code

Expected yield

AP/Korea/Taiwan

CT201114

2kPV

China

CT201118

2kPV

AP/Korea/Taiwan

CT201115

2kPV

China

CT201119

2kPV

AP/Korea/Taiwan

CT201116

2kPV

China

CT201120

2kPV

AP/Korea/Taiwan

CT201117

2kPV

China

CT201121

2kPV

AP/Korea/Taiwan

CT350604

20kPV

China * Use Conditions *1 Image Coverage Ratio = 5%

Periodic Replacement Parts Product Name

Product Code

Note

Fuser Unit-110V *1

EL300690

50kPV Includes Fuser Unit

Fuser Unit-220V *1

EL300689

50kPV Includes Fuser Unit

Feed Roller Unit

EL300691

50kPV

*1 Fuser Unit are CRU and can be ordered as product. This items are not registered as spare part.

1-6

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.3 TRIM Servicing 1.3.3

TRIM Check List

A ------ Perform checking. Clean, replace or supply if necessary. B ------ Always perform cleaning and checking. C ------ Always perform replacement service at the specified interval. * Refer to "Test Print" in 2.6.6 Menu Tree and 2.6.7.8 Test Print on how to output test patterns.

No

Servicing Items

Every time

100K

Removal/ Replacement No.

Service Details

1.1

Check Items before Servicing (Check the machine operation)

A

• Activate the machine and check that abnormal noise is not heard.

1.2

Check Items before Servicing (Output test patterns)

A

• Output the Built-in Test Pattern to check the print quality.

A

C

• Clean any paper dust and toner residue in the paper path and on the jam sensor. • Especially, clean the operation section of the operator carefully. • Check and clean the Feed Roll/ Retard Roll for every Tray and SSI.

3.1 Fuser Assy

B

C: 50K

3.2 PHD Assy

B

C: 20K

2

4

Clean the interior of the machine (Clean the paper transport system) Feed Roll/Retard Roll

Safety Precautions

REP 6.1

• Check that Heat Roll/Pressure Roll are not scratched. • Replace where necessary. • Visual check only. Do not touch with hand. • Make sure that the power plug is plugged in properly. • Make sure that the power cords are not cracked and no wires are exposed. • Make sure that no extension cord with insufficient length or power cord outside the specification, such as an offthe-shelf power strip, is being used. • Make sure that a single socket does not have multiple power plugs plugged to it.

B

5.1

Check Items after Servicing (Print Quality Check)

A

• Print built-in test patterns to confirm that the print quality satisfies the specification.

5.2

Check Items after Servicing (Check the machine operation)

A

• Check the paper feed and abnormal noise.

A

• Create the Service Log and Service Report.

5.3 Post-servicing check (meter)

1-7

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure 1.3 TRIM Servicing CAUTION

Do not touch the Drum/Toner Cartridges with hand. Do not use solvents such as Drum cleaner. (Long time is required for recovery.)

1-8

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting

CONTENTS 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting ........................................................................2-1 2.1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Confirms Installation Status ............................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.3 Cautions for Service Operations ..................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.4 Cautions for FIP Use....................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.5 Items to Be Confirmed Before Going to FIP Troubleshooting......................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.1 Basic Printer Problems ........................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.2 Display Problems .................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.3 Printing Problems.................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.1.5.4 Print Media Guidelines............................................................................................................ 2-6

2.2 FIP ............................................................................................................................2-10 2.2.1 FIP ................................................................................................................................................ 2-10 2.2.2 Flow of FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message................................................................................................... 2-11

2.3 ERROR CODE FIP...................................................................................................2-23 2.3.1 Level 1 FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-23 FIP-1.1 Erase Flash Err 016-500/Write Flash Err 016-501/Verify Flash Err 016-502/ Format Error 016-737/Invalid ID 016-742/Range Chk Error 016-743/ Check Sum Error 016-744/Header Error 016-745 ................................................................ 2-23 FIP-1.2 Out of Memory 016-718 ........................................................................................................ 2-24 FIP-1.3 PDL Error 016-720 ................................................................................................................ 2-25 FIP-1.4 Network Error 018-319,018-320,116-350,116-351,116-352,116-35/ Font ROM Error 116-310/MACaddress Error 116-314/RAM Error 116-315/ Controller Error 116-317,116-327,116-328/NV RAM Error 116-326,116-390/ ASIC Error 116-343 .............................................................................................................. 2-26 FIP-1.5 PAGEC Time Error 024-362 ................................................................................................. 2-27 FIP-1.6 RAM Error 116-316/116-320................................................................................................. 2-28 FIP-1.7 Insert Yellow Cartridge/Insert Magenta Cartridge/Insert Cyan Cartridge/ Insert Black Cartridge ........................................................................................................... 2-29 FIP-1.8 Non-Xerox Toner (Y)............................................................................................................. 2-30 FIP-1.9 Non-Xerox Toner (M) ............................................................................................................ 2-31 FIP-1.10 Non-Xerox Toner (C)........................................................................................................... 2-32 FIP-1.11 Non-Xerox Toner (K)........................................................................................................... 2-33 FIP-1.12 Replace Yellow/Replace Magenta/Replace Cyan/Replace Black/ Yellow Low/Magenta Low/Cyan Low/Black Low................................................................. 2-34 FIP-1.13 Waste Full ........................................................................................................................... 2-35 FIP-1.14 Check Manual Feed ............................................................................................................ 2-36 FIP-1.15 Jam at Front (MPT Insert Jam) ........................................................................................... 2-38 FIP-1.16 Jam at Front (Regi On Off Jam).......................................................................................... 2-39 FIP-1.17 Jam at Exit .......................................................................................................................... 2-41 FIP-1.18 Jam at Exit .......................................................................................................................... 2-43 FIP-1.19 Jam at Manual Feed ........................................................................................................... 2-45 FIP-1.20 Jam at Reg. Roll.................................................................................................................. 2-49 FIP-1.21 Jam at Tray ......................................................................................................................... 2-53 FIP-1.22 MPC Error 016-738,016-739,016-740................................................................................. 2-58

FIP-1.23 MPC Error 018-310,018-311,018-312,018-313,018-314,018-315,018-316,018-317,116-333 ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-59 FIP-1.24 CTD Sensor Error 092-310 ................................................................................................. 2-60 FIP-1.25 DTB Life Over 094-330/Transfer Life .................................................................................. 2-61 FIP-1.26 Check Unit/CTD Sensor/PHD ASSY Life............................................................................ 2-62 FIP-1.27 Insert PHD ASSY ................................................................................................................ 2-63 FIP-1.28 Low Density Yellow Cartridge ............................................................................................. 2-64 FIP-1.29 Low Density MagentaCartridge........................................................................................... 2-66 FIP-1.30 Low Density Cyan Cartridge ............................................................................................... 2-68 FIP-1.31 Low Density Black Cartridge ............................................................................................... 2-70 FIP-1.32 Replace PHD ASSY/PHD CRUM Error 091-916 ................................................................ 2-72 FIP-1.33 Insert Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-73 FIP-1.34 Load Manual Feed (Size Mismatch) ................................................................................... 2-74 FIP-1.35 Load Manual Feed (No Suitable Paper).............................................................................. 2-75 FIP-1.36 Load Tray ............................................................................................................................ 2-77 FIP-1.37 Load Tray/Tray Empty......................................................................................................... 2-78 FIP-1.38 Insert Fuser 010-317........................................................................................................... 2-80 FIP-1.39 Replace Fuser 010-351/Fuser Life...................................................................................... 2-82 FIP-1.40 Fuser Error 010-397............................................................................................................ 2-83 FIP-1.41 Fan Motor Error 042-313..................................................................................................... 2-85 FIP-1.42 Motor Error 042-325............................................................................................................ 2-87 FIP-1.43 Motor Error 042-326............................................................................................................ 2-88 FIP-1.44 Check Unit........................................................................................................................... 2-89 FIP-1.45 Front Cover Open ............................................................................................................... 2-90 FIP-1.46 Side Door Open .................................................................................................................. 2-92 FIP-1.47 MCU Firmware Err 024-340 ................................................................................................ 2-93 FIP-1.48 MCU NVRAM Error 041-340............................................................................................... 2-94 FIP-1.49 Laser Error 061-370 ............................................................................................................ 2-95 FIP-1.50 MCU Comm. Error 024-371 ................................................................................................ 2-96 FIP-1.51 Invalid User 016-757 ........................................................................................................... 2-97 FIP-1.52 Disabled Func 016-758 ....................................................................................................... 2-98 FIP-1.53 Limit Exceeded 016-759 ..................................................................................................... 2-99 FIP-1.54 Invalid Job 016-799........................................................................................................... 2-100 FIP-1.55 Download Mode 024-360 .................................................................................................. 2-101 FIP-1.56 K Mode Sol Error 042-372 ................................................................................................ 2-102 FIP-1.57 Env Sensor Error 092-661 ................................................................................................ 2-104

2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble.........................................................................................2-105 2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 2-105 2.4.2 Operation Mode Table ................................................................................................................ 2-106 FIP-1.N1 When Power is Turned On ............................................................................................. 2-106 FIP-1.N2 During Standby............................................................................................................... 2-108 FIP-1.N3 During Printing................................................................................................................ 2-109

2.5 Other FIP ................................................................................................................2-111 FIP-Electrical Noise ......................................................................................................................... 2-111 FIP-AC ............................................................................................................................................. 2-112 FIP-DC ............................................................................................................................................. 2-113 FIP-Multiple Feed............................................................................................................................. 2-114

2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode ....................................................................................2-115 2.6.1 Roles of the control panel in Diag. .............................................................................................. 2-115 2.6.2 Entering diag. CE mode.............................................................................................................. 2-115 2.6.3 Selecting Diag. item .................................................................................................................... 2-116 2.6.4 Change method parameters value.............................................................................................. 2-116 2.6.5 Executing/Exiting Diag. mode ..................................................................................................... 2-116 2.6.6 Diag. mode menu tree ................................................................................................................ 2-117 2.6.7 Contents of a Test....................................................................................................................... 2-121 2.6.7.1 CE Mode Diag..................................................................................................................... 2-121 2.6.7.2 Executing CE Mode diagnosis ............................................................................................ 2-121 2.6.7.3 ESS Diag ............................................................................................................................ 2-121 2.6.7.4 IOT Diag.............................................................................................................................. 2-125 2.6.7.5 Print Info ............................................................................................................................. 2-142 2.6.7.6 Installation........................................................................................................................... 2-143 2.6.7.7 Exit Mode ............................................................................................................................ 2-143 2.6.7.8 Test Print............................................................................................................................. 2-144 2.6.7.9 Parameter ........................................................................................................................... 2-152

2.7 NVM Access ...........................................................................................................2-155 2.7.1 NVM List ..................................................................................................................................... 2-157

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting

2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting After making sure of actual condition of a trouble, proceed with the troubleshooting process efficiently making use of the Fault Isolation Procedure (FIP), 2.6 How to use Diag. CE Mode, Wiring Data (Chapter 7), and Machine Overview (Chapter 10).

2.1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting Flow of the troubleshooting is as follows:

Installation status check

How to use Diag. CE Mode Wiring Data Machine Overview

Trouble status check

Execute FIP Reference information Trouble recovery check

End

2.1.2 Confirms Installation Status Be sure to check the following items before starting the troubleshooting procedures. 1

Voltage of the power supply is within the specifications.

2

Power cord is free from breakage, short-circuit, disconnected wire, or incorrect connection in the power cord.

3

The laser printer is properly grounded.

4

The laser printer is not installed at a place subjected to too high temperature, too high humidity, too low temperature, too low humidity or rapid change of temperature.

5

The laser printer is not installed close to water service, humidifier, heat generating unit, or fire, in very dusty place, or a place exposed to air flow from the air conditioning system.

6

The laser printer is not installed in a place where volatile gas or inflammable gas is generated.

7

The laser printer is not installed under direct sunbeams.

8

The laser printer is installed in a well-ventilated place.

2-1

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting 9

The laser printer is installed on a stout and stable plane.

10

Paper used meets specifications (standard paper is recommendable).

11

The laser printer is handled properly.

12

Parts which should be periodically replaced are replaced each time when specified number of sheets has been printed.

2.1.3 Cautions for Service Operations 1

Be sure to remove the power cord except when it is specifically required.

If the printer is kept ON, never touch the conductive parts while it is not specifically required. The power switch and inlet are live even while the power supply is cut off. Never touch the live parts. 2

When checking some parts with covers removed and with the interlock and safety and power switches ON, disconnect the connectors (P/J411 and P/J412) on the ROS ASSY except when it is specifically required.

When checking some parts with covers removed and with the interlock and safety and power switches ON, laser beams may be irradiated from the ROS ASSY. Since it is dangerous, be sure to disconnect the connectors (P/J411 and P/J 412) while it is not required. 3

When checking some parts with the Front Cover removed and power ON, be sure to disconnect the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU while it is not required.

When checking some parts with the Front Cover removed and power ON, high voltage may be applied by the PWBA HVPS. Be sure to disconnect the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU. When connecting the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU according to the instructions of the FIP, never touch the PWBA HVPS and parts of high voltage. 4

When using Diag. tools or other tools of high voltage, be sure to keep them covered except when otherwise specified.

When using Diag. Tool or other tools of high voltage, never touch parts of high voltage. When using Diag. Tool or other tools of high voltage, be sure to follow the procedures in this manual.

2-2

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting 5

When operating the driving units using the Diag or other tools, be sure to keep them covered unless otherwise specified.

When operating the driving units using the Diag or other tools, never touch the driving units. When operating the driving units using Diag or other tools, be sure to follow the procedures in this manual. 6

When touching hot parts, be careful not to get burnt.

7

Workers should wear a wrist band or the like to prevent static electricity from their body, grounding their body while working.

2.1.4 Cautions for FIP Use 1

When troubleshooting according to the FIP, normal PWBA MCU, PWBA HVPS, PWBA LVPS, FUSER ASSY, TRANSFER ASSY and so no may be necessary for isolation of failed parts. Prepare them in advance.

2

In the initial check according to the FIP, check only items which can be simply checked.

3

In the initial check according to the FIP, check the constitutive parts of the major check parts and related parts, as well as major check parts.

4

When working with the printer, be sure to remove the power cord except when required specifically.

5

Connector condition is denoted as follows: [P/J12] -> Connector (P/J12) is connected. [P12] -> Plug side with the connector (P/J12) disconnected (except when attached directly to the board). [J12] -> Jack side with the connector (P/J12) disconnected (except when attached directly to the board).

6

[P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN] in the FIP means measurement with the plus side of the measuring instrument connected to [2PIN] of [P/J1] and the minus side to [4PIN] of [P/J3].

7

[P/J1 P/J2] in the FIP means measurement for all terminals corresponding between [P/J1] and [P/J2] referring to "Wiring Diagrams".

8

In [P/J1-2PIN P/J3-4PIN] in the FIP where voltage is measured, [P/J3-4PIN] on the rear minus side is always at the AG (analog ground), SG (signal ground), or RTN (return). Therefore, after checking of proper conductivity between AGs, SGs, or RTNs respectively, the rear minus side can be connected to the PIN of AG, SG or RTN instead of [P/J3-4PIN]. However, care should be taken not to mistake since [AG], [SG], and [RTN] are not on the same level.

9

Measure the voltage of small connectors with the special tool. Handle the tool with care, as the leading edge of the tool is pointed.

10

When measuring the voltage, set the TRANSFER ASSY, TONER CARTRIDGEs and Paper Cassette, close the COVERs and power ON if not required specifically.

11

Numerical values in the FIP are only for standard. If numerical values are approximate, they should be considered permissible.

2-3

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting 12

Parts which are always removed to check as indicated in the FIP and procedures for that purpose are not specifically referred to here. They should be handled carefully.

13

"Replacement" in the FIP indicates replacement of parts which are considered to be the source of trouble to be checked after replacing those parts, assemblies containing them (HIGH ASSY).

14

In the FIP, procedures are differentiated depending on specifications. Correct troubles according to the instructions in the FIP.

15

For optional parts, some troubleshooting procedure may follow the manual for those options, of which you should take note. Keep those manuals for the optional parts when required.

2.1.5 Items to Be Confirmed Before Going to FIP Troubleshooting 2.1.5.1 Basic Printer Problems Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs, check each the following: z If a message is displayed on the personal computer connected with the printer, see "2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message". z The printer power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet. z The printer power is ON. z If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. This often solves the problem.

2.1.5.2 Display Problems z If the operation panel is blank, check and try the action below. 1

Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on the printer.

2

When an error has occurred, the error display mode and detailed error display mode can be switched by holding "Continue" key. In the detailed error display mode, detailed error status can be displayed on your PC.

z If the menu settings changed from the personal computer have no effect, check and try the actions below. Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities are overriding the settings made on the personal computer. 1

Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the software program.

2

b) Disable the settings in the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the software program so you can change settings on the personal computer.

2.1.5.3 Printing Problems z If a job did not print correct or incorrect characters were printed, check and try the actions below. 1

Make sure the green LED of "Ready/Data" on the operation panel lights before sending a job to print.

2

Make sure print media is loaded in the printer, then make sure the green LED of the "Tray" or "SSI" on the operation panel lights

2-4

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting 3

Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.

4

Make sure you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cables and it securely connected at the back of the printer.

5

Verify that the correct print media size is selected.

6

If using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.

7

Check the printer interface from the "Configuration Page". Determine the host interface you are using. Print a Panel Setting page to verify that the current interfaces settings are correct.

8

Output fonts will not print correctly using the PCL driver in its default mode. To correct this problem, use PostScript driver when using the PCL driver.

z If secure print is not available or not printing, refer to the requirements below. 1

64 MB is required.

2

The number of secure print jobs your printer can store is dependent on the job size including number of pages, graphics, color attributes, and the amount of memory installed. Decrease this number.

z If print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the actions below. 1

Make sure the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer. Refer to Print Media Guidelines of this section.

2

Flex print media before loading it.

3

Make sure the print media is loaded correctly.

4

Make sure the width and length guides on the print media sources are adjusted correctly.

5

If the print media are overfilled in sources, reduce the amount of media.

6

Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are using.

7

Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves.

8

Check the print media type loaded in the source, and refill only one type of print media, if print media types are mixed.

9

Refill a new ream of print media, if some reams are mixed.

10

Remove the top and bottom sheets of a ream before loading the print media.

11

Load a print media source only when it is empty.

z If envelope misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the action below. 1

Load an envelope from the SSI.

z If page breaks in unexpected places, check and try the action below. 1

Check the print data.

2-5

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting 2

Check the status on your PC.

z If a job prints from the wrong source or on the wrong print media, check and try the action below. 1

Check the "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" in the Tray Settings menu in the printer driver.

z If print media does not stack neatly in the output tray, check and try the action below. 1

Turn the print media stack over in the tray.

2.1.5.4 Print Media Guidelines Print media is paper, labels, envelopes, coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section describes how to select print media, how to care for print media, and how to load the print media in the standard 250sheet tray module. Paper For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb.) xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print media, it recommends trying a sample first. When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in Tray" and "SSI for detailed loading instructions. Paper Characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It recommends that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock. Weight The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb. bond) grain long. The single sheet inserter automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb. bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb.) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb. bond) grain long paper. Curl Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in humid conditions, even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems. Smoothness The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.

2-6

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting Moisture Content The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance. Grain Direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb. bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb. bond), grain short is preferred. Fiber Content Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling. Recommended Paper To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) xerographic paper. Business papers designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color. Only use paper able to withstand these temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers. Unacceptable Paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer: 1

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

2

Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

3

Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser

4

Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ?0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.

5

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

6

Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers

7

Recycled papers containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309

8

Multiple-part forms or documents

9

Label paper with Cut

2-7

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting Unacceptable Paper The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer: 1

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

2

Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

3

Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser

4

Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than 0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.

5

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

6

Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers

7

Multiple-part forms or documents

8

Label paper with Cut

Selecting Paper Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing. To help avoid jams or poor print quality: 1

Always use a new, undamaged paper.

2

Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.

3

Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

4

Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.

5

Do not remove trays while a job is printing.

6

Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Size settings are correct.

7

Make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.

8

Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

9

When curl is excessive, with plain paper, turn it over and reset it.

2-8

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications Table 2-1 Print Media Sizes and Support

Y: Yes

N: No

250-sheet Tray A4

Y

A5

Y

B5

Y

Letter

Y

Executive

Y

Folio (8.5" x13")

Y

Legal (8.5" x14")

Y

Com-10

Y

Monarch

Y

DL

Y

C5

Y

User-specified print media

Y

Table 2-2 Print Media Supported

Y: Yes 250-sheet Tray

Plain Paper Light (60-76gsm)

Y

Plain Paper Normal (80gsm)

Y

Plain Paper Thick (82-98gsm)

Y

Labels

Y

Covers Normal (106-163gsm)

Y

Covers Thick (164-216gsm)

Y

Envelope

Y

Postcard

Y

Coated Normal (106-163gsm)

Y

Coated Thin (95-105gsm)

Y

Coated Thick (164-216gsm)

Y

2-9

N: No

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP

2.2 FIP 2.2.1 FIP The FIP is the first step for trouble diagnosis. The FIP isolates the presence of various troubles including error codes, and guides the troubleshooting procedure.

2.2.2 Flow of FIP

Ask the operator about trouble status. Is operator's operating method correct?

N

Y

Instruct how to operate

Turn off and turn on the Power.

Does error still occur when print is done by the problem mode?

N End of work

Y

Refer to "2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message" When status code is displayed: Refer to "2.3 ERROR CODE FIP"

Refer to "3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting"

When image quality trouble is occurred:

Refer to "3.1.4 Image Quality FIP"

Refer to "2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting"

When abnormal noise is occurred:

Refer to "2.4.2 Operation Mode Table"

2-10

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP

2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message Problem

Error Message Erase Flash Err Restart Printer

Flip Error 016-500 Restart Printer Write Flash Err Restart Printer

Flip Error 016-501 Restart Printer Verify Flash Err Restart Printer

Flip Error 016-502 Restart Printer Out of Memory Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-718 Press Ok Button PDL Error Press Ok Button ESS

Flip Error 016-720 Press Ok Button Format Error Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-737 Press Ok Button Invalid ID Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-742 Press Ok Button Range Chk Error Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-743 Press Ok Button Check Sum Error Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-744 Press Ok Button

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

The flash memory error is detected.

FIP-1.1

The flash memory error is detected.

FIP-1.1

The flash memory error is detected.

FIP-1.1

Exceeds the memory capacity.

FIP-1.2

PDL error occurs.

FIP-1.3

The download file is broken, or communication error is detected.

FIP-1.1

The ID of the downloaded file is invalid.

FIP-1.1

The wrong address is detected.

FIP-1.1

The checksum is invalid.

FIP-1.1

2-11

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message Header Error Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-745 Press Ok Button Network Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-319 Restart Printer Network Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-320 Restart Printer PAGEC Time Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 024-362 Restart Printer Font ROM Error Restart Printer ESS

Flip Error 116-310 Restart Printer MACaddress Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-314 Restart Printer RAM Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-315 Restart Printer RAM Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-316 Restart Printer Controller Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-317 Restart Printer

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

The header information is invalid.

FIP-1.1

The error is detected by On Board Network OS.

FIP-1.4

The error is detected by On Board VxWORKS.

FIP-1.4

The PAGEC timeout error is detected.

FIP-1.5

Checksum error in main Font ROM is detected.

FIP-1.4

Checksum error in Network MAC address is detected. MAC: Media Access Control

FIP-1.4

The failure is detected by RAM W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.4

The error is detected by DIMM slot RAM W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.6

Checksum error in the main program ROM.

FIP-1.4

2-12

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message RAM Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-320 Restart Printer NV RAM Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-323 Restart Printer Controller Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-324 Restart Printer NV RAM Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-326 Restart Printer Controller Error Restart Printer ESS

Flip Error 116-327 Restart Printer Controller Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-328 Restart Printer ASIC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-343 Restart Printer Network Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-350 Restart Printer Network Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-351 Restart Printer

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

The error is detected by DIMM slot check during initialization.

FIP-1.6

The failure is detected by NVRAM 1 W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.4

CPU illegal exception is detected.

FIP-1.4

The failure is detected by NVRAM 2 W/R check during initialization.

FIP-1.4

Checksum error in the Instruction Cash.

FIP-1.4

Checksum error in the Data Cash.

FIP-1.4

The error is detected by ASIC error.

FIP-1.4

Communication error between CPU Network and ESS F/W is detected.

FIP-1.4

The error is detected by Network Ethernet parity RAM R/W check.

FIP-1.4

2-13

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message Network Error Restart Printer

FIP-1.4

The fatal error is detected by on board Network check.

FIP-1.4

Flip Error 116-390 Restart Printer

The error is detected by consistency check between NVRAM size required by the system and its actual size, and by consistency check of ID recorded when turning ON the power.

FIP-1.4

Insert Yellow Cartridge

Yellow Cartridge detached is detected.

FIP-1.7

Insert MagentaCartridge

Magenta Cartridge detached is detected.

FIP-1.7

Insert Cyan Cartridge

Cyan Cartridge detached is detected.

FIP-1.7

Insert Black Cartridge

Black Cartridge detached is detected.

FIP-1.7

Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Yellow

CRUM ID error of Yellow Cartridge is detected.

FIP-1.8

Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Magenta

CRUM ID error of Magenta Cartridge is detected.

FIP-1.9

Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Cyan

CRUM ID error of Cyan Cartridge is detected.

FIP-1.10

Non-Xerox Toner Invalid Black

CRUM ID error of Black Cartridge is detected.

FIP-1.11

Replace Yellow

Yellow Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Replace Magenta

Magenta Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Replace Cyan

Cyan Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Replace Black

Black Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Replace Yellow Cartridge

Yellow Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Replace MagentaCartridge

Magenta Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Replace Cyan Cartridge

Cyan Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Network Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-355 Restart Printer NV RAM Error Restart Printer

Toner Cartridge

Relevant FIP

The error is detected by on board Network Internal Loopback check.

Flip Error 116-352 Restart Printer

ESS

Error Contents

2-14

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Toner Cartridge

Error Message

Relevant FIP

Replace Black Cartridge

Black Cartridge reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Yellow Low Replace Soon

Yellow Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Magenta Low Replace Soon

Magenta Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Cyan Low Replace Soon

Cyan Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Black Low Replace Soon

Black Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.12

Waste Full Yellow Cartridge

Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.13

Waste Full MagentaCartridge

Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.13

Waste Full Cyan Cartridge

Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.13

Waste Full Black Cartridge

Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.13

Though it tried to feed a paper from MPT, the paper was not loaded or it was pulled out forcibly from MPT.

FIP-1.14

MPT No Paper Sensor detect when a paper is inserted from MPT.

FIP-1.15

Regi sensor turned on earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.16

Regi sensor turned off earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.16

The paper remains at Exit Sensor.

FIP-1.17

Check Manual Feed Remove Paper

Flip Open and close Front Cover Jam at Front Cover

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper Jam

Error Contents

Jam at Front Cover

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper Jam at Front Cover

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper Jam at Exit Open Front Cover

2-15

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

Jam at Exit

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper

Exit sensor turned off earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.18

Exit sensor turned on earlier than specified time.

FIP-1.18

The paper remains at Exit Sensor.

FIP-1.18

The paper remains at Exit Sensor.

FIP-1.18

Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time after feeding a paper from MPT.

FIP-1.19

The paper remains at Regi Sensor.

FIP-1.20

Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time after feeding a paper from CASSETTE1.

FIP-1.21

Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time after feeding a paper from MPT.

FIP-1.19

Failed to start MPC download mode at MPC download.

FIP-1.22

MPC Download was attempted without MPC mounted.

FIP-1.22

Communication error occurred ESS during download.

FIP-1.22

Jam at Exit

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper Jam at Exit

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper Jam at Exit Jam

Flip Open Front Cover and Remove Paper Jam at Manual Feed

Flip Check Manual Feed Open Front Cover Jam at Reg. Roll Open Front Cover Jam at Tray

Flip Check Tray Open Front Cover Reseat paper of Manual Feed MPC Error Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-738 Press Ok Button Reseat MPC Press Ok Button MPC

Flip Error 016-739 Press Ok Button MPC Comm Error Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-740 Press Ok Button

2-16

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message MPC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-310 Restart Printer MPC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-311 Restart Printer MPC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-312 Restart Printer MPC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-313 Restart Printer MPC Error Restart Printer MPC

Flip Error 018-314 Restart Printer MPC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-315 Restart Printer MPC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-316 Restart Printer MPC Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 018-317 Restart Printer MPC error Restart Printer

Flip Error 116-333 Restart Printer

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

Communication fail between MPC and ESS.

FIP-1.23

Checksum error in MPC Flash ROM.

FIP-1.23

The error is detected by MPC RAM R/W check.

FIP-1.23

Checksum error in MPC Flash ROM.

FIP-1.23

Checksum error in the MPC MAC address.

FIP-1.23

The error is detected by MPC Ethernet BIST parity RAM R/W check.

FIP-1.23

The error is detected by Loopback test.

FIP-1.23

The error is detected by MPC check.

FIP-1.23

Detection error of PCI option 0.

FIP-1.23

2-17

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message CTD Sensor Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 092-310 Restart Printer Flip 092-310 Code: XXXX DTB Life Over Restart Printer

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 092-310 Code: 0801:fail 1/0802: Fail 2

FIP-1.24

PHD ASSY reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.25

Check Unit CTD Sensor

Contamination of the ADC Sensor is detected.

FIP-1.26

Transfer Belt CTD Sensor

Contamination of the ADC Sensor is detected.

FIP-1.26

Insert PHD ASSY

PHD ASSY detached is detected.

FIP-1.27

Low Density Yellow Cartridge

Detects low density of yellow.

FIP-1.28

Low Density MagentaCartridge

Detects low density of magenta.

FIP-1.29

Low Density Cyan Cartridge

Detects low density of cyan.

FIP-1.30

Low Density Black Cartridge

Detects low density of black.

FIP-1.31

Replace PHD ASSY

CRUM ID error of PHD ASSY is detected.

FIP-1.32

Transfer Life Replace Soon

The PHD ASSY is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.25

Insert Output to Manual Feed

< Paper Empty at Manual Duplex> Waiting for side 2 to be set for manual duplex print(SSI).

FIP-1.33

Insert Output to Tray

< Paper Empty at Manual Duplex> Waiting for side 2 to be set for manual duplex print.

FIP-1.33

The paper size mismatch in Tray 1 is detected.

FIP-1.34

The paper empty is detected.

FIP-1.35

Flip Error 094-330 Restart Printer

Load Manual Feed XX(Paper size) Paper Setting

Flip Load Manual Feed YY(paper type) Load Manual Feed XX(Paper size)

Flip Load Manual Feed YY(paper type)

2-18

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message Load Tray XX(Paper size)

Flip Load Tray YY(paper type) Paper Setting

Load Tray XX(Paper size)

Flip Load Tray YY(paper type) Tray Empty Insert Fuser 010-317

Flip Insert Fuser Restart Printer Replace Fuser 010-351

Flip Replace Fuser Restart Printer

Fuser Fuser Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 010-397 Restart Printer Flip 010-397 Code: XX

Fuser Life Replace Soon Fan Motor Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 042-313 Restart Printer

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

The paper size mismatch in CASSETTE1 is detected.

FIP-1.36

The paper empty is detected.

FIP-1.37

The paper empty is detected.

FIP-1.37

Fuser detached is detected.

FIP-1.38

Fuser has reached the replacement time.

FIP-1.39

Fuser Failure is detected. Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK" 010-397 Code: XX 01: NC circuit fail/02: NC Detect disconnection/03: NC Detect fail/04: NC Comp disconnection/05: NC Comp fail/06: NC Temp Over/07: STS Temp Over/08: NC Comp Table Fail/09: NC Overheat/0A: STS disconnection/0B: STS Overheat/0C: STS Lowtemp/0D: NC Lowtemp/0E: Cool Timeover/0F: Fuser Ready Time over ERR1/10: NC Warm up Time over ERR2/11: Fuser Ready Time over ERR2/12: Relay Off STS H/13: Relay Off NC H/14: Relay Other/15: Fuser Machine Code ERR/16: Fuser Ready Time over ERR3

FIP-1.40

Fuser is going to reach replacement time.

FIP-1.39

Rear Fan Motor error is detected

FIP-1.41

Main Motor failure is detected.

FIP-1.42

Motor Motor Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 042-325 Restart Printer

2-19

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message Motor Error Restart Printer

Motor

Relevant FIP

Sub Motor failure is detected.

FIP-1.43

CRUM ID error of PHD ASSY is detected.

FIP-1.32

Check Unit PHD ASSY

Detects the tape staying on the PHD ASSY.

FIP-1.44

PHD ASSY Life

The PHD ASSY is going to reach the replacement time.

FIP-1.25

Front Cover Open Close FrontCover

Front cover is open.

FIP-1.45

Side Door Open Close Side Door

Side cover is open.

FIP-1.46

Flip Error 042-326 Restart Printer PHD CRUM Error Restart Printer

PHD ASSY

Error Contents

Flip Error 091-916 Restart Printer

Cover Open

Firmware error occurs. MCU Firmware Err Restart Printer

Flip Error 024-340 Restart Printer Flip 024-340 Code: XX MCU

MCU NVRAM Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 041-340 Restart Printer Flip ADDR: XXXX Data: XX

Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 024-340 Code: XX FIP-1.47 01: Task Over/02: Time Over/03: NV Write Retry/04: NV Write Queue Over/05: LEISUS Send Over/06: CRUM Data/07: Pursuit Comp/08: Pursuit SUM/09: Fuser NV/0A: Dispense/0B: FSR SBY Mode/0C: Media ERR2/0D: Hanpa/0E: FSR SBY Mode/0F: FSR Print Mode/10: Continuous Heater/11: PPM Group ERR/12: CMODE ERR/13: Send CMD ERR IOT NVM Error occurs. Shows detail of error code and address when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". ADDR: XXXX Data: XX 1000 to 17FF: MCU PWBA/3000 to 30FF: Transfer Belt/3100 to 31FF: Yellow Toner Cartridge/3200 to 32FF: Magenta Toner Cartridge/3300 to 33FF: Cyan Toner Cartridge/3400 to 34FF: Black Toner Cartridge

2-20

FIP-1.48

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message Laser Error Restart Printer

ROS

Flip Error 061-370 Restart Printer Flip 061-370 Code: XX MCU Comm. Error Restart Printer

System

Flip Error 024-371 Restart Printer Invalid User Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-757 Press Ok Button Disabled Func Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-758 Press Ok Button Limit Exceeded Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-759 Press Ok Button

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

ROS Failure is detected. Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 061-370 Code: XX 01: SOS Rotating up defect/02: SOS Interval defect/03h: LD defect

FIP-1.49

Communication failure between IOT and ESS is detected.

FIP-1.50

The user is not registered to any account.

FIP-1.51

An invalid account was detected.

FIP-1.52

The number of registered users exceeded its upper limit.

FIP-1.53

Detects violation data for the print condition.

FIP-1.54

The MCU downloaded file is invalid.

FIP-1.55

K Mode Solenoid (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) error is detected.

FIP-1.56

Other Invalid Job Press Ok Button

Flip Error 016-799 Press Ok Button Download Mode Send FW Data

Flip Error 024-360 Send FW Data K Mode Sol Error Restart Printer

Flip Error 042-372 Restart Printer

2-21

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.2 FIP Problem

Error Message Env Sensor Error Restart Printer

Other

Flip Error 092-661 Restart Printer Flip 092-661 Code: XX

Error Contents

Relevant FIP

Humid sensor error is detected. Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". 092-661 Code: XX 01: Humidity Sensor Error/10: Temperature Sensor Error/11: Humidity and Temperature Sensor Error

2-22

FIP-1.57

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

2.3 ERROR CODE FIP 2.3.1 Level 1 FIP FIP-1.1

Erase Flash Err 016-500/Write Flash Err 016-501/Verify Flash Err 016-502/Format Error 016-737/Invalid ID 016-742/Range Chk Error 016-743/Check Sum Error 016-744/Header Error 016-745

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1

Checking the download file Was the file for 6130N downloaded?

2

Checking the connection between PC and printer Are your PC and the printer correctly connected by USB or LAN? Go to step 3. Disconnect and reconnect the USB or network cable. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

End of work

3

Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking re-downloading the correct file for 6130N Re-download the correct file from Xerox web site. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

Go to step 2.

2-23

Re-download the correct file.

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.2 Step

Out of Memory 016-718 Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) MEMORY CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.12) 1

Checking the memory capacity for print Print the small size file (like a Windows test print). Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 2.

Add the MEMORY CARD or divide the printing job.

2

Checking after reseating the MEMORY CARD Reseat the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the memory card capacity Is the memory capacity recognized normally? Checked by [Information Page] - [Configuration] in [Setup].

Go to step 4.

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

4

Checking after replacing the MEMORY CARD Replace the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-24

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.3

PDL Error 016-720

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1

Checking the printing job Print the small size file (like a Windows test print). Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-25

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.4

Network Error 018-319,018-320,116-350,116-351,116-352,11635/Font ROM Error 116-310/MACaddress Error 116-314/RAM Error 116-315/Controller Error 116-317,116-327,116-328/NV RAM Error 116-326,116-390/ASIC Error 116-343

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-26

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.5

PAGEC Time Error 024-362

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1

Checking the error Does the error still occur when turning off and on the power?

Go to step 2.

End of work, if the error occurs again, go to step 2.

2

Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when turning off and on the power?

Replace the PWBA ESS.

End of work.

2-27

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.6 Step

RAM Error 116-316/116-320 Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL9.1.27) MEMORY CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.12) 1

Checking the MEMORY CARD for installation Reseat the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after replacing the MEMORY CARD Replace the MEMORY CARD. Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-28

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.7

Insert Yellow Cartridge/Insert Magenta Cartridge/Insert Cyan Cartridge/Insert Black Cartridge

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K). (Refer to REP5.7) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J311 (Y), J312 (M), J313 (C) or J324 (K) from the connector CRUM. Is each cable of J31 J311, J312, J313 or J324 continuous?

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM

5

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-29

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.8

Non-Xerox Toner (Y)

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 3.

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y).

3

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J311 surly, then go to step 6.

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J311 connected correctly?

5

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J311 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 J311 continuous?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM.

8

Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-3pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-30

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.9

Non-Xerox Toner (M)

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 3.

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M).

3

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J312 surly, then go to step 6.

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J312 connected correctly?

5

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J312 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 J312 continuous?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM.

8

Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-7pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-31

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.10 Non-Xerox Toner (C) Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 3.

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C).

3

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J313 surly, then go to step 6.

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J313 connected correctly?

5

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J313 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 J313 continuous?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM.

8

Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-11pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-32

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.11 Non-Xerox Toner (K) Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 3.

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (B).

3

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J31 and/or P/J314 surly, then go to step 6.

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and CONNECTOR CRUM. Are P/J31 and P/J314 connected correctly?

5

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J314 from the CONNECTOR CRUM. Is each cable of J31 J314 continuous?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM.

8

Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P31-15pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Replace the CONNECTOR CRUM. (Refer to REP5.6)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-33

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.12 Replace Yellow/Replace Magenta/Replace Cyan/Replace Black/Yellow Low/Magenta Low/Cyan Low/Black Low Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K). Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

2-34

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.13 Waste Full Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (PL5.1.21/5.1.22/5.1.23/5.1.24) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the waste toner counter Is the counter going to reach the replacement time? Checked by [Parameter] - [Life Y/M/C/K Waste Toner] in diagnosis.

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE.

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the error Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE. Does the error still occur when turning of and on the power?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work.

2-35

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.14 Check Manual Feed Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) SPRING REGI R M (PL3.2.24) SPRING REGI L M (PL3.2.29) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Was a paper pulled out from SSI forcibly?

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

2

Checking the printing Reload a paper to SSI. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after opening and closing the COVER ASSY FRONT Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for shape and operation Remove the PHD ASSY once to check the followings. Are ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL seated correctly? Are they not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly? Check these items by turning with your finger.

Go to step 5.

Clean or replace the defective ROLL(s).

5

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for contacting Is the ROLL REGI METAL surely contacted with the ROLL ASSY REGI by the spring force on both sides of the ROLL REGI METAL? Check this item with your finger.

Go to step 6.

Replace the SPRING REGI R M and/or SPRING REGI L M.

6

Checking the ACTUATOR SSI for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR SSI normal?

Go to step 7.

Reseat the ACTUATOR SSI. If broken or damaged, replace the ACTUATOR SSI.

7

Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR SSI) of the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Manual Feeder Sensor] in diagnosis.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 8.

2-36

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly 8

No

Go to step 10.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 9.

9

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J233 continuous?

Go to step 11.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

11

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 12.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the SENSOR PHOTO is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

2-37

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.15 Jam at Front (MPT Insert Jam) Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: HARNESS ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Checking the customer operation Did the customer insert the paper to the SSI during print?

After print completion, insert Go to step 2. the paper to the SSI.

2

Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR SSI) is operated by paper. Checked by [Sensor Check] - [Tray 1 MPT Sensor] in diagnosis.

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

3

Checking the error Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 5.

Checking the connectors of the SSI No Paper Sensor for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SSI No Paper Sensor. Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly

4

5

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J233 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

7

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 8.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

8

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA MCU. MCU. (Refer to Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the REP8.11) operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR SSI is operated?

2-38

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.16 Jam at Front (Regi On Off Jam) Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.8) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HAR ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) 1

Checking the error Clear the jammed paper. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 2.

End of work.

2

Checking the paper setting Was the paper correctly set to Tray?

Go to step 4.

Set the paper correctly, and go to step 3.

3

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 4.

End of work.

4

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for contacting Is the ROLL REGI METAL surely contacted with the ROLL ASSY REGI by the spring force on both sides of the ROLL REGI METAL? Check this item with your finger.

Go to step 5.

Replace the SPRING REGI R M and/or SPRING REGI L M.

5

Checking the Regi Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation Does the Regi Clutch operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Regi Clutch] in diagnosis.

Go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

6

Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) of the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 11.

Go to step 8.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly.

Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch). Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly?

7

2-39

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

8

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 P262 continuous?

Go to step 9.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

9

Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 10.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

10

Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.

Go to step 12.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

12

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J232 continuous?

Go to step 13.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

13

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 14.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

14

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across 23-5pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the SENSOR PHOTO is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly?

11

2-40

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.17 Jam at Exit Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Checking the paper feeding Was a paper fed from SSI?

Go to step 2.

Go to step 4.

2

Checking the paper setting Was the paper correctly set to SSI without slant?

Go to step 4.

Set the paper to SSI correctly, and go to step 3.

3

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the paper condition Is the paper wrinkled or damaged?

Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

5

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 7.

End of work

6

Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 8.

End of work

8

Checking the FUSER ASSY Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance in the FUSER ASSY? Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down.

Remove the paper and/or substance, then go to step 9.

Go to step 9.

9

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Exit Sensor] in diagnosis. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 11.

2-41

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY. Are P/J17 and P/J171 connected correctly?

Go to step 12.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17 and/or P/J171 correctly.

12

Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Remove the FUSER ASSY. Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J17 P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame.

Go to step 13.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

13

Checking the power to the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY Disconnect the connector of J17 on the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across J17-1pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 14.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

14

Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Check the voltage across J17-3pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1)

11

2-42

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.18 Jam at Exit Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARNESS ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Checking the error Clear the jammed paper. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 2.

End of work.

2

Checking the paper setting Was the paper correctly set to SSI or CASSETTE1?

Go to step 4.

Set the paper correctly, and go to step 3.

3

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 4.

End of work.

4

Checking the FUSER ASSY installation Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Does the error still occur when printing? Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down.

Go to step 5.

End of work.

5

Checking the FUSER ASSY Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance in the FUSER ASSY? Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down.

Remove the paper and/or substance, go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

6

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 7.

End of work.

7

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 8.

End of work.

8

Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Exit Sensor] in diagnosis. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 9.

Go to step 10.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17 and/or P/J171 correctly.

Checking the connectors of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY. Are P/J17 and P/J171 connected correctly?

9

2-43

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

10

Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Remove the FUSER ASSY. Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J17 P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame.

Go to step 11.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

11

Checking the power to the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY Disconnect the connector of J17 on the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across J17-1pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 12.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Checking the Exit Sensor for operation Check the voltage across J17-3pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1)

2-44

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.19 Jam at Manual Feed Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9)

1

Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper in the SSI wrinkled or damaged?

Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

4

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 6.

End of work

5

Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper in the SSI. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the paper lead edge staying position Does the paper lead edge stay before the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL?

Go to step 8.

The paper lead edge stay after the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL, then go to step 13.

8

Checking after resetting the guide sides of the SSI Reset the side guides. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 9.

End of work

9

Checking the paper transfer path between the SSI paper loading window and Regi.Sensor Are there any obstacles on the paper transfer path?

Remove the obstacles or stain from the paper transfer path, then go to step 10.

Go to step 11.

10

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 11.

End of work

11

Checking the ACTUATOR SSI for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR SSI normal?

Go to step 12.

Reseat the ACTUATOR SSI. If broken or damaged, replace the ACTUATOR SSI.

2-45

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Remedy

Step

Check

12

Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR SSI) of the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Manual Feeder Sensor] in diagnosis.

Go to step 13.

Go to step 16.

13

Checking the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation, and ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) operate properly, and the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 14.

Go to step 25.

14

Checking the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL normal?

Go to step 15.

Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. If broken or deformed, replace it with a new one.

15

Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 21.

Go to step 18.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 17.

Yes

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor). Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly 16

No

17

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 18.

End of work

18

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J233 continuous?

Go to step 19.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

19

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 20.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-46

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

20

Remedy

Check

Yes

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA MCU. MCU. (Refer to Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the REP8.11) operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR SSI is operated?

No Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly?

Go to step 22.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

22

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J232 continuous?

Go to step 23.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

23

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 24.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

24

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-5pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

21

2-47

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly?

Go to step 26.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly.

26

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 P262 continuous?

Go to step 27.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

27

Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 28.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

28

Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (Refer to REP3.1)

25

2-48

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.20 Jam at Reg. Roll Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9)

1

Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper wrinkled or damaged?

Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

4

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 6.

End of work

5

Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking around the Regi Sensor Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance around the Regi Sensor?

Remove the paper and/or substance, then go to step 8.

Go to step 9.

8

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 9.

End of work

9

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any remaining paper and/or damage on the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Remove the remaining paper. If the belt is damaged, replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 10.

10

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for shape and operation Remove the PHD ASSY once to check the followings. Are ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL seated correctly? Also, are they not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly? Check these items by turning with your finger.

Go to step 11.

Clean or replace the defective ROLL(s).

2-49

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

11

Checking the ACTUATOR REGI IN and ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the following. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI IN and ACTUATOR REGI ROLL normal?

Go to step 12.

Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI IN and/or ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. If broken or deformed, replace it or they.

12

Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) of the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis.

Go to step 13.

Go to step 16.

13

Checking the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) for operation Does the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Go to step 14. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 24.

14

Checking the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation, and ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) operate properly, and the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 15.

Go to step 20.

15

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

2-50

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly?

Go to step 17.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

17

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J232 continuous?

Go to step 18.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

18

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 19.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

19

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across 23-5pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the SENSOR PHOTO is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

16

2-51

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch). Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly?

Go to step 21.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly.

21

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 P262 continuous?

Go to step 22.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

22

Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 23.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

23

Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (Refer to REP3.1)

Go to step 25.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J21 and/or P/J211 correctly.

25

Checking the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT for continuity Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J211 from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Is each cable of J21 J211 continuous?

Go to step 26.

Replace the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT.

26

Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J21-2pin/J21-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP7.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

20

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Main Motor). Are P/J21 and P/J211 connected correctly?

24

2-52

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.21 Jam at Tray Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.9) HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9)

1

Checking the paper condition Is the paper in the Tray 1 wrinkled or damaged?

Replace the paper with a new and dry one, then go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after reloading a new paper Reload a new paper in the Tray 1. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) for operation Does the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Go to step 6. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 18.

6

Checking the DRIVE ASSY PH for operation Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Regi Clutch] and [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 7.

Go to step 29.

7

Checking the paper feeding position Is the paper not fed from the CASSETTE1?

Go to step 8.

Go to step 12.

8

Checking after resetting the Guide Sides and End Guide on the CASSETTE1 Reset the Guide Sides and End Guide, and reseat the CASSETTE1 to the printer correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 9.

End of work

2-53

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Remedy

Step

Check

9

Checking the HOLDER ASSY RETARD on the Tray 1 for shape and rotation Pull the Tray 1 out from the printer. Is the HOLDER ASSY RETARD not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly?

Go to step 10.

Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3)

10

Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED for shape and rotation Pull the CASSETTE1 out from the printer. Is the ROLL ASSY FEED not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated smoothly?

Go to step 11.

Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8)

11

Checking the Cassette Feed Solenoid (SOLENOID FEED) for operation Does the Cassette Feed Solenoid (SOLENOID FEED) operate properly? Checked by [Digital Output] - [CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Replace the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (Refer to REP2.1)

Go to step 21.

Yes

No

12

Checking the paper lead edge staying position Does the paper lead edge stay before the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL?

Go to step 13.

The paper lead edge stay after the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL, then go to step 16.

13

Checking the paper transfer path between the ROLL ASSY FEED and ROLL ASSY REGI. Are there any obstacles on the paper transfer path?

Remove the obstacles or stains from the paper transfer path.

Go to step 14.

14

Checking the ACTUATOR REGI IN for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI IN normal?

Go to step 15.

Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI IN. If broken or deformed, replace it.

15

Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis.

Go to step 16.

Go to step 25.

16

Checking the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL normal?

Go to step 17.

Reseat the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. If broken or deformed, replace it with a new one.

17

Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated? Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 25.

2-54

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Main Motor). Are P/J21 and P/J211 connected correctly?

Go to step 19.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J21 and/or P/J211 correctly.

19

Checking the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT for continuity Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J211 from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Is each cable of J21 J211 continuous?

Go to step 20.

Replace the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT.

20

Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J21-2pin/J21-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP7.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 22.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J231 correctly.

22

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P231 from the SOLENOID FEED. Is each cable of J23 P231 continuous?

Go to step 23.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

23

Checking the power to the SOLENOID FEED Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-1pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 24.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

24

Checking the SOLENOID FEED for resistance Disconnect P/J231 of the SOLENOID FEED. Is the resistance across J231-1 and J231-2 about 96 ohm?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the KIT SOLENOID FEED. (Refer to REP3.7)

18

Checking the connectors of the SOLENOID FEED (Cassette Feed Solenoid) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SOLENOID FEED. Are P/J23 and P/J231 connected correctly?

21

2-55

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J232 connected correctly?

Go to step 26.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J232 correctly.

26

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J232 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J232 continuous?

Go to step 27.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

27

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-3pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 28.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

28

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-5pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the operation. Does the voltage change, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.12)

25

2-56

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Are P/J26 and P/J262 connected correctly?

Go to step 30.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J262 correctly.

30

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is each cable of J26 P262 continuous?

Go to step 31.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

31

Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 32.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

32

Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280ohm?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (Refer to REP3.1)

29

2-57

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.22 MPC Error 016-738,016-739,016-740 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.11)

1

Checking the MPC Is the MPC installed on the PWBA ESS?

Go to step 2.

Install the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD. (Refer to REP8.4)

2

Checking the download MULTI PROTOCOL CARD firmware Is the download firmware the 6130N?

Go to step 3.

Redownload the correct firmware.

3

Checking the MPC installation Reseat the MPC. Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking after replacing the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD Replace the MPC. Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-58

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.23 MPC Error 018-310,018-311,018-312,018-313,018-314,018315,018-316,018-317,116-333 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.11)

1

Checking the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD for installation Is the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD installed correctly?

Go to step 2.

Reseat the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD(Refer to REP8.4), then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after replacing the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD Replace the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD. Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-59

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.24 CTD Sensor Error 092-310 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Checking the ADC Sensor Window Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the ADC Sensor window dirty? ADC Sensor window

1

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

2

Turn off the power, and gently wipe the ADC Sensor window with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab. After wiping the window, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is there any damage on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J28 and/or P/J281 correctly, then go to step 5.

Wsb01012GA

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and TRANSFER ASSY. Are P/J28 and P/J281 connected correctly?

4

5

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J281 from the TRANSFER ASSY. Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J281 J28 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

7

Checking the power to the ADC Sensor Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P28-1pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +5 VDC?

Replace the ADC Sensor or TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-60

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.25 DTB Life Over 094-330/Transfer Life Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Checking the life counter value of the PHD ASSY Does the life count value show the near of the end?

Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4)

Go to step 2.

2

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) CAUTION: Be sure to pull eight sealing tapes out from a new PHD ASSY before installation. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-61

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.26 Check Unit/CTD Sensor/PHD ASSY Life Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 4.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J28 and/or P/J281 correctly, then go to step 3.

Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Turn OFF the power, and gently wipe the ADC Sensor window with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab. After wiping the window, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? ADC Sensor window

1

Wsb01012GA

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and ADC Sensor. Are P/J28 and P/J281 connected correctly?

2

3

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J281 from the TRANSFER ASSY. Is each cable of J28 J281 continuous?

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

5

Checking the surface of the belt on the TRANSFER ASSY Is the belt dirty?

Clean the belt with a clean dry cloth, then go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY or ADC Sensor. (Refer to REP6.3) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-62

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.27 Insert PHD ASSY Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 4.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J42 and/or P/J422 surly, then go to step 3.

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11) 1

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connectors for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and PHD ASSY. Are P/J42 and P/J422 connected correctly?

2

3

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO for continuity Disconnect P422 from the PHD ASSY. Disconnect J42 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of P422 J42 continuous?

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO.

5

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) CAUTION: Be sure to pull eight sealing tapes out from a new PHD ASSY before installation. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-63

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.28 Low Density Yellow Cartridge Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.)

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7)

Go to step 3.

2

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the sealing tapes for yellow toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for yellow toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY.

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

4

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Yellow Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Go to step 12.

Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1)

Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal? 7

Gear Wsb01014GA

2-64

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J18 and P/J181 connected correctly?

8

Go to step 10.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J18 and/or P/J181 surly, then go to step 9.

9

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J181 from the TNR (Y) MOT. Is each cable of J18 J181 continuous?

Go to step 11.

Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

11

Checking the power to TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P18-3pin ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed.

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 14.

End of work

14

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

2-65

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.29 Low Density MagentaCartridge Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.)

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7)

Go to step 3.

2

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the sealing tapes for magenta toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for magenta toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY.

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

4

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Go to step 7. Checked by [Digital Output] - [Magenta Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 8.

2-66

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal? 7

Go to step 12.

Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1)

Go to step 10.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J18 and/or P/J182 surly, then go to step 9.

Gear Wsb01016GA

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J18 and P/J182 connected correctly?

8

9

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J182 from the TNR (M) MOT. Is each cable of J18 J182 continuous?

Go to step 11.

Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

11

Checking the power to TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P18-8pin ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed.

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 14.

End of work

14

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

2-67

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.30 Low Density Cyan Cartridge Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.)

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7)

Go to step 3.

2

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the sealing tapes for cyan toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for cyan toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY.

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

4

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Cyan Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Go to step 12.

Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1)

Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal?

7

Gear Wsb01018GA

2-68

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J19 and P/J191 connected correctly?

8

Go to step 10.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J19 and/or P/J191 surly, then go to step 9.

9

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J191 from the TNR (C) MOT. Is each cable of J19 J191 continuous?

Go to step 11.

Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

11

Checking the power to TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P19-4pin ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed.

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 14.

End of work

14

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

2-69

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.31 Low Density Black Cartridge Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6) GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7) GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8) TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.)

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), then go to step 2. (Refer to REP5.7)

Go to step 3.

2

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the sealing tapes for black toner of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes for black toner been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY.

Go to step 5.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 4.

4

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and shake it from side to side. Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation Does the TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Black Toner Motor] in diagnosis. During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

Go to step 12.

Replace the defective gear(s) or DISPENSER ASSY. (Refer to REP5.1)

Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and operation Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY normal? 7

Gear Wsb01020GA

2-70

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J19 and P/J192 connected correctly?

8

Go to step 10.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J19 and/or P/J192 surly, then go to step 9.

9

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J192 from the TNR (K) MOT. Is each cable of J19 J192 continuous?

Go to step 11.

Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

11

Checking the power to TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J19 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P19-9pin ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed.

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 and 5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

12

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key is in the lock position. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 13.

End of work

13

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 14.

End of work

14

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

End of work

2-71

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.32 Replace PHD ASSY/PHD CRUM Error 091-916 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the PHD ASSY type Is the seated PHD ASSY for 6130N?

Go to step 4.

Replace the PHD ASSY for 6130N, then go to step 3.

3

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and PHD ASSY. Are P/J42 and P/J422 connected correctly?

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J42 and/or P/J422 surly, then go to step 6.

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

Checking the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO for continuity Disconnect P422 from the PHD ASSY. Disconnect J42 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of P422 J42 continuous?

7

8

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

2-72

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.33 Insert Output Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts:

1

Checking the customer operation Did the customer load the paper to the tray?

Go to step 2.

Load the paper.

2

Checking the customer operation Did the customer load the paper to the tray too late?

Try print again.

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the customer operation Did the customer load the paper to specified tray?

Go to No paper FIP

Try print again.

2-73

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.34 Load Manual Feed (Size Mismatch) Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the print data, paper (print media) and paper settings Check the followings. - Are the print data and the paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and print data suitable? After checking, correct the incorrect item(s). Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 4.

End of work

Reloading a correct paper to SSI Reload a correct paper to fill the paper setup. Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA MCU (Refer to REP8.11), if not, replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

4

2-74

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.35 Load Manual Feed (No Suitable Paper) Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the paper for loading and setting Check that the loaded paper meets the print job. Check that the paper setting to require the print job meets the specification. Does the error still occur after reloading the paper and changing the paper settings that requires the print job?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after setting the guide sides of the SSI Reset the guide sides. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after reloading a paper to SSI Reload a correct paper to fill the paper setup. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the ACTUATOR SSI for shape and operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape and operation. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR SSI normal?

Go to step 5.

Reseat the ACTUATOR SSI. If broken or deformed, replace the ACTUATOR SSI.

5

Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the Replace the PWBA operation. MCU. (Refer to Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator REP8.11) (ACTUATOR SSI) of the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Manual Feeder Sensor] in diagnosis.

Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly 6

Go to step 6.

Go to step 8.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J233 correctly, then go to step 7.

7

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 8.

End of work

8

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J233 continuous?

Go to step 9.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

2-75

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

9

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-6pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

10

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-8pin ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA MCU. MCU. (Refer to Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the REP8.11) operation. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR SSI is operated?

2-76

Go to step 10.

No Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.10)

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.36 Load Tray Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the paper size Does the using paper size meet the specification?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the print data, paper (print media) and paper settings Check the followings. - Are the print data and the paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and paper suitable? - Are the paper setting and print data suitable? After checking, correct the incorrect item(s). Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking after reloading a paper and the CASSETTE ASSY 250 Reload a correct paper into the CASSETTE ASSY 250. Reseat the CASSETTE ASSY 250 correctly. Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-77

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.37 Load Tray/Tray Empty Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Possible causative parts: HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18) SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13) ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL3.2.19) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the paper for loading and setting Check that the loaded paper meets the print job. Check that the paper setting to require the print job meets the specification. Does the error still occur after reloading the paper and changing the paper settings that requires the print job?

2

Checking the ACTUATOR NO PAPER for shape and operation Pull the CASSETTE ASSY 250 out. Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER normal?

Go to step 3.

Reseat the ACTUATOR NO PAPER. If broken or deformed, replace the ACTUATOR NO PAPER.

3

Checking the CST No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation Pull the CASSETTE ASSY 250 out. Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator (ACTUATOR NO PAPER) of the CST No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) is operated? Checked by [Digital Input] - [CST NO PAPER] in diagnosis.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J23 and/or P/J234 correctly.

Go to step 6.

Replace the HARN ASSY L SIDE.

Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (CST No Paper Sensor) for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR PHOTO. Are P/J23 and P/J234 connected correctly?

4

5

Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J234 from the SENSOR PHOTO. Is each cable of J23 J234 continuous?

2-78

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

6

Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO Disconnect J23 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P23-9pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 7.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

7

Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation Check the voltage across J23-11pin ground on the PWBA MCU. Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR NO PAPER is operated?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the SENSOR PHOTO.(Refer to REP3.11).

2-79

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.38 Insert Fuser 010-317 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Go to step 2.

End of work

Go to step 4.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17 and/or P/J171 correctly, then go to step 3.

Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Checking the connectors for connection Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and FUSER ASSY. Are P/J17 and P/J171 connected correctly?

2

3

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J17 P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame.

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

2-80

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Remedy

Step

Check

5

Checking the resistances of Temp. Sensor in the FUSER ASSY Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Check the resistances across the following pins of the removed FUSER ASSY. J171-5pin J171-4pin J171-6pin J171-8pin J171-6pin J171-7pin Can the resistances be measured? (The resistances are 7 k-ohm at 180 degrees C).

2-81

Yes

No

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter value.

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.39 Replace Fuser 010-351/Fuser Life Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the life counter value of the FUSER ASSY Does the life counter value show the near of the end?

Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) After replacement , be sure to clear the life counter value.

2

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? NOTE: After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter value.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-82

Go to step 2.

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.40 Fuser Error 010-397 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the connectors for connection Remove the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Check the connections between the PWBA MCU (P/J17) and FUSER ASSY (P/J171). Check the connections between the FUSER ASSY (P/J171) and PWBA LVPS (P/J47). Check the connections between the PWBA LVPS (P/J501 and P/ J502) and PWBA MCU (P/J14 and P/J15). Are these connectors connected correctly?

Go to step 5.

"Reconnect the connector(s) P/J17, P/J47, P/J171, P/ J501, P/J502, P/J14 and/or P/J15 correctly, then go to step 4."

4

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J47 from the PWBA LVPS. Is each cable of J17 and J47 P171 continuous? NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame.

Go to step 6.

Replace the HARN ASSY FUSER.

6

Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. Is each cable of J14 J501 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

2-83

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Check

Remedy Yes

No

7

Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? NOTE: After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter value.

Go to step 8.

End of work

8

Checking after replacing the PWBA LVPS Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-84

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.41 Fan Motor Error 042-313 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the FAN MAIN for rotation Does the FAN MAIN function normally? Checked by [Digital Ouput] - [Fan (HIGH)] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 3.

Go to step 5.

Reconnect the connector P/J503 correctly, then go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J501 and P/J14 correctly, then go to step 6.

Check the connection between the FAN MAIN and PWBA LVPS. Is P/J503 on PWBA LVPS connected correctly?

3

4

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Check the connections between the PWBA LVPS and PWBA MCU. Are P/J501 and P/J14 connected correctly?

5

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Is each cable of J501 J14 continuous?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

2-85

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the power to the FAN MAIN Disconnect J503 from the PWBA LVPS. Is the voltage across P503-1pin ground on the PWBA LVPS, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

8

9

Checking after replacing the PWBA LVPS Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

2-86

Replace the FAN MAIN. (Refer to REP8.1)

Go to step 9.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.42 Motor Error 042-325 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7) 1

Does the error occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the Main Motor for rotation Replace the PWBA Does the Main Motor function normally? MCU. (Refer to Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. REP8.11) During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Go to step 4.

Checking the connectors of the MAIN MOTOR for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Are P/J21 and P/J211 connected correctly?

4

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J21 and/or P/J211 correctly, then go to step 5.

5

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT for continuity Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J211 from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Is each cable of J21 J211 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT.

7

Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 8.

End of work

8

Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J21-2pin/J21-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Replace the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP7.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-87

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.43 Motor Error 042-326 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY SUB MOT (PL9.1.8) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY and PHD ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY and PHD ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the Sub Motor for rotation Does the Sub Motor function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J22 and/or P/J221 correctly, then go to step 5.

Checking the connectors of the SUB MOTOR for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY SUB. Are P/J22 and P/J221 connected correctly?

4

5

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the HARN ASSY SUB MOT for continuity Disconnect J22 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J221 from the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Is each cable of J22 J221 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY SUB MOT.

7

Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY SUB Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 8.

End of work.

8

Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY SUB Disconnect J22 from the PWBA MCU. Are the voltages across J22-2pin/J22-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Replace the DRIVE ASSY SUB. (Refer to REP7.1)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

2-88

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.44 Check Unit Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

1

Checking the sealing tapes of the PHD ASSY staying Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Remove the PHD ASSY. Has the sealing tapes (total eight sealing tapes) been pulled out? After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY correctly.

Go to step 3.

Pull the sealing tapes out, then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) CAUTION: Be sure to pull eight sealing tapes out from a new PHD ASSY before installation. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-89

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.45 Front Cover Open Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3) Replace the COVER ASSY FRONT. (Refer to REP1.7)

Go to step 2.

1

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT (Front Cover) for shape Are there any damages on the COVER ASSY FRONT?

2

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the COVER ASSY FRONT latched correctly?

Go to step 3.

Reseat or replace the COVER ASSY FRONT. (Refer to REP1.7)

3

Checking the interlock switch for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the COVER ASSY FRONT is closed and opened? Checked by [Digital Input] - [IL OPEN] in diagnosis.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J14 and/or P/J501 correctly, then go to step 5.

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between PWBA MCU and PWBA LVPS. Are P/J14 and P/J501 connected correctly?

4

5

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. Is each cable of J14 J501 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

2-90

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the power to the Interlock Switch Disconnect the connector of J44 on the PWBA LVPS. Is the voltage across P44-1 ground on the PWBA LVPS, about +24 VDC?

7

8

Go to step 8.

Checking the Interlock Switch for operation Replace the PWBA Check the voltage across P44-3pin ground on the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to LVPS. Does the voltage change, when the Interlock Switch is turned ON/ REP8.6) OFF?

2-91

Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6)

Replace the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK. (Refer to REP8.7)

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.46 Side Door Open Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5) SWITCH (PL5.1.9) HARN ASSY SIDE SW (PL5.1.27) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Replace the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (Refer to REP1.5)

Go to step 2.

1

Checking the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (Side Cover) for shape Are there any damages on the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR?

2

Checking the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TRN. Is the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR latched correctly?

Go to step 3.

Reseat or replace the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (Refer to REP1.5)

3

Checking the Side R Switch (SWITCH) for operation Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the COVER ASSY WINDOW TRN is closed and opened? Checked by [Digital Input] - [Side Switch] in diagnosis.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

Replace the HARN ASSY SIDE SW.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

Checking the HARN ASSY SIDE SW for continuity Disconnect J29 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J291 from the SIDE R SWITCH. Is each cable of J29 J291 continuous?

4

5

Checking after replacing the Side R Switch (SWITCH) Replace the Side R Switch (SWITCH). (Refer to REP5.4) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

2-92

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.47 MCU Firmware Err 024-340 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Does the error still occur after several ON/OFF procedures of the power?

Go to step 2.

End of work *1

2

Checking the firmware version Is the firmware the latest version?

Go to step 3.

Upgrade the firmware, then go to step 3.

3

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work *1

4

Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to Electrical Noise.

End of work

5

Checking the external noise Are there any other electrical appliances within 3 meters form the printer, such as generators, radio and appliances with motors? Either turn off the other electrical appliances, or relocate the printer at least 6 meters away from other appliances. Does the electrical noise error still occur?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the AC ground Is AC power supply outlet wired and grounded appropriately?

Go to step 7.

Request the client to fix AC power supply outlet.

7

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 8.

8

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

9

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur?

Reseat the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3)

End of work

2-93

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.48 MCU NVRAM Error 041-340 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: TONER CARTRIDGE (PL5.1.21/5.1.22/5.1.23/5.1.24) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Checking the error Does the error still occur when turning off and on the power?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 1***" displayed?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 30**" displayed?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 4.

4

Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 31**" displayed?

Replace the Yellow Toner Cartridge.

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 32**" displayed?

Replace the Magenta Toner Cartridge.

Go to step 6.

6

Checking the failure parts Is the "ADDR: 33**" displayed?

Replace the Cyan Toner Cartridge.

Replace the Black Toner Cartridge.

2-94

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.49 Laser Error 061-370 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) HARN ASSY ROS RE (PL4.1.22) HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO (PL4.1.23) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking after reseating the ROS ASSY Reseat the ROS ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 4.

End of work

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 correctly, then go to step 5.

Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and P/J412 connected correctly?

4

5

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking the HARN ASSY ROS RE for continuity Disconnect P/J40 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect P/J411 from the ROS ASSY. Is each cable of J40 J411 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY ROS RE.

7

Checking the HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO for continuity Disconnect J41 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J412 from the ROS ASSY. Is each cable of J41 J412 continuous?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO.

8

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-95

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.50 MCU Comm. Error 024-371 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY ESS (PL9.1.1) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS and PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA ESS and PWBA MCU. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 5.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J10 and/or P/J101 correctly, then go to step 4.

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and PWBA ESS. Are P/J10 and P/J101 connected correctly?

3

4

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking the HARN ASSY ESS for continuity Disconnect J10 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J101 from the PWBA ESS. Is each cable of J10 J101 continuous?

Go to step 6.

Replace the HARN ASSY ESS.

6

Checking after replacing the PWBA ESS Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

2-96

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.51 Invalid User 016-757 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts:

1

Checking your account registration Is your account registered in your network?

Go to step 3.

Please request the registration to your system administrator, then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking connection Is your PC surely connected with the printer via network?

Please consult your system administrator.

Connect your PC with printer surely, then go to step 4.

4

Does the error still occur when printing?

Please consult your system administrator.

End of work

2-97

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.52 Disabled Func 016-758 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1

Checking the power of the printer Is the power of the printer turned ON?

Go to step 3.

Turn ON the power of the printer, and go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking your operation Is the operation that you did an available function for 6130N?

Go to step 4.

Please inquire to your system administrator, or check this operation by the User Guide.

4

Checking connection Is your PC surely connected with the printer?

Go to step 6.

Connect your PC with printer surely, then go to step 5.

5

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Reseat the PWBA ESS. Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-98

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.53 Limit Exceeded 016-759 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1

Check the [Print Auditron] setting Does the value of [User Registration] exceed the limitation? Maximum user is five.

Reset to 5 or less and go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work.

3

Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work.

2-99

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.54 Invalid Job 016-799 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)

1

Checking the paper size Does the paper size in use meet the specifications?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Does the error still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the paper size setup Does the using paper size match the printer setup value?

Go to step 5.

Go to step 4.

4

Setup the paper size through your PC. Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

5

Checking the printing job Does the error still occur when printing the Windows test print?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

Check that the printing data is correct.

2-100

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.55 Download Mode 024-360 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9) 1

Checking the download firmware Is the download firmware the 6130N?

Go to step 2.

Redownload the correct firmware.

2

Checking the PWBA ESS installation Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware?

Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

End of work

2-101

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.56 K Mode Sol Error 042-372 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking the K Mode Solenoid (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) for operation Does the K Mode Solenoid function normally? Checked by [Digital Output] - [K Mode Solenoid] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the K Mode Solenoid click sound arise from the DRIVE ASSY PH, when the K Mode Solenoid check is performed?

Go to step 4.

Go to step 5.

4

Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY PH Reseat the DRIVE ASSY PH. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 9.

End of work

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector P/J24 correctly, then go to step 6.

Checking the connector of the K Mode Solenoid in the DRIVE ASSY PH for connection Check the connection between the PWBA MCU and K Mode Solenoid. Is P/J24 connected correctly?

5

6

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking the power to the K Mode Solenoid Disconnect J24 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P24-1pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?

Go to step 8.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

8

Checking the K Mode Solenoid for resistance Disconnect P/J24 from the PWBA MCU. Is the resistance across J24-1 and J24-2 about 80 to 110-ohm?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the DRIVE ASSY PH. (Refer to REP7.4)

2-102

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors of the K Mode Sensor in the DRIVE ASSY PH for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and K Mode Sensor. Are P/J26 and P/J261 connected correctly?

9

Go to step 11.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J26 and/or P/J261 correctly, then go to step 10.

10

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 11.

End of work

11

Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J261 from the K Mode Sensor. Is each cable of J26 J261 continuous?

Go to step 12.

Replace the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL.

12

Checking the power to the K Mode Sensor Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P26-1pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Go to step 13.

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

13

Checking the K Mode Sensor for operation Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH from the printer once, but P/J261 and P/J24 should be connected. Enter the [Digital Input] - [K Mode Sensor] in diagnosis. During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the voltage change, when a piece of paper is inserted into the gap of the K Mode Sensor?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Replace the DRIVE ASSY PH. (Refer to REP7.4)

2-103

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

FIP-1.57 Env Sensor Error 092-661 Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) HARN ASSY HUM (PL9.1.6) 1

Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking after reseating the SENSOR HUM Reseat the SENSOR HUM. Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?

Go to step 3.

End of work

Go to step 4.

Replace the HARN ASSY HUM.

Replace the SENSOR HUM. (Refer to REP8.8)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Checking the HARN ASSY HUM for continuity Disconnect J20 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J201 from the SENSOR HUM. Is each cable of J20 J201 continuous?

3

4

Checking the power to SENSOR HUM Disconnect the connector of J20 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P20-4pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +5 VDC?

2-104

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble 2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting

Y

Check the Operation Mode Table of Power ON. Check the components are normal without any stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N1)

Y

Check the Operation Mode Table of Standby. Check the components are normal without any stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N2)

Y

Check the Operation Mode Table of Printing. Check the components are normal without any stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N3)

Does abnornal noise arise during adjustment after Power ON? N

Does abnormal noise arise during Standby? N



Does abnormal noise arise during printing?

2-105

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

2.4.2 Operation Mode Table FIP-1.N1 When Power is Turned On Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) 1

Checking the Main Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 2. Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 5.

2

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Go to step 3. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

End of work

3

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Go to step 4. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

End of work

4

Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY MAIN TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (Refer to REP6.3) Does the noise arise from the printer? and DRIVE ASSY Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. MAIN (Refer to REP7.2) one after another.

End of work

5

Checking the Sub Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 6.

Check the installation situation of printer.

6

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 7.

End of work

7

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 8.

End of work

2-106

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble Step

8

Remedy

Check

Yes

Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY SUB Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

2-107

Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), FUSER ASSY (Refer to REP6.1) and DRIVE ASSY SUB (Refer to REP7.1) one after another.

No

End of work

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

FIP-1.N2 During Standby Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) 1

Checking the FAN MAIN Does the noise arise from the Fan? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Fan (High)] in diagnosis.

2-108

Replace the FAN MAIN. (Refer to REP8.1)

Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6)

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

FIP-1.N3 During Printing Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts: HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) 1

Checking the paper feeding Does the noise arise from the printer when the paper is fed from the Tray 1?

Go to step 2.

Go to step 6.

2

Checking the paper condition in the Paper Cassette Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 4.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 3.

3

Checking noise when the paper is fed from the Tray 1 Does the noise arise from the printer?

Go to step 4.

End of work

4

Checking the HOLDER ASSY RETARD in the Paper Cassette for rotation Remove the Paper Cassette from the printer. Does the SEPARATOR ROLLER rotate smoothly? Turning it with your finger.

Go to step 5.

Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3)

5

Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED for rotation Remove the Paper Cassette from the printer. Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Cassette Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)]. Does the noise arise from this Roller? NOTE: After checking is completed, turn off [Cassette Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)] check first, and then turn off [Main Motor FULL2] check.

Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8)

Go to step 9.

6

Checking the paper guide sides setting and paper setting of SSI Were the paper guide sides of SSI correctly set, and was the paper correctly inserted into SSI?

Go to step 7.

Reset the paper guide sides, and correctly insert the paper to SSI, then go to step 7.

7

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 9.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 8.

8

Checking noise when the paper is fed from the SSI Does the noise arise from the printer?

Go to step 9

End of work

9

Checking the Main Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 10. Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

2-109

Go to step 16.

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

10

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Go to step 11. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

End of work

11

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Go to step 12. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

End of work

12

Checking the foreign substances on the surfaces of the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL Are there any foreign substances on the surfaces of these parts?

Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 13.

Go to step 14.

13

Checking noise when printing Does the noise arise from the printer?

Go to step 14.

End of work

14

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the noise arise from the Roller(s)?

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI and/or ROLL REGI METAL.

Go to step 15.

15

Checking the DRIVE ASSY MAIN for installation Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), TRANSFER ASSY (Refer to REP6.3) and DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Refer to REP7.2) one after another.

End of work

16

Checking the Sub Motor Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 17.

Check the installation situation of the printer.

17

Checking the PHD ASSY for installation Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 18.

End of work

18

Checking the FUSER ASSY for installation Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Go to step 19.

End of work

Checking the DRIVE ASSY SUB for installation Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Does the noise arise from the printer? Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.

Try replacing the PHD ASSY (Refer to REP4.4), FUSER ASSY (Refer to REP6.1) and DRIVE ASSY SUB (Refer to REP7.1) one after another.

End of work

19

2-110

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.5 Other FIP

2.5 Other FIP Other FIP covers the Electrical Noise FIP, Power Supply FIP and Multiple Feed FIP, except Error Code FIP, Abnormal Noise FIP and Image Quality FIP.

FIP-Electrical Noise Step

Check

Remedy Yes

No

1

Checking the external noise Are there any other electrical appliances within 3 meters form the printer, such as generators, radio and appliances with motors? Either turn off the other electrical appliances, or relocate the printer at least 6 meters away from other appliances. Does the electrical noise error still occur?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the AC ground Is AC power supply outlet wired and grounded appropriately?

Go to step 3.

Request the client to fix AC power supply outlet.

3

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 4.

4

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 5.

5

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the electrical noise error still occur?

Reseat the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3)

End of work

2-111

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.5 Other FIP

FIP-AC Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printer Does the motor noise arise when turning on the power? During this test, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Go to FIP-DC.

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the power supply on wall outlet Connect the power cord with other wall outlet. Does the printer operate normally?

End of work

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the power code for connection Reconnect the power cord. Does the printer operate normally?

End of work

Go to step 4.

4

Checking the BREAKER GFI for operation Does the BREAKER GFI operate normally?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the connector of PWBA LVPS for connection Disconnect the power cord and wait for one minute. Reconnect the all connectors of PWBA LVPS. Does the printer operate normally?

End of work

Go to step 6.

6

Checking the connector of MAIN SWITCH for connection Disconnect the power cord and wait for one minute. Reconnect the connector of MAIN SWITCH. Does the printer operate normally?

End of work

Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6)

2-112

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.5 Other FIP

FIP-DC Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the connector of the PWBA LVPS for connection Disconnect the power cord and wait for one minute. Reconnect the all connectors of the PWBA LVPS. Does the printer operate normally?

End of work

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the connector of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL for connection Reconnect the connector (P/J220) of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL. Does the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL operate normally?

End of work

Go to step 3.

3

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Does the printer operate normally?

End of work

Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6)

2-113

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.5 Other FIP

FIP-Multiple Feed Note This multiple feed trouble occurs only when the paper is fed from the Paper Cassette.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Possible causative parts HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)

1

Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Does the multi feed still occur when printing?

Go to step 3.

End of work

3

Checking paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4.

4

Does the multi feed still occur when printing?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED and HOLDER ASSY RETARD for rotation Does the ROLL ASSY FEED and HOLDER ASSY RETARD rotate smoothly and operate correctly?

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED (Refer to REP3.8) and/or HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3)

2-114

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.1 Roles of the control panel in Diag.

No.

Name

Description

1

LCD display

Displays the status of the printer, menu options, and messages.

2

button

Pressed to display the menu screen.

3

button

Pressed to confirm the menu option selected on the menu screen. This button is used also when printing reports/lists.

4

button/lamp

Pressed to exit the Power Saver mode (Sleep mode). This button/lamp lights when the printer is the Power Saver mode (Sleep mode).

5

button

Pressed to stop printing. Pressed to advance to the next menu, item, or option. The < > button is used also when using the Secure/Sample Print feature.

6

< >, < >, < >, < > button

Holding down the < > or < > button scrolls through menus, items, and options in a circular fashion. Pressing the < > and < > buttons simultaneously displays the default values. To use the Secure/Sample Print feature, additional memory of 256 MB or above (optional) must be installed.

7

lamp

Blinks or lights when an error occurs.

8

lamp

Lights when the printer is ready to print.

2.6.2 Entering diag. CE mode 1

Turn off the power.

2

Turn on the power while holding down and keys.

3

Input a password. ( )

4

The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.)

2-115

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6.3 Selecting Diag. item The diagnosis setting items are configured as menus, which can be operated with the control panel keys. Arrow keys select menu items and key activates functions.

2.6.4 Change method parameters value For parameter setting, pressing key after selecting an item from the menu displays the current setting value of the item. Then a numeric value selected by and keys are written into the NVM by key.

2.6.5 Executing/Exiting Diag. mode The diagnosis can be executed by as follows. 1

A test item is displayed. key fixed the test item.

2

The display prompts the user to start the test. Press key and start the test.

The diagnosis can be stopped by as follows. 1

During the diagnosis test, press key.

2

The diagnosis is stopped, and the display indicates the one step higher menu.

Note If an error occurs during the diag. sequence, the diagnosis displays the error and stops, leaving the remaining items unperformed. Pressing or key releases the error display, and then the menu items are displayed.

2-116

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6.6 Diag. mode menu tree Menu Tree of the CE Mode is as follows. CE Mode

ESS Diag

All Test CodeROM Test FrontROM Test EEPROM Test DRAM Test MAC+PHY Test ASIC Test Panel Test IOT Test

IOT Diag

Digital Input Digital Output NVM Settings

Edit NVM Save NVM to ESS

Load NVM from ESS

Initialize Slave

Print NVM Info

Print Info

Config Page Print Settings

2-117

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Installation

Serial No. Tone Correction

Display Counter

HexDump

Pixel Counter

Dip Switch 0

Configuration

Dip Switch 1

Dip Switch 2

Dip Switch 3

Type 1

Counter Type

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

Print Counter

Dip Color Switch Print0 Dip Switch B/W Print 1

Dip Total Switch Print2

Color Dip Switch Backup 3

Dip B/WSwitch Backup 3

Total Dip Switch Backup 3

Dip Color Switch Error3

Dip B/W Switch Error3

CopyCounter MtoB

CopyCounter BtoM

Clear All NVM

Clear JobHistory

Clear AuditronPV

2-118

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Test Print

No Image IOT Pattern IOT Grid 2 Cyan20% Magenta20% Yellow20% Black20% CMY20% Gradation Toner Palette Stain Check

Parameter

Slow Scan KtoPaper Slow Scan 600M Slow Scan 600Y Slow Scan 600C Fast Scan KtoM Fast Scan KtoY Fast Scan KtoC Fast Scan M-Feed Fast Scan Tray 1 Fast Scan 2 KtoM Fast Scan 2 KtoY Fast Scan 2 KtoC

2-119

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Life Y Toner Life M Toner Life C Toner Life K Toner Life Fuser Sheet Life Print Sheet Life DTB Waste

Read Initialize

Life YwasteToner Life MwasteToner Life CwasteToner Life KwasteToner Life Drum Y Time Life Drum M Time Life Drum C Time Life Drum K Time Life Drum Xero Life Drum Deve K Life Manual Feed Life Tray1 Sheet Print

Exit Mode

Complete Exit

2-120

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6.7 Contents of a Test 2.6.7.1 CE Mode Diag. This section describes how to perform each test of the CE Mode Diag. in detail.

2.6.7.2 Executing CE Mode diagnosis 1

Turn off the power.

2

Turn on the power while holding down and keys.

3

Input a password. ( )

4

The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.)

5

Press or key to select the test item.

6

Press key twice to execute the test.

Note To exit the test or to returning to one step higher menu, press key.

2.6.7.3 ESS Diag Executes the ESS Diag except the following.

Note Do not turn off the Main Switch when the ESS Diag Test is executing.

All Test This test executes the all tests of the ESS diagnostic except the MAC+PHY test and Panel Test.

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

*** ERROR

***: Displays the test name that became error. (CodeROM/FontROM/EEPROM/DRAM/ASIC/IOT)

2-121

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode CodeROM Test Calculates the ROM checksum and compares it with the value stored in the ROM. Executes this test when the 116-317 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) This test calculates the checksum of the each ROM, and compares it with the valid checksum value stored in the corresponding chip beforehand. When the checksum is identical to the stored value, this test judges the chip is normal.

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

CodeROM #* ERROR S=xxxx V=yyyy (xxxx:calculated value yyyy:ROM stored value *:0,1)

FontROM Test Calculates the Font ROM checksum and compares it with the value stored in the FontROM. Executes this test when the 116-310 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) This test calculates the checksum of the each FontROM, and compares it with the valid checksum value stored in the corresponding chip beforehand. When the checksum is identical to the stored value, this test judges the chip is normal.

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

FontROM ERROR S=xxxx V=yyyy (xxxx:calculated value yyyy:ROM stored value)

EEPROM Test Performs write/read/verify on the diag. area of the EEPROM. Executes this test when the 116-323, 116-326 and 116-390 errors occurred. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) The test performs read/write/verify of the test patterns (0xff,0xaa, 0x55 and 0x00) on one byte at every 0x400 from the first address of EEPROM.

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

EEPROM ID* ERROR (*:1,2)

2-122

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode DRAM Test Tests OPEN/SHORT with the address line of the DRAM. Performs write/read/verify on the entire DRAM. Executes this test when the 016-718, 116-315, 116-316 and 116-320 errors occurred. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) When the optional DRAM SIMM is checked and found, it checks the optional memory area. First, the test performs read/write/verify of the increment data for the whole tested area by the word. Then, it performs read/write/verify of the test patterns (0xffffffff, 0xaaaaaaaa, 0x55555555, 0x00000000) for the whole tested area by the word.

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

DRAM slot* ERROR (*：0,1)

MAC+PHY Test MAC: Media Access Control PHY: Physical Layer MAC+PHY Test 1 PHY Internal loopback test MAC+PHY Test 1 External PHY external loopback test Executes this test when the 018-319, 018-320, 116-314, 116-351,116-352 and 116-355 errors occurred. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

MAC+PHY ERROR

ASIC Test ASIC register check. Executes this test when the 116-343 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

ASIC ERROR

2-123

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Panel Test Tests the LED, LCD and buttons of the control panel. This test checks input and output of the control panel. When buttons are pressed in the manner shown in the following table, the test displays the corresponding contents of the LED and LCD.

Button

LED

LCD

S

„„†

Displays "UP" on the LCD.

T

„„†

Displays "DOWN" on the LCD.

W

㠠

Displays "LEFT" on the LCD.

X

㠠

Displays "RIGHT" on the LCD.

Eject/Set

†„†

Displays "SET" on the LCD.

Menu

†„†

Displays "MENU" on the LCD.

Cancel Job

†††

Displays "CANCEL JOB" on the LCD.

Power Saver

††„

Displays "POWER SAVER" on the LCD

S T pressed at the same time

- (The test is completed)

- (The test is completed)

††† : Indicate the left square is Ready LED, the center square is Alarm LED and the right square is Power Saver LED. †Not lighting „Lighting IOT Test Communication test with the IOT Executes this test when the 024-371 error occurred. Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) This test checks communication with the IOT. Then it reads the status register of the IOT to check whether commands can be exchanged with the IOT. It sends the following command to read the status register, and checks whther the appropriate response returns. Read ROM Revision No

Normal

Error

CHECK OK

IOT ERROR

2-124

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.4 IOT Diag Digital Input This function checks whether the sensors and the switches operate normally or not. The Digital Input is performed for all the sensors and the switches. Exit operation of the Digital Input makes the control panel display the IOT diag. function menu. At the start of the Digital Input, number " 0 " is displayed on the control panel. This number is counted up when a sensor or switch is turned on from off, therefore it allows the user to know the component is active. When a paper jam is occurred, or an error message or code is displayed, execute this test to locate the damaged parts. The test will execute the Digital Input codes of the components that are supposed to be faulty from the error details. (Refer to each FIP on Chapter 2.) Test result: NG (Go to each FIP or replace the parts.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.) z Executing Digital Input 1

Turn off the power.

2

Turn on the power while holding down and keys.

3

Input a password. ( )

4

The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.)

5

Press the key to select the "IOT Diag", and then press key.

6

Select "Digital Input", and then press key.

7

Press or key to select the test item.

8

Press key twice to execute the test.

9

Press the key and then key to exit your selecting test.

Parameters for the Digital Input are as follows. Diag. Code

Components

DI-00

Manual Feeder Sensor

DI-01

CST NO PAPER

DI-02

Regi Sensor

DI-03

Exit Sensor

DI-04

K Mode Sensor

DI-06

Side Switch (SIDE SW)

DI-07

Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN)

2-125

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN)

Exit Sensor

Side Switch (SIDE SW)

K Mode Sensor

CST NO PAPER Regi Sensor Manual Fedder Sensor Wsb02605AA

2-126

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode z Checking the Sensor and Switch Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedures 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Manual Feeder Sensor.

3

Check the sensor.

Console Panel

Manual Feeder Sensor (DI-00)

Digital Input DI-00 OFF ON

Digital Input DI-00 L - 00

Wsb02606AA

4

Press the key to stop the test.

1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the CST NO PAPER.

3

Check the sensor.

Console Panel Digital Input DI-01 OFF ON

CST NO PAPER (DI-01)

Digital Input DI-01 L - 00

Wsb02607AA

4

Press the key to stop the test.

NOTE: At this test, check to be sure that the paper tray is loaded with paper.

2-127

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedures 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Regi Sensor.

3

Check the sensor.

Actuator

Console Panel Digital Input DI-02 OFF

Regi Sensor (DI-02)

ON

Digital Input DI-02 L - 00

Wsb02608AA

4

Press the key to stop the test.

1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Exit Sensor.

3

Check the sensor.

Console Panel ON Digital Input DI-03 OFF

Digital Input DI-03 L - 00

Exit Sensor (DI-03)

Wsb02609AA

4

Press the key to stop the test.

Caution: Take care not to be burn yourself from the heat of the heater placed inside the FUSER.

2-128

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedures NOTE: Remove the PH Drive. Press the lever mounted on the Solenoid to retract the actuator from the sensor. 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the K Mode Sensor.

3

Check the Sensor.

Actuator

K Mode Sensor (Color Mode Switching Sensor) (DI-04)

K Mode Solenoid

Console Panel Digital Input DI-04 OFF ON Paper Digital Input DI-04 L - 00 K Mode Sensor Wsb02610AA

4

Press the key to stop the test.

1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Side Switch.

3

Check the switch.

Console Panel Digital Input DI-06 OFF

Side Switch (SIDE SW) (DI-06)

ON

Digital Input DI-06 L - 00

Wsb02611AA

4

Press the key to stop the test.

2-129

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Sensor and Switch name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedures 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Cover Open Sensor.

3

Check the switch.

Console Panel Digital Input DI-07 OFF

Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN) (DI-07)

ON

Digital Input DI-07 L - 00

Wsb02612AA

4

Press the key to stop the test.

2-130

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Digital Output This function checks whether the motors, clutches and solenoids operate. When the interlock is opened while the Digital Output is performed, each component ends to operate.

Note In this Test Mode, each motor, clutch or solenoid can be turned individually. Therefore it allows the CE to check a component' s operation from outside, and judge whether the component is normal or not. When all the diag. functions are stopped, all the motors, clutches or solenoids can be turned off. Monitor test can make each of the motors, clutches or solenoids operate simultaneously.

When a paper jam or PQ problem is occurred, or an error message or code is displayed, this test enables to look for the broken or damaged parts. Test result: NG (Go to each FIP or replace the parts.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)

2-131

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode z Executing Digital Output 1

Turn off the power.

2

Turn on the power while holding down and keys.

3

Input a password. ( )

4

The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.)

5

Press the key to select the "IOT Diag", and then press key.

6

Select "Digital Output", and then press key.

7

Press or key to select test item.

8

Press key to execute the test.

9

Press the key and then key to exit your selecting test.

Parameters for the Digital Output are as follows.

Diag. Code

Components

DO-00

Main Motor FULL2 (COLOR)

DO-01

Main Motor FULL1 (BW)

DO-02

Main Motor HALF

DO-05

Sub Motor FULL2 (COLOR)

DO-06

Sub Motor FULL1 (BW)

DO-07

Sub Motor HALF

DO-0A

K Mode SOLENOID (Auto OFF)

DO-0B

CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID (Half Rotation)

DO-0C

CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID (To Initial Position)

DO-1E

Fan (HIGH)

DO-1F

Fan (LOW)

DO-21

Yellow Toner Motor

DO-23

Magenta Toner Motor

DO-25

Cyan Toner Motor

DO-27

Black Toner Motor

DO-29

Regi Clutch

DO-2F

CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)

DO-3D

Black Drum Erase Lamp

DO-3F

Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp

2-132

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

"Black Toner Motor"

"Cyan Toner Motor" Fan "Fan(HIGH)" "Fan(LOW)"

"Magenta Toner Motor"

"Yellow Toner Motor"

"Black Drum Erase Lamp" Sub Motor "Sub Motor(FULL2)" "Sub Motor(FULL1)" "Sub Motor(HALF)"

"Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp"

Main Motor "Main Motor(FULL2)" "Main Motor(FULL1)" "Main Motor(HALF)" K Mode SOLENOID "K Mode SOLENOID(Auto OFF)" Regi Clutch "Regi Clutch"

CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID "CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Half)" "CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Init)" "CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Auto)"

Wsb02613AA

2-133

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode z Checking Motor, Clutch and Solenoid

Note Before executing the Digital Output, close cover and door.

Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: When performing operation for five minuets or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Open the front cover and cheat the Interlock system.

3

Execute the Main Motor FULL 2.

Main Motor (FULL 2)/Main Motor (FULL 1)/Main Motor (HALF) (DO-00, 01, 02)

Drum Belt

Wsb02010GA

4

Check the drum and belt rotation.

5

Press the key to stop the test.

6

Remove the cheater and close the front cover.

1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Sub Motor FULL 2. Exit Roll

Sub Motor (FULL 2)/Sub Motor (FULL 1)/Sub Motor (HALF)/ Motor HALF (DO-05, 06, 07)

Wsb02011GA

3

Check the exit roll rotation.

4

Press the key to stop the test.

2-134

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for technical staff. When performing operation for five minuets or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

2

Cheat the interlock system.

3

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

4

Execute the K Mode Solenoid.

K Mode Solenoid (Auto OFF) (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) (DO-0A) K Mode Solenoid

Wsb02012KA

5

Check the K Mode Solenoid movement.

6

Press the key to stop the test.

7

Turn of the printer power.

8

Attach the DRIVE ASSY PH.

9

Remove the cheater and turn on the power.

2-135

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: The Main Motor and the Feed Solenoid operate simultaneously. 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Remove the paper tray.

3

Execute the CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Half).

Feed Roll

CASSETTE1 Solenoid (Half)/ CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Init) (DO-0B,0C)

Wsb02013GA

4

Check the Feed Roll rotation.

5

Press the key to stop the test.

6

Replace the paper tray.

1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Fan (HIGH).

Fan (HIGH)/Fan (LOW) (DO-1E, 1F)

Wsb02014GA

3

Check the Fan rotation.

4

Press the key to stop the test.

2-136

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for technical staff. Described below is the check procedure common among the four toner motor. Note the operation for the toner in the PHD ASSY spills if the motor is rotated for a long time. 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Open the Side Cover and remove the toner cartridge.

3

Open the toner cartridge holder.

4

Execute the Toner Motor.

Yellow Toner Motor/Magenta Toner Motor/Cyan Toner Motor/ Black Toner Motor (DO-21, 23, 25, 27)

Gear Wsb02015GA

5

Check the Toner Motor rotation.

6

Press the key to stop the test.

7

Replace the toner cartridge and close the toner cartridge holder.

8

Close the Side Cover.

2-137

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Execute the Regi Clutch.

3

Check the clutch noise.

4

Press the key to stop the test.

Combination test is as follows. NOTE: The Regi Roll rotates when the MAIN MOTOR ON and the REGI CLUTCH ON are executed. These procedures are for the technical staff. When performing operation for five minutes or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Open the front cover and cheat the Interlock System.

3

Execute the Main Motor FULL 2 and the Regi Clutch.

Regi Clutch (DO-29)

Regi Roll

Wsb02016GA

4

Check the Regi Roll rotation.

5

Press the key to stop the clutch.

6

Press the key to display the Main Motor FULL 2.

7

Press the key to stop the motor.

8

Remove the cheater and close the front cover.

2-138

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: This test should be carried out in the case where the Feed Roll fails to rotate under the CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID ON (Half Rotation/To Initial Position) status. These procedures are for the technical staff. When performing operation for five minutes or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light. 1

Remove the Left Cover. (REP1.12)

2

Cheat the Interlock System.

3

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

4

Execute the CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Auto).

CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Auto) (DO-2F)

CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid

Wsb02614AA

5

Check the Feed Solenoid movement.

6

Press the key to stop the test.

7

Turn off the printer power.

8

Attach the Left Cover.

9

Remove the cheater and close the front cover.

10

Turn on the printer power.

2-139

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for the technical staff. 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Open the front cover.

3

Remove the PHD ASSY and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light.

4

Cheat the Interlock Syastem.

5

Execute the Black Drum Erase Lamp.

Black Drum Erase Lamp (DO-3D)

Black Drum Erase Lamp

Wsb02018GA

6

Check the lamp lighting.

7

Press the key to stop the test.

8

Remove the cheater and replace the PHD ASSY.

9

Close the front cover.

2-140

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Motor,Clutch and Solenoid name (Diag. Code)

Confirmation procedure NOTE: These procedures are for the technical staff. 1

Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.

2

Open the front cover.

3

Remove the PHD ASSY and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light.

4

Cheat the Interlock Syastem.

5

Execute the Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp.

Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp (DO-3F)

Cyan Drum Erase Lamp

Magenta Drum Erase Lamp

Yellow Drum Erase Lamp

Wsb02019GA

6

Check the lamp lighting.

7

Press the key to stop the test.

8

Remove the cheater and replace the PHD ASSY.

9

Close the front cover.

2-141

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode NVM Settings Under the [NVM Setting] menu, do not use [Edit NVM] and [Initialize Slave], because these operations handle internal data. Perform only the following menu operations. [Save NVM to ESS] Saves the internal data of PWBA MCU to PWBA ESS temporarily when PWBA MCU needs to be replaced due to a trouble, etc. [Load MVN from ESS] Loads the internal data saved via [Save NVM to ESS] to the new PWBA MCU. [Print NVM Info] Displays the current setting values of NVM.

2.6.7.5 Print Info Config Page The version of software of the printer and the printer configuration can be confirmed by executing this test. Print Settings The service tag, printing count value and error count value can be confirmed by executing this test.

2-142

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.6 Installation

Menu

Contents

Setting value

Serial No.

Serial number of the printer.

Read only

Tone Correction

Specifies whether or not tone correction is performed.

On: Enable Off: Disable

Display Counter

Specifies whether or not life counters are showed to the reports or the display. (Not used)

-

HexDup

Allows you to print the received print data in hexadecimal notation. Used to analyze the received data in case of a printing error. Setting Hex Dump to ON allows you to print the received data via [Info Page] under [Print info].

On: Enable Off: Disable

Pixel Counter

Pixel count values of colors Y/M/C/K.

Read only

Configuration

The use of "Configuration" is prohibited since it is a tool for design development.

-

Counter Type

Allows you to configure the counter for a specific OEM destination. Do not use this menu.

-

Print Counter

Color Print/Color Backup

Number of color print.

B/W Print/B/W Backup

Number of black and white print.

Total Print/Total Backup

Total of Color and B/W print.

Color Error

Number of error in color print.

B/W Error

Number of error in black and white print.

Read only

CopyCounter M to B

Copies the counter value in the master NVM of the PWBA ESS to the backup NVM of the PWBA ESS.

-

CopyCounter B to M

Copies the counter value in the backup NVM of the PWBA ESS to the master NVM of the PWBA ESS.

-

Clear All NVM

Initializes all value of NVM.

-

Clear JobHistory

Initializes Job History.

-

Clear AuditronPV

Initializes print volume (PV) or information of Print Auditron. When Print Auditron is enabled, initializes information of Print Auditron.

-

2.6.7.7 Exit Mode Completes the diagnosis operation and reboot the data.

2-143

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.8 Test Print Print an internal test pattern of the printer. If paper jam or paper empty occurs during the print, the test waits until they are resolved. z Executing test print 1

Turn off the power.

2

Turn on the power while holding down and keys.

3

Input a password. ( )

4

The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.)

5

Press key to select "Test Print", and then press key.

6

Press or key to select the test item.

7

Press key twice to execute the test.

Note To exit the test or to returning to one step higher menu, press key.

No Image IOT Prints the blanked paper.

2-144

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Pattern IOT Prints the IOT built-in 600dpi pattern. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the printing process or the PWBA ESS related. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the printing process.) OK (Check the PWBA ESS related.)

Wsb02023KA

2-145

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Grid 2 Prints the ESS built-in grid pattern. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as printer-related or otherwise. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the printing process and PWBA ESS-related.) OK (Check the network, cable, PC and so on.)

Leg_Sec02_004FA

2-146

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Cyan 20% Outputs cyan 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the cyan toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the cyan toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_005FA

Magenta 20% Outputs magenta 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the magenta toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the magenta toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_006FA

2-147

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Yellow 20% Outputs yellow 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the yellow toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the yellow toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_007FA

Black 20% Outputs black 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the black toner or another color. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the black toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)

Leg_Sec02_008FA

2-148

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode CMY 20% Outputs C/M/Y 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the balance of three color toners or otherwise. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the yellow, magenta or cyan toner-related.) OK (Check black toner.)

Leg_Sec02_009FA

Gradation Outputs the tone pattern from 2% to 100% on a A4 paper for each of 4 colors. When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the printing process or PWBA ESS-related. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the printing process.) OK (Check the PWBA ESS-related.)

Leg_Sec02_010FA

2-149

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Toner Palette Outputs each 100% density color pattern of Y/M/C/K. When the PQ problem occurred in the picture or photo printing, this test enables to identify the problem as the toner or another. Compare the sample chart with the print. Check result: NG (Check the problem toner-related.) OK (Check the print job or print data.)

Leg_Sec02_011FA

2-150

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Stain Check Allows you to check the print for any regular lines or toner spots when encountering PQ problems. From the difference in the interval of regular lines or spots, you can determine the parts that have caused the trouble. Page 1 to 4: Prints the scale patterns in vertical and horizontal directions for evaluating regularity and intervals. Page 5: Prints the list of intervals by component fault. Page 2

Page 1

13

13

Wsb02028KA

Wsb02027KA

Page 4

Page 3

13 13

Wsb02030KA

Wsb02029KA

Page 5

Wsb02025GA

2-151

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode 2.6.7.9 Parameter Registration adjustment

Item

Renge

Slow Scan K to Paper

-128 to 127

Slow Scan 600 Y/M/C

-30 to 30

First Scan K to M, Y, C

-128 to 127

Fast Scan 2 K to M, Y, C

-1 to 2

Fast Scan M-Feed, Tray

-30 to 30

Description Sets the registration in the paper feeding direction.

Life Counter

-

Sets the registration in the scanning direction.

Reads the life counter and the printer.

Note Print the parameter list using the Print function of Parameter Menu in diagnosis before changing the value of the registration.

Parameter

Function

Default

Adjustable range

Slow Scan K to Paper (Shifts 0.17mm/1count)

Black registration adjustment

--

-128 to 127

Slow Scan 600 M,Y,C (Shifts 0.042mm/1count)

Color registration adjustment (600 dpi)

--

-30 to 30

--

-128 to 127

--

-1 to 2

--

-30 to 30

Fast Scan K to M, Y or C (Shifts 0.042mm/1count) Fast Scan 2 K to M, C or Y (Shifts 0.01mm/1count) Fast Scan M-Feed or Tray (Shifts 0.17mm/1count)

Color registration adjustment Calculation of adjustment is shown below. (exp. Yellow) (Value of Fast Scan Reg K to Y + Value of Fast Scan Reg2 K to Y )/4 Black registration adjustment at side 1 print

2-152

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Note The default values are different in each printer.

Shifts the print area in this direction by reducing the value.

Shifts the print area in this direction by increasing the value.

Fast Scan K to M, Y, C Fast Scan 2 K to M, Y, C Fast Scan M-Feed, Tray

Default Value

Slow Scan K to Paper Slow Scan 600 M, Y, C

Shifts the print area in this direction by reducing the value.

Image Side

Shifts the print area in this direction by increasing the value.

Default Value

Wsb02615AA

2-153

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode Life

Note These counter values are reference only. Do not use as the official value.

Counter Name

Value of life warning

Life Y Toner (Dispense time)

-

Life M Toner (Dispense time)

-

Life C Toner (Dispense time)

-

Life K Toner (Dispense time)

-

Life Fuser Sheet

1677215

Life Print Sheet

Read: Reads the counter value.

Life DTB (Transfer Belt) Waste (Toner cleaning count)

Initialize: Initializes values of the Life DTB Sheet, Life DTB Time and Life DTB Waste.

320000

Life Y waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count)

19000

Life M waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count)

19000

Life C waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count)

19000

Life K waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count)

19000

Life IU Y Time (Dispense Time)

6792000

Life IU M Time (Dispense Time)

6792000

Life IU C Time (Dispense Time)

6792000

Life IU K Time (Dispense Time)

6792000

Life IU Xero (Round Time)

300000

Life IU Deve K (Sheet)

300000

Life Manual Feed

-

Life Tray Sheet

-

Print This function prints the parameter values and life counter values stored in the engine.

2-154

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access

2.7 NVM Access By operating the Control Panel, you can access the NVM (EEPROM in the IOT) to read/write data there. The following functions are available. z Editing NVM data. Data at the addresses below can be edited. z Saving NVM data into the Controller. z Loading data saved in the Controller back into the NVM z Printing out data saved in the Controller Editing NVM The following shows how the UI guides you to edit data. 1

Select the menu shown at left and press the Set key.

NVM Settings   Edit NVM

2

The LCD displays what is shown at left. Pressing the left/right arrow allows moving the cursor to the left/right. Pressing the up/down arrow allows changing the value the cursor points to. Changing the value at Address Area (Ad) allows reading and displaying data on the right side of the equal sign (=).

Edit NVM Ad0100=00000000* cursor

3

Changing the data leads to deletion of the * mark, which shows the current NVM value is changed. Set data at a specific address is represented by leftmost 2 digits displayed on the right side of the equal sign "=".

Edit NVM Ad0100=00000001

4

Pressing the Set key allows writing a new value in the NVM.

Edit NVM Ad0100=00000001*

5

Pressing the Cancel key allows returning to the previous screen.

NVM Settings   Edit NVM

2-155

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Saving NVM data To save NVM data into the Controller. Data at the NVM addresses below can be saved. 1000-17FF in total

Loading NVM data To load data saved in the Controller into the management areas below. 1000-17FF

Printing NVM data To print data saved in the Controller.

2-156

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access

2.7.1 NVM List

Never try to write data in the NVM that is not described below since it is used as a system area for the machine.

The setting values are only for reference as they vary according to the specifications.

Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1000

Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi paper to K

0-255

-

00

0

1001

Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to M (600dpi)

0-255

-

00

0

1002

Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to Y (600dpi)

0-255

-

00

0

1003

Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to C (600dpi)

0-255

-

00

0

1004

Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to M (1200dpi)

0-255

-

00

0

1005

Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to Y (1200dpi)

0-255

-

00

0

1006

Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to C (1200dpi)

0-255

-

00

0

1007

Adjustment value for Side Regi K to M

0-255

-

00

0

1008

Adjustment value for Side Regi K to Y

0-255

-

00

0

1009

Adjustment value for Side Regi K to C

0-255

-

00

0

100A

Side Regi adjustment value at MSI Feed

0-255

-

00

0

100B

Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY1 Feed

0-255

-

00

0

100C

Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY2 Feed

0-255

-

00

0

100D

Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY3 Feed

0-255

-

00

0

100E

Side Regi adjustment value at Duplex

0-255

-

00

0

1010

Adjustment value for Side Regi K to M (1/4dot)

0-255

-

00

0

1011

Adjustment value for Side Regi K to Y (1/4dot)

0-255

-

00

0

1012

Adjustment value for Side Regi K to C (1/4dot)

0-255

-

00

0

10141021

NVM User Data area (OEM FREE AREA)

0-255

-

00

0

1022

Standard Size Setting MSI

0-255

-

04

4

1023

Standard Size Setting TRAY1

0-255

-

07

7

2-157

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1024

Standard Size Setting TRAY2

0-255

-

07

7

1025

Standard Size Setting dummy

0-255

-

07

7

2100-2970

0.1mm

08

8

-

-

6F

111

1480-4318

0.1mm

0D

13

-

-

E4

228

2100-2970

0.1mm

08

8

-

-

6F

111

1480-4318

0.1mm

0D

13

-

-

E4

228

2100-2970

0.1mm

08

8

-

-

6F

111

1480-4318

0.1mm

0D

13

-

-

E4

228

1026 Universal Size Setting MSI width 1027 1028 Universal Size Setting MSI length 1029 102A Universal Size Setting TRAY1 width 102B 102C Universal Size Setting TRAY1 length 102D 102E Universal Size Setting TRAY2 width 102F 1030 Universal Size Setting TRAY2 length 1031 1100

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 PlainPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1101

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 PlainPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1102

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 CotedPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1103

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 CotedPaper-M

0-255

℃

00

0

1104

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 CotedPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1105

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 HeavierPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1106

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 HeavierPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1107

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Envelope

0-255

℃

00

0

1108

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Postcard

0-255

℃

00

0

1109

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Transparency

0-255

℃

00

0

110A

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Label-L

0-255

℃

00

0

110B

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Label-H

0-255

℃

00

0

110C

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Thicker

0-255

℃

00

0

110D

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Recycled

0-255

℃

00

0

110E

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Custom1

0-255

℃

00

0

110F

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Custom2

0-255

℃

00

0

1110

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 PlainPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

2-158

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1111

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 PlainPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1112

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 CotedPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1113

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 CotedPaper-M

0-255

℃

00

0

1114

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 CotedPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1115

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 HeavierPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1116

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 HeavierPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1117

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Envelope

0-255

℃

00

0

1118

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Postcard

0-255

℃

00

0

1119

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Transparency

0-255

℃

00

0

111A

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Label-L

0-255

℃

00

0

111B

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Label-H

0-255

℃

00

0

111C

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Thicker

0-255

℃

00

0

111D

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Recycled

0-255

℃

00

0

111E

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Custom1

0-255

℃

00

0

111F

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed2 Custom2

0-255

℃

00

0

1120

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 PlainPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1121

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 PlainPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1122

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 CotedPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1123

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 CotedPaper-M

0-255

℃

00

0

1124

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 CotedPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1125

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 HeavierPaper-L

0-255

℃

00

0

1126

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 HeavierPaper-H

0-255

℃

00

0

1127

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Envelope

0-255

℃

00

0

1128

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Postcard

0-255

℃

00

0

1129

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Transparency

0-255

℃

00

0

112A

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Label-L

0-255

℃

00

0

112B

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Label-H

0-255

℃

00

0

2-159

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

112C

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Thicker

0-255

℃

00

0

112D

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Recycled

0-255

℃

00

0

112E

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Custom1

0-255

℃

00

0

112F

FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed3 Custom2

0-255

℃

00

0

1132

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1133

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1134

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1135

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M

0-255

-

00

0

1136

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1137

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1138

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1139

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope

0-255

-

00

0

113A

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard

0-255

-

00

0

113B

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency

0-255

-

00

0

113C

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L

0-255

-

00

0

113D

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H

0-255

-

00

0

113E

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker

0-255

-

00

0

113F

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled

0-255

-

00

0

1140

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1

0-255

-

00

0

1141

Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2

0-255

-

00

0

1142

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1143

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1144

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1145

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M

0-255

-

00

0

1146

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

2-160

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1147

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1148

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1149

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope

0-255

-

00

0

114A

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard

0-255

-

00

0

114B

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency

0-255

-

00

0

114C

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L

0-255

-

00

0

114D

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H

0-255

-

00

0

114E

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker

0-255

-

00

0

114F

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled

0-255

-

00

0

1150

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1

0-255

-

00

0

1151

Simp Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2

0-255

-

00

0

1152

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1153

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1154

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1155

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M

0-255

-

00

0

1156

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1157

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1158

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1159

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope

0-255

-

00

0

115A

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard

0-255

-

00

0

115B

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency

0-255

-

00

0

115C

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L

0-255

-

00

0

115D

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H

0-255

-

00

0

115E

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker

0-255

-

00

0

115F

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled

0-255

-

00

0

2-161

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1160

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1

0-255

-

00

0

1161

Simp Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2

0-255

-

00

0

1162

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1163

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1164

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1165

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M

0-255

-

00

0

1166

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1167

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1168

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1169

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope

0-255

-

00

0

116A

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard

0-255

-

00

0

116B

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency

0-255

-

00

0

116C

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L

0-255

-

00

0

116D

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H

0-255

-

00

0

116E

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker

0-255

-

00

0

116F

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled

0-255

-

00

0

1170

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1

0-255

-

00

0

1171

Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2

0-255

-

00

0

1172

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1173

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1174

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1175

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M

0-255

-

00

0

1176

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1177

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1178

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1179

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope

0-255

-

00

0

2-162

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

117A

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard

0-255

117B

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency

117C

Default Hex

Dec

-

00

0

0-255

-

00

0

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L

0-255

-

00

0

117D

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H

0-255

-

00

0

117E

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker

0-255

-

00

0

117F

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled

0-255

-

00

0

1180

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1

0-255

-

00

0

1181

Dup Speed2 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2

0-255

-

00

0

1182

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1183

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value PlainPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1184

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1185

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-M

0-255

-

00

0

1186

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value CotedPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1187

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-L

0-255

-

00

0

1188

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value HeavierPaper-H

0-255

-

00

0

1189

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope

0-255

-

00

0

118A

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard

0-255

-

00

0

118B

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Transparency

0-255

-

00

0

118C

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L

0-255

-

00

0

118D

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H

0-255

-

00

0

118E

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker

0-255

-

00

0

118F

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled

0-255

-

00

0

1190

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1

0-255

-

00

0

1191

Dup Speed3 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom2

0-255

-

00

0

1192

ROS Time Out (sec)

0-30

sec

05

5

1193

FUSER Time Out (Min)

0-120

min

3C

60

11A6

High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [0]

0-255

-

00

0

11A7

High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [1]

0-255

-

00

0

11A8

High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [2]

0-255

-

00

0

11A9

High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [3]

0-255

-

00

0

11AA

High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [0]

0-255

-

00

0

2-163

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

11AB

High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [1]

0-255

-

04

4

11AC

High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [2]

0-255

-

06

6

11AD

High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [3]

0-255

-

08

8

11AE

High Altitude Offset Mode (common) MODE0(0): altitude of 0[m] default MODE1(1): altitude of 1000[m] below MODE2(2): altitude of 1000[m]-2000[m] MODE3(3): altitude of 2000[m]-3500[m]

0-255

-

00

0

11AF

XERO Idling Sequence Execution Counter (Command 6F)

0-255

-

00

0

11BC

Deve Idling Time Timer Counter[s] (Command 7F) 60 sec

0-255

sec

3C

60

11C0

PV requirement for operating CL1 High

0-255

-

01

500

11C1

PV requirement for operating CL1 Low

0-255

-

F4

-

11C2

Temperature Difference requirement for operating CL1

0-255

-

04

4

1606

Regi Con Sample Block Error details (Process)

0-255

-

00

0

1607

Regi Con Sample Block Error details (Lateral)

0-255

-

00

0

1628

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] PlainPaper-L

0-255

0.2mm

E7

231

1629

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] PlainPaper-H

0-255

0.2mm

E5

229

162A

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-L

0-255

0.2mm

E4

228

162B

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-M

0-255

0.2mm

E3

227

162C

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-H

0-255

0.2mm

E1

225

162D

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] HeavierPaper-L

0-255

0.2mm

E0

224

162E

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] HeavierPaper-H

0-255

0.2mm

E0

224

162F

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Envelope

0-255

0.2mm

E5

229

1630

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Postcard

0-255

0.2mm

E2

226

1631

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Transparency

0-255

0.2mm

EC

236

1632

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Label-L

0-255

0.2mm

E3

227

1633

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Label-H

0-255

0.2mm

E1

225

1634

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Thicker

0-255

0.2mm

E5

229

2-164

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1635

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Recycled

0-255

0.2mm

E6

230

1636

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Custom1

0-255

0.2mm

ED

237

1637

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[SSI] Custom2

0-255

0.2mm

ED

237

1638

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] PlainPaper-L

0-255

0.2mm

01

1

1639

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] PlainPaper-H

0-255

0.2mm

02

2

163A

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-L

0-255

0.2mm

02

2

163B

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-M

0-255

0.2mm

02

2

163C

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-H

0-255

0.2mm

05

5

163D

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] HeavierPaper-L

0-255

0.2mm

03

3

163E

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] HeavierPaper-H

0-255

0.2mm

07

7

163F

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Envelope

0-255

0.2mm

02

2

1640

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Postcard

0-255

0.2mm

01

1

1641

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Transparency

0-255

0.2mm

00

0

1642

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Label-L

0-255

0.2mm

02

2

1643

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Label-H

0-255

0.2mm

01

1

1644

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Thicker

0-255

0.2mm

01

1

1645

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Recycled

0-255

0.2mm

02

2

1646

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Custom1

0-255

0.2mm

00

0

1647

Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of 0.2mm)[Tray1] Custom2

0-255

0.2mm

00

0

168C

Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for FC Normal(New)

0-255

PV

19

25

168D

Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for FC Warning

0-255

PV

19

25

168E

Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for FC Near Empty(Empty)

0-255

PV

19

25

2-165

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

168F

Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for BW Normal(New)

0-255

PV

1E

30

1690

Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for BW Warning

0-255

PV

1E

30

1691

Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for BW Near Empty(Empty)

0-255

PV

1E

30

1692

Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for FC Normal(New)

0-255

PV

32

50

1693

Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for FC Warning

0-255

PV

32

50

1694

Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for FC Near Empty(Empty)

0-255

PV

19

25

1695

Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for BW Normal(New)

0-255

PV

3C

60

1696

Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for BW Warning

0-255

PV

3C

60

1697

Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for BW Near Empty(Empty)

0-255

PV

1E

30

0-65535

-

00

0

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

688

-

-

B0

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-65535

-

02

512

-

-

00

-

0-1023

-

00

164

-

-

A4

-

16A0 Vdark Average 16A0 16A2 Vcln Average 16A3 16AA RADC TC Y 16AB 16AC RADC TC M 16AD 16AE RADC TC C 16AF 16B0 RADC TC K 16B1 16B6 RADC SAD Y 16B7 16B8 RADC SAD M 16B9 16BA RADC SAD C 16BB 16BC RADC SAD K 16BD 16CE TC Setting Control Reference Value Y 16CF

2-166

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

16D0

Range

Unit

0-1023

Default Hex

Dec

-

00

211

--

-

D3

-

0-1023

-

00

215

-

-

D7

-

0-1023

-

00

164

-

-

A4

-

0-1023

-

00

164

-

-

A4

-

0-1023

-

00

211

-

-

D3

-

0-1023

-

00

215

-

-

D7

-

0-1023

-

00

164

-

-

A4

-

0-1023

-

00

185

-

-

B9

-

0-1023

-

00

166

-

-

A6

-

0-1023

-

00

154

-

-

9A

-

0-1023

-

00

227

-

-

E3

-

0-1023

-

00

185

-

-

B9

-

0-1023

-

00

166

-

-

A6

-

0-1023

-

00

154

-

-

9A

-

0-1023

-

00

227

-

-

E3

-

TC Setting Control Reference Value M 16D1 16D2 TC Setting Control Reference Value C 16D3 16D4 TC Setting Control Reference Value K 16D5 16D6 TC Control Target Value Y 16D7 16D8 TC Control Target Value M 16D9 16DA TC Control Target Value C 16DB 16DC TC Control Target Value K 16DD 16DE SAD Setting Control Reference Value Y 16DF 16E0 SAD Setting Control Reference Value M 16E1 16E2 SAD Setting Control Reference Value C 16E3 16E4 SAD Setting Control Reference Value K 16E5 16E6 SAD Control Target Value Y 16E7 16E8 SAD Control Target Value M 16E9 16EA SAD Control Target Value C 16EB 16EC SAD Control Target Value K 16ED 17A2

HW Error History (5 errors back) Error No.

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17A3

HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(High)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17A4

HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(Middle)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17A5

HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(Low)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17A6

HW Error History (4 errors back) Error No.

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17A7

HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(High)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17A8

HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(Middle)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

2-167

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

17A9

HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(Low)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17AA

HW Error History (3 errors back) Error No.

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17AB

HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(High)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17AC

HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(Middle)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17AD

HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(Low)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17AE

HW Error History (2 errors back) Error No.

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17AF

HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(High)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B0

HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(Middle)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B1

HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(Low)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B2

HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Error No.

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B3

HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Counter(High)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B4

HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Counter(Middle)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B5

HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Counter(Low)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B6

HW Error History (the latest) Error No.

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B7

HW Error History (the latest) Counter(High)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B8

HW Error History (the latest) Counter(Middle)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17B9

HW Error History (the latest) Counter(Low)

0-16777215

PV

00

0

17BA

Environment (Temp) Sensor Error details

0-255

-

00

0

17BC

Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Details

0-255

-

00

0

17BD

Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Address H

0-255

-

00

0

17BE

Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Address L

0-255

-

00

0

17BF

Firmware Error details: 2 errors back data

0-255

-

00

0

17C0

Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one Details

0-255

-

00

0

17C1

Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one Address H

0-255

-

00

0

17C2

Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one Address L

0-255

-

00

0

17C3

Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one data

0-255

-

00

0

17C4

Firmware Error details: the latest Details

0-255

-

00

0

17C5

Firmware Error details: the latest Address H

0-255

-

00

0

17C6

Firmware Error details: the latest Address L

0-255

-

00

0

17C7

Firmware Error details: the latest data

0-255

-

00

0

17C8

Motor Fail details

0-255

-

00

0

17C9

FanMotorFailure details

0-255

-

00

0

2-168

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

17CA

CTD SensorError (Pro Con) details 2

0-255

-

00

0

17CB

NV-RAM Error(U6) details Details

0-255

-

00

0

17CC

NV-RAM Error(U6) details Address (H)

0-255

-

00

0

17CD

NV-RAM Error(U6) details Address (L)

0-255

-

00

0

17CE

NV-RAM Error(U6) details data

0-255

-

00

0

17CF

ROS Fail(U2) details

0-255

-

00

0

17D0

Fuser Error(U4) History 1st

0-255

-

00

0

17D1

Fuser Error(U4) History 2nd

0-255

-

00

0

17D2

Fuser Error(U4) History 3rd

0-255

-

00

0

17D3

Fuser Error(U4) History 2 errors back

0-255

-

00

0

17D4

Fuser Error(U4) History the error before

0-255

-

00

0

17D5

Fuser Error(U4) History latest

0-255

-

00

0

17D6

CTD SensorError (Pro Con) details 2

0-255

-

00

0

17D8

Fixed Temp with Environment Sensor disabled

0-255

-

16

22

17D9

Fixed Humidity with Environment Sensor disabled

0-255

-

32

50

17DA

Exit Jam Qty dummy

0-16777215

sheet

00

0

17DB

Exit Jam Qty High

-

sheet

00

0

17DC

Exit Jam Qty Middle

-

sheet

00

0

17DD

Exit Jam Qty Low

-

sheet

00

0

17DE

HW Error2 History (5 errors back) 1st

0-255

-

00

0

17DF

HW Error2 History (4 errors back) 2nd

0-255

-

00

0

17E0

HW Error2 History (3 errors back) 3rd

0-255

-

00

0

17E1

HW Error2 History (2 errors back) 2 errors back

0-255

-

00

0

17E2

HW Error2 History (the error before the latest one) the error before

0-255

-

00

0

17E3

HW Error2 History (the latest) latest

0-255

-

00

0

17FC

To 1 at init.c. To 0 at print start. This makes it known that data is reset during printing.

0-255

-

00

0

17FD

NVM Version Information Test

0-255

-

06

6

17FE

NVM Version Information Minor

0-255

-

00

0

17FF

NVM Version Information Major

0-255

-

02

2

2-169

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Reference Only Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

0-16777215

Default Hex

Dec

PV

00

0

1032

Printer Life Counter dummy

1033

Printer Life Counter High

-

-

00

0

1034

Printer Life Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

1035

Printer Life Counter Low

-

-

00

0

1036

SSI PV Counter dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

0

1037

SSI PV Counter High

-

-

00

0

1038

SSI PV Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

1039

SSI PV Counter Low

-

-

00

0

103A

Tray1 PV Counter dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

0

103B

Tray1 PV Counter High

-

-

00

0

103C

Tray1 PV Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

103D

Tray1 PV Counter Low

-

-

00

0

103E

Tray2 PV Counter dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

0

103F

Tray2 PV Counter High

-

-

00

0

1040

Tray2 PV Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

1041

Tray2 PV Counter Low

-

-

00

0

1042

Duplex PV Counter dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

0

1043

Duplex PV Counter High

-

-

00

0

1044

Duplex PV Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

1045

Duplex PV Counter Low

-

-

00

0

1046

FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

0

1047

FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) High

-

-

00

0

1048

FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) Middle

-

-

00

0

1049

FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) Low

-

-

00

0

104A

FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

45000

104B

FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold High

-

-

00

-

104C

FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

AF

-

104D

FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold Low

-

-

C8

-

104E

FUSER Unit Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

50000

104F

FUSER Unit Warning Threshold High

-

-

00

-

1050

FUSER Unit Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

C3

-

1051

FUSER Unit Warning Threshold Low

-

-

50

-

1052

FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

0

1053

FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold High

-

-

FF

255

1054

FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold Middle

-

-

FF

255

1055

FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold Low

-

-

FF

255

2-170

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

0-16777215

Default Hex

Dec

PV

00

0

1066

DTB Life PV Counter dummy

1067

DTB Life PV Counter High

-

-

00

0

1068

DTB Life PV Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

1069

DTB Life PV Counter Low

-

-

00

0

106A

DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

16777215

106B

DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold High

-

-

FF

-

106C

DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

FF

-

106D

DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold Low

-

-

FF

-

106E

DTB PV Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

16777215

106F

DTB PV Warning Threshold High

-

-

FF

-

1070

DTB PV Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

FF

-

1071

DTB PV Warning Threshold Low

-

-

FF

-

1072

DTB PV Limit Threshold dummy

0-16777215

PV

00

16777215

1073

DTB PV Limit Threshold High

-

-

FF

-

1074

DTB PV Limit Threshold Middle

-

-

FF

-

1075

DTB PV Limit Threshold Low

-

-

FF

-

1076

DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter dummy

0-16777215

cycle

00

0

1077

DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter High

-

-

00

0

1078

DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

1079

DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter Low

-

-

00

0

107A

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

cycle

00

4151636

107B

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold High

-

-

3F

-

107C

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

59

-

107D

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold Low

-

-

54

-

107E

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

cycle

00

5189546

107F

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold High

-

-

4F

-

1080

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

2F

-

1081

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold Low

-

-

AA

-

1082

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold dummy

0-16777215

cycle

00

16777215

1083

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold High

-

-

FF

-

1084

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold Middle

-

-

FF

-

1085

DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold Low

-

-

FF

-

1086

DTB Life Waste Toner Counter dummy

0-16777215

-

00

0

1087

DTB Life Waste Toner Counter High

-

-

00

0

2-171

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1088

DTB Life Waste Toner Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

1089

DTB Life Waste Toner Counter Low

-

-

00

0

108A

DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

-

00

225000

108B

DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold High

-

-

03

-

108C

DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

6E

-

108D

DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold Low

-

-

E8

-

108E

DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold dummy

0-16777215

-

00

300000

108F

DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold High

-

-

04

-

1090

DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold Middle

-

-

93

-

1091

DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold Low

-

-

E0

-

1092

DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold dummy

0-16777215

-

00

320000

1093

DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold High

-

-

04

-

1094

DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold Middle

-

-

E2

-

1095

DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold Low

-

-

00

-

1096

DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) dummy

00

0

1097

DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) High

-

-

00

0

1098

DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) Middle

-

-

00

0

1099

DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to Waste.) Low

-

-

00

0

109A

DTB Life Pixel Count Counter dummy

0-16777215

pixel

00

0

109B

DTB Life Pixel Count Counter High

-

-

00

0

109C

DTB Life Pixel Count Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

109D

DTB Life Pixel Count Counter Low

-

-

00

0

109E

DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) dummy

0-16777215

sheet

00

0

109F

DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) High

-

-

00

0

10A0

DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) Middle

-

-

00

0

10A1

DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) Low

-

-

00

0

10A2

Total Dispense Time Y Counter dummy

00

0

10A3

Total Dispense Time Y Counter High

-

-

00

0

10A4

Total Dispense Time Y Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

10A5

Total Dispense Time Y Counter Low

-

-

00

0

10A6

Total Dispense Time M Counter dummy

00

0

10A7

Total Dispense Time M Counter High

-

-

00

0

10A8

Total Dispense Time M Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

0-16777215 disp time

0-16777215 disp time

0-16777215 disp time

2-172

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

-

-

Default Hex

Dec

00

0

00

0

10A9

Total Dispense Time M Counter Low

10AA

Total Dispense Time C Counter dummy

10AB

Total Dispense Time C Counter High

-

-

00

0

10AC

Total Dispense Time C Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

10AD

Total Dispense Time C Counter Low

-

-

00

0

10AE

Total Dispense Time K Counter dummy

00

0

10AF

Total Dispense Time K Counter High

-

-

00

0

10B0

Total Dispense Time K Counter Middle

-

-

00

0

10B1

Total Dispense Time K Counter Low

-

-

00

0

0-16777215 disp time

0-16777215 disp time

2-173

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access When there were the instructions that were alterableness. Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

1730

User Mode PPM-GROUP[F/C] 0=8.0ppm 1=12.0ppm 2=unused 3=16.0ppm

0-255

1731

User Mode PPM-GROUP[BW] 0=8.0ppm 1=12.0ppm 2=unused 3=16.0ppm

1732

Default Hex

Dec

-

01

1

0-255

-

03

3

User Mode Set Temp (52.5mm/sec) can be set in a range of 140 to 200 (8Ch to C8h)℃ .

0-255

-

B4

180

1733

User Mode Set Temp (78.75mm/sec) can be set in a range of 160 to 200 (A0h to C8h)℃ .

0-255

-

B4

180

1734

User Mode Set Temp (105mm/sec) can be set in a range of 160 to 200 (A0h to C8h)℃ .

0-255

-

B4

180

1735

Difference between Set Temp in User Mode and Upper Limit (52.5mm/sec) can be set in a range of 0 to 130 (00h to 82h).

0-255

-

14

20

1736

Difference between Set Temp in User Mode and Upper Limit (78.75mm/sec) can be set in a range of 0 to 130 (00h to 82h).

0-255

-

14

20

1737

Difference between Set Temp in User Mode and Upper Limit (105mm/sec) can be set in a range of 0 to 130 (00h to 82h).

0-255

-

14

20

1738

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [0] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1739

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [0] α

0-255

-

00

0

173A

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [1] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

173B

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [1] α

0-255

-

00

0

173C

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [2] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

173D

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [2] α

0-255

-

00

0

173E

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [3] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

173F

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [3] α

0-255

-

00

0

1740

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [4] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1741

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [4] α

0-255

-

00

0

1742

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [5] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1743

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [5] α

0-255

-

00

0

1744

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [6] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1745

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [6] α

0-255

-

00

0

1746

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [7] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

2-174

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Add (Hex)

Remarks

Range

Unit

Default Hex

Dec

1747

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [7] α

0-255

-

00

0

1748

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [8] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1749

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [8] α

0-255

-

00

0

174A

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [0] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

174B

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [0] α

0-255

-

00

0

174C

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [1] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

174D

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [1] α

0-255

-

00

0

174E

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [2] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

174F

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [2] α

0-255

-

00

0

1750

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [3] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1751

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [3] α

0-255

-

00

0

1752

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [4] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1753

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [4] α

0-255

-

00

0

1754

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [5] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1755

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [5] α

0-255

-

00

0

1756

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [6] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1757

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [6] α

0-255

-

00

0

1758

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [7] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

1759

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [7] α

0-255

-

00

0

175A

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [8] Vtr1

0-255

-

00

0

175B

Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [8] α

0-255

-

00

0

2-175

Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.7 NVM Access Blank page

2-176

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting

CONTENTS 3.1 Image Quality Trouble ................................................................................................3-1 3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting............................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Items to Be Confirmed Before Image Quality Troubleshooting....................................................... 3-5 3.1.3 Print Image Quality Specifications .................................................................................................. 3-7 3.1.4 Image Quality FIP ......................................................................................................................... 3-11 FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density) ..................................................................................................... 3-11 FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image) ........................................................................................................ 3-15 FIP-1.P3 Solid black .......................................................................................................................... 3-19 FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction) ............................................ 3-21 FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction)........................................ 3-24 FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes .................................................................................................................... 3-27 FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes ................................................................................................................ 3-30 FIP-1.P8 Partial lack .......................................................................................................................... 3-33 FIP-1.P9 Spots................................................................................................................................... 3-36 FIP-1.P10 Afterimage ........................................................................................................................ 3-39 FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog) ............................................................................................................. 3-42 FIP-1.P12 Skew ................................................................................................................................. 3-46 FIP-1.P13 Paper damage .................................................................................................................. 3-48 FIP-1.P14 No fix................................................................................................................................. 3-51 FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color shift)........................................................................................... 3-52

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1 Image Quality Trouble 3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting

Start

Test Printing

Is there a corresponding FIP?

No

Yes Replace TONER CARTRIDGE, PHD ASSY TRANSFER ASSY Y and FUSER ASS ASSY.

Carry out the corresponding troubleshooting.

No

No

The trouble is restored?

The trouble is restored?

Yes

Yes

End

End

9UD##

Note It is stated as the ESS is normal. By operating test print with the Printer Engine only, if the trouble is on ESS side or the Printer Engine side can simply be diagnosed, except those phenomena that are not able to be diagnosed by test print. *Test print result with the Printer Engine only is normal. --- >Malfunction on ESS side *Test print result with the Printer Engine only is also abnormal. ---> Malfunction on the Printer Engine side When it is the case of [Malfunction on ESS side], replace with normal ESS and normal Interface Cable, and check. When the trouble still occurs after replacement, check the host side, and operate Troubleshooting efficiently, using the following image quality FIP according to each phenomenon.

3-1

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Note When the image quality trouble of print occurs, get a print to judge, understand and treat the trouble substance precisely and appropriately, and then troubleshoot efficiently, using the image quality FIP table according to each phenomenon. When trouble restorations with image quality FIP is not possible, check again with the image quality FIP, and then replace [ESS and possible causative parts] in order and check, and operate Troubleshooting, using [Chapter 2 Troubleshooting].

Image quality FIP states regarding the typical image quality trouble, as follows. z FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density) z FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image) z FIP-1.P3 Solid black z FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction) z FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction) z FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes z FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes z FIP-1.P8 Partial lack z FIP-1.P9 Spots z FIP-1.P10 Afterimage z FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog) z FIP-1.P12 Skew z FIP-1.P13 Paper damage z FIP-1.P14 No fix z FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color Shift)

3-2

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Note When horizontal lines and/or spot occur periodically, it is possibly caused by the trouble of a particular roll. In this case, compare the trouble intervals on the test print with the Pitch Chart. The interval does not necessarily match circumference of the roll. The trouble may be solved easily by the check.

Exit Pinch Roll (FUSER) Exit Roll (FUSER) Heat Roll (FUSER) Fuser Belt (FUSER)

PHD

FUSER

BTR (PRINTER)

BTR (PRINTER)

BTR (PRINTER)

BTR (PRINTER)

Drive Roll (PRINTER)

BCR (PHD) BCR Cleaner Roll (PHD)

3-3

Drum (PHD) Magnet Roll (PHD)

Wsb01046GA

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Pitch Chart The chart is printed [Stain Check] in the [Test Print] tab of the diagnosis. Page 2

Page 1

13

13

Wsb02028KA

Wsb02027KA

Page 4

Page 3

13 13

Wsb02030KA

Wsb02029KA

Page 5

Wsb02025KA

3-4

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1.2 Items to Be Confirmed Before Image Quality Troubleshooting Print Quality Problems Customers may need your help determining the cause of print quality issues such as streaking, fading, or dropouts. Here are some questions that may help you determine why your customer's printer is not printing optionally. First, confirm the following items to understand customer's operating condition. 1

Does your customer's print media fall within the Printer Media Guidelines? (Refer to "Printer Media Guidelines").

2

Is there enough toner?

3

Has the printer been cleaned recently?

Checking printer condition z Toner Low toner can cause print quality problems such as fading, streaking, white lines, or dropouts. Have your customer print a small document from a different application to replicate the problem and verify the amount of toner available for printing. When your customers print a document, the Laser Printer Status Monitor should display a dialog box that estimates the amount of toner left in the cartridge. If the toner is low, your customers can sometimes extend the cartridge life by removing the cartridge from the printer, gently shaking it from side-to-side, and replacing it (Rocking the toner cartridge from side-toside loosens toner that may get stuck). z Cleaning Paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and cause print quality problems, such as smearing or toner specks. Clean inside the printer to prevent these problems. Prior checks before troubleshooting Check the following items if any print quality problems occur before going to each troubleshooting. Those actions may solve problems easily and simply. If the any problems below have occurred, check and take actions described in each item. 1

Color is out of alignment: a) Clean inside of the printer. b) If you install a new black cartridge and a PHD Unit cleaning has not been done, this problem will happen. Clean inside of the printer.

2

Print is too light: a) The toner may be low. Confirm the amount of the toner and change the toner cartridges if necessary. b) Set the Draft Mode check box to off in the [Advanced] tab on the printer driver. c) If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings in the Tray Settings menu. d) Verify that the correct print media is being used. e) The PHD Unit needs to be replaced. Change the PHD Unit.

3-5

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble 3

Toner smears or print comes off page: a) If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings in the Tray Settings menu. b) Verify that the print media is within the printer specifications. (Refer to "Printer Media Guidelines").

4

Toner spots appear on the page/printing is blurred: a) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly. b) Change the toner cartridge.

5

Entire page is white: a) Make sure the packaging material is removed from the toner cartridge. b) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly. c) The toner may be low. Change the toner cartridge.

6

Streaks appear on the page: a) The toner may be low. Change the toner cartridge. b) If you are using preprinted forms, make sure the toner can withstand temperatures of 0?C to 35?C.

7

Characters have jagged or uneven edges: a) If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program.

8

Part or all of the page prints in black: a) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly.

9

The job prints, but the top and side margins are incorrect: a) Make sure the Paper Size setting in the Tray Settings is correct. b) Make sure the margins are set correctly in your software program.

3-6

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1.3 Print Image Quality Specifications Image Quality Guarantee Conditions The image quality is specified and guaranteed under the following conditions. 1

Environmental Condition Temperature: 10°C - 32°C Humidity: 15% RH - 85% RH (85% RH at 28°C) Note that defect may occur due to condensation after around 30 minutes if the printer is turned on in a critical environment.

2

Guaranteed Paper The print image quality specified in this chapter should be guaranteed when the standard paper is fed from the cassette tray. The print image quality is evaluated on the maximum size of each standard paper. Color print quality: X-Pression 24 lb paper Black and White quality: 4200 paper

3

Paper condition The paper used is flesh paper immediately after unpacked, which has been left in the operating environment for 12 hours before unpacking.

4

Printer condition The print image quality specified in this chapter is guaranteed with the printer in normal condition.

5

Criterion for judgment The print image quality is guaranteed with Spec. In rate = 90% ( l =90%).

6

For Color chart, Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Skew, Linearity, Magnification Error, Registration and Printed Guaranteed Area, refer to each chart below.

3-7

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Chart

Parallelism

3-8

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Perpendicularity

Skew

Linearity

3-9

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Magnification Error

Registration

Guaranteed Printing Area

4mm

4mm

4mm

355.6mm (14inch) Guaranteed printing area

351.6mm

4mm

210.9mm 215.9mm (8.5inch)

Kmy01001KA

3-10

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1.4 Image Quality FIP FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density) Trouble substance The density of the image is entirely too faint. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)

ABCDEabcde12345

zFRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) zMOTOR ASSY DISP (Y/M/C/K) (PL5.1.3) zTONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) zTONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) zTONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) zTONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Check the printing data.

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 3.

Replace the toner with the Xerox toner.

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4.

4

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the menu settings Check the [Advanced] tab of the Printer Driver. Is the [Draft Mode] selected?

Cancel the [Draft Mode], then go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

6

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking the faint color Is there the faint toner? Checked by [Toner Palette] of [Test Print] in [CE Mode] tab of Diagnosis.

Go to step 8.

Check the original printing data.

3-11

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Remedy

Step

Check

8

Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGEs Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs, and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly?

Yes

No

End of work

Go to step 9.

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s), then go to step 10.

Go to step 10.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s), then go to step 11.

Go to step 11.

End of work

Go to step 12.

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the right side of the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/ or deformed?

9

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

10

11

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

3-12

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the laser beam windows of the ROS ASSY Are the laser beam windows on the ROS ASSY clean?

Go to step 13.

Clean the window(s) with soft cloth or cotton swab gently.

Remove the foreign substances.

Go to step 14.

14

Does the Toner Dispenser Motor function normally? Checked by [Motor Test] - [Yellow Toner Motor, Magenta Toner Motor, Cyan Toner Motor or Black Toner Motor] in [Digital Output] of diagnosis.

Go to step 16.

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y, M, C or K) (Refer to REP5.3), then go to step 15.

15

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

16

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 21.

21

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 22.

12

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY?

13

3-13

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

22

Checking after replacing the FRAME ASSY MOT Replace the FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 23.

23

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

3-14

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image) Trouble substance The entire paper is printed pure white. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zMOTOR ASSY DISP (Y/M/C/K) (PL5.1.3) or FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2) zTONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) zTONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) zTONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) zTONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zDRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) zDRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) zDRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data form is not suitable for the printer, then check the printing data form.

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the Toner Type Is the Non-Xerox Toner seated?

Replace the toner with the Xerox toner, then go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

3

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

4

Checking after reseating all TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs, and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s), then go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

6

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

3-15

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

7

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 9.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 8.

8

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 9.

9

Checking the life counter value of the TONER CARTRIDGEs Check the life counter value of the TONER CARTRIDGEs in [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Does the remainder value show the near of the end? (Refer to Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.)

Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE(s). (Refer to REP5.7)

Go to step 10.

Go to step 11.

Clean the window(s) with soft cloth or cotton swab gently.

Remove the foreign substances.

Go to step 12.

Checking the laser beam windows of the ROS ASSY Are the laser beam windows on the ROS ASSY clean?

10

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY?

11

12

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking the Toner Dispenser Motors for function Does the Toner Dispenser Motors function normally? Checked by [Motor Test] - [Yellow Toner Motor, Magenta Toner Motor, Cyan Toner Motor and Black Toner Motor] in diagnosis.

Go to step 18.

Go to step 14.

3-16

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

Checking the connector for connection Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (Y/M/ C/K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP). Are P/J18, P/J19, P/J181, P/J182, P/J191 and P/J192 connected correctly? 14

No

Go to step 16.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J18, P/J19, P/J181, P/ J182, P/J191 and/or P/J192 surly, then go to step 15.

15

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity Disconnect J18 and J19 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J181, J182, J191 and J192 from the TNR (Y/M/C/K) MOT. Is each cable of J18 J181 and J182 continuous? Is each cable of J19 J191 and J192 continuous?

Go to step 17.

Replace the HARN ASSY TNR MOT.

17

Checking the power to TNR (Y/M/C/K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Disconnect J18 and J19 from the PWBA MCU. Is the voltage across P18-3pin, P18-8pin, P19-4pin and P19-9pin ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed.

Replace the MOTOR ASSY DISP or FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3 or REP5.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Go to step 20.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 19.

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

18

19

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 21.

21

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 22.

22

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 23.

3-17

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

23

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 24.

24

Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 25.

25

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 26.

26

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

3-18

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P3 Solid black Trouble substance The entire paper is printed jet-black. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) zPWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data.

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the printing Is the image printed correctly? Checked by printing the [Gradation] in [Test Print] in diagnosis.

Go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

3

Checking the test printing Replace the PWB Is the image printed correctly? ESS. (Refer to Checked by printing the [Pattern IOT] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. REP8.3)

Go to step 4.

4

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 6.

6

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 8.

8

Checking after reseating the ROS ASSY Reseat the ROS ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 9.

3-19

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

9

Go to step 11.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 10.

10

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking after replacing the PWBA HVPS Replace the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-20

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction) Trouble substance There are some extremely faint or completely non-printed parts. Those nonprinted parts cover a wide area vertically, along the paper feeding direction. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data.

2

Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. When the vertical blank lines of periodicity are observed, check the defective parts by comparing the printed vertical blank lines with the Pitch Chart. Are there any vertical blank lines matching the chart?

Replace the Go to step 3. corresponding parts.

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4.

4

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the foreign substances on the paper transfer path Are there any foreign substances on the paper transfer path between the TRANSFER ASSY and FUSER ASSY?

Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 6.

Go to step 7.

6

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking the belt surfaces of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 8.

3-21

Go to step 2.

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

8

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Remove the foreign substances.

Go to step 10.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 11.

End of work

Go to step 12.

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY?

9

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

10

11

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

3-22

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

12

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 19.

Go to step 21.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 20.

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

19

20

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 21.

21

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-23

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction) Trouble substance There are some extremely faint or completely non-printed parts. Those nonprinted parts cover a wide area horizontally, perpendicular to the paper feeding direction. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

zPWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zTONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) zTONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) zTONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) zTONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data.

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Check the defective parts by comparing the printed horizontal band cross out with Pitch Chart. Are there any horizontal band cross out matching the chart?

Replace the corresponding parts

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4.

4

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 6.

3-24

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

6

7

Checking the laser beam path Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and PHD ASSY?

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 7.

Remove the foreign substances.

Go to step 8.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

8

9

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

3-25

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

12

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGEs Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE(s). (Refer to REP5.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

Go to step 20.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 19.

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

18

19

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

Checking after replacing the PWBA HVPS Replace the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 21.

21

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-26

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes Trouble substance There are vertical black stripes along the paper. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)

ABCDEabcde12345

zFUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data.

2

Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. When the vertical stripes of periodicity are observed, check the defective parts by comparing the printed vertical stripes with the Pitch Chart. Are there any vertical stripes matching the chart?

Replace the Go to step 3. corresponding parts.

Go to step 2.

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed? Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

3

3-27

Go to step 4.

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

4

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 5.

5

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 6.

6

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 8.

8

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 9.

9

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

3-28

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

11

Go to step 13.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 12.

12

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-29

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes Trouble substance There are horizontal black stripes (perpendicular to the paper path direction) along the paper. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zTONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21) zTONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22) zTONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23) zTONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24) zFUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data.

2

Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Check the defective parts by comparing the printed horizontal stripes with Pitch Chart. Are there any horizontal stripes matching the chart?

Replace the Go to step 3. corresponding parts.

Go to step 2.

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

3

4

Checking the paper path Are there any contaminations of the toner on the paper path?

3-30

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 4.

Clean the paper path.

Go to step 5.

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

5

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 6.

6

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 8.

8

Checking the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Are the TONER CARTRIDGEs that meet the specification installed to the correct position?

Go to step 9.

Replace a new TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/ M/C/K) meets the specification. (Refer to REP5.7)

9

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

3-31

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

13

Go to step 15.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 14.

14

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-32

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P8 Partial lack Trouble substance There are some extremely faint or completely missing parts in a limited area on the paper. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking dew condensation Was the printer installed in the room where the air conditioner well works?

Go to step 3.

Turn on the power of the air conditioner and replace a new dray and recommended paper, then go to step 2.

2

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Check the printing data.

Go to step 4.

4

Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. When the partial lacks of periodicity are observed, check the defective parts by comparing the printed partial lacks with the Pitch Chart. Are there any partial lacks matching the chart?

Replace the Go to step 5. corresponding parts.

5

Checking after replacing a new paper Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 6.

6

Checking the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 7.

3-33

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

7

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 8.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

8

9

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

Checking after reseating TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K), and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

3-34

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

13

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

Go to step 17.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 16.

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

15

16

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-35

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P9 Spots Trouble substance There are toner spots all over the paper disorderedly. ESS and possible causative parts zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1) zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)

ABCDEabcde12345

zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the contaminations on the paper transfer path Are there any contaminations on the paper transfer path?

Clean the contaminations with soft cloth or cotton swab, then go to step 2.

2

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

3

Checking the defective parts Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Check the defective parts by comparing the printed spots with Pitch Chart. Are there any spots matching the chart?

Replace the Go to step 4. corresponding parts.

4

Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications?

Go to step 6.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 5.

5

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 6.

6

Checking the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY?

Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3)

Go to step 7.

3-36

Go to step 3.

Go to step 3.

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

7

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 8.

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

8

9

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

Checking after reseating TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K), and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

3-37

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

12

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

Go to step 18.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 17.

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

16

17

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-38

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P10 Afterimage Trouble substance The ghost appears on the paper. The ghost may be the image of the previous page, or a part of the page currently printing. ESS and possible causative parts zLED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

ABCDEabcde12345

zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zFUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) zHARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the printing Did the client print the same image of large volume?

Go to step 2.

Go to step 3.

2

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Check the printing data.

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the printing Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 4.

4

Checking the erase lamps Open the COVER ASSY FRONT, and remove the PHD ASSY. Cheat the safety interlock switch. Does the four erase LEDs light correctly?

Go to step 8.

Go to step 5.

Go to step 6.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J141 and/or P/J14 surely, then go to step 6.

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and LED ASSY ERASE. Are P/J141 and P/J14 connected correctly?

5

3-39

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

6

Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J141 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is each cable of J14 J141 continuous?

Go to step 7.

Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

7

Checking the power to LED ASSY ERASE Disconnect the connector of J14 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is the voltage across P14-15pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Replace the LED ASSY ERASE. (REP4.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 9.

End of work

Go to step 10.

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 11.

End of work

Go to step 12.

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

8

9

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly? Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

10

11

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

3-40

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

12

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3)

3-41

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog) Trouble substance There is toner stain all over or a part of the page. The stain appears as very bright gray stain. ESS and possible causative parts zLED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

ABCDEabcde12345

zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) zHARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data.

Go to step 2.

2

Checking the contaminations on the paper transfer path Are there any contaminations on the paper transfer path?

Clean the contaminations with soft cloth or cotton swab, then go to step 3.

Go to step 4.

3

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 4.

4

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page after printing the color photograph or picture. (If the color photograph or picture printing is impossible, print the [Toner Palette] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the erase lamps Open the COVER ASSY FRONT, and remove the PHD ASSY. Cheat the safety interlock switch. Does the four erase LEDs light correctly?

Go to step 9.

Go to step 6.

1

3-42

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the connectors for connection Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and LED ASSY ERASE. Are P/J141 and P/J14 connected correctly?

Go to step 7.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J141 and/or P/J14 surely, then go to step 7.

7

Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. Disconnect J141 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is each cable of J14 J141 continuous?

Go to step 8.

Replace the HARN ASSY LVPS.

8

Checking the power to LED ASSY ERASE Disconnect the connector of J14 from the LED ASSY ERASE. Is the voltage across P14-15pin ground on the PWBA MCU, about +3.3 VDC?

Replace the LED ASSY ERASE. (REP4.2)

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

Clean or replace the TRANSFER ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 10.

6

Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or deformed?

9

3-43

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

Checking the PHD ASSY for connection Remove the PHD ASSY. Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?

10

Clean and/or replace the PHD ASSY or SPRING(s).

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

Checking after reseating TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K) Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K), and check that their lock keys are in the lock positions. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

Go to step 15.

Reconnect the connector(s) P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and/or P/J412 surely, then go to step 14.

Checking the ROS ASSY for connection Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU. Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?

13

14

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Reseat the PWBA MCU. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking after reseating the PWB ESS Reseat the PWB ESS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

3-44

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

17

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS Reseat the PWBA HVPS. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

3-45

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P12 Skew Trouble substance The printed image is not paralleled with both sides of the paper. ESS and possible causative parts zHOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) zROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)

ABCDE

abcde1

2345

zROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) zROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)

Note Tray is recommended for paper feeding because sheets fed via SSI is prone to skew depending on how the sheet is placed on SSI. Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4.

4

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the defective parts, then go to step 6.

6

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 8.

8

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 9.

9

Checking the paper feeding tray Is the skewed paper fed from the SSI?

Go to step 10.

Go to step 14.

3-46

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

10

Checking the side guides setting of SSI Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path?

Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 12.

Go to step 13.

12

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 13.

13

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL ASSY METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the Roll Assy Regi and Roll Regi Metal rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

14

Checking after reseating the Paper Cassette Reseat the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 15.

15

Checking after reseating the paper Reseat the paper in the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking the side guides of the Paper Cassette Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 17.

17

Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path?

Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 18.

Go to step 19.

18

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

Checking after reseating the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Reseat the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

Checking after replacing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 21.

21

Checking after replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 22.

22

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

3-47

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P13 Paper damage Trouble substance The paper comes out from the printer wrinkled, folded or worn-out. ESS and possible causative parts zHOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) zROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) zROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) zROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)

Note Tray is recommended for paper feeding because sheets fed via SSI is prone to skew depending on how the sheet is placed on SSI.

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking dew condensation Was the printer installed in the room where the air conditioner well works?

Go to step 3.

Turn on the power of the air conditioner, and replace a new dray and recommended paper, then go to step 2.

2

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications?

Go to step 5.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 4.

4

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 7.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 6.

6

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Replace the defective parts, then go to step 8.

8

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 9.

3-48

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

9

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 10.

10

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 11.

11

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 12.

12

Checking the paper feeding tray Is the damaged paper fed from the SSI?

Go to step 13.

Go to step 17.

13

Checking the side guides setting of SSI Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 14.

14

Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path?

Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 15.

Go to step 16.

15

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 16.

16

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

17

Checking after reseating the Paper Cassette Reseat the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 18.

18

Checking the side guides of the Paper Cassette Reset the side guides. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 19.

19

Checking after reseating a new paper Reseat a new paper in the Paper Cassette. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 20.

20

Checking the paper path Are there any foreign substances on the paper path?

Remove the foreign substances, then go to step 21.

Go to step 22.

21

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 22.

22

Checking after reseating the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Reseat the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 23.

23

Checking after replacing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 24.

3-49

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

24

Checking after replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 25.

25

Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and then enter the [Regi Clutch]. Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK).

End of work

Replace the ROLL ASSY REGI. (Refer to REP3.9)

3-50

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P14 No fix Trouble substance The printed image is not fixed on the paper properly. The image easily comes off when rubbed. ESS and possible causative parts zFUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345

zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Checking the using paper Does the using paper meet the specifications?

Go to step 3.

Use the paper that meets the specifications, then go to step 2.

2

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4.

4

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 5.

5

Checking the Toner Type Is the Xerox Toner seated?

Go to step 7.

Replace the toner with Xerox Toner, then go to step 6.

6

Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 7.

7

Checking the power cord for connection Connect the power cord with other wall outlet. (Never connect the power cord into other connector of the same wall outlet.) Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 8.

8

Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Reseat the FUSER ASSY. Is the image printed correctly?

End of work

Go to step 9.

9

Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled down. Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) Does the error still occur when printing?

Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11)

End of work

3-51

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble

FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color shift) Trouble substance A yellow or black image printed is not overlapped on a cyan or magenta image correctly. ESS and possible causative parts zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)

ABCDEabcde12345

zFUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.

Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

1

Turn OFF/ON the power. Does the color registration (color shift) appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 2.

End of work

2

Checking the printing Print the Windows test page. Is the image printed correctly?

Printing data is incorrect, then check the printing data.

Go to step 3.

3

Checking the paper condition Is the paper dry and recommended paper?

Go to step 5.

Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one, then go to step 4.

4

Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 5.

End of work

5

Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 6.

End of work

6

Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY Reseat the PHD ASSY. Does the banding error appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 7.

Go to step 8.

7

Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. Does the banding error appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 8.

End of work.

3-52

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Step

Remedy

Check

Yes

No

8

Adjusting the color registration automatically Checked by [Adjust Color Regi] of [Adjust Color Regi] in [Maintenance Mode] of [Admin Menu]. Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 9.

End of work

9

Adjusting the color registration manually Checked by [Enter Number] of [Adjust Color Regi] in [Maintenance Mode] of [Admin Menu]. (Refer to user's Manual.) Does the color registration appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 10.

End of work

10

Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Does the error appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 11.

End of work

11

Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Does the error appear on the printed material when printing?

Go to step 12.

End of work

12

Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Does the error appear on the printed material when printing?

Replace the printer.

End of work

3-53

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting 3.1 Image Quality Trouble Blank page

3-54

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments

CONTENTS 4.1 Preface .......................................................................................................................4-1 4.1.1 Before starting service procedure ................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.2 General notes ................................................................................................................................. 4-4

4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) ..........................................................4-5 PL1 COVERS .......................................................................................................................................... 4-5 REP1.1 (SCC) COVER TOP (PL1.1.1)............................................................................................... 4-5 REP1.2 TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2) ............................................................................................................. 4-8 REP1.3 (SCC) COVER REAR (PL1.1.3) .......................................................................................... 4-10 REP1.4 COVER CST (PL1.1.4)........................................................................................................ 4-12 REP1.5 COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5) ............................................................................ 4-13 REP1.6 COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6) ................................................................................................... 4-15 REP1.7 COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) ........................................................................................ 4-17 REP1.8 LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8).................................................................................................... 4-20 REP1.9 HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17), KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.97, 98, 99) .................... 4-22 REP1.10 SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) ................................................................................................. 4-25 REP1.11 CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19)................................................................................ 4-26 REP1.12 (SCC) COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20)..................................................................................... 4-29 REP1.13 KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95) ........................................................................................ 4-31 REP1.14 KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96)............................................................................................. 4-33 PL2 PAPER CASSETTE ....................................................................................................................... 4-35 REP2.1 CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) ........................................................................................ 4-35 REP2.2 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2) ...................................................................................... 4-36 REP2.3 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ................................................................................... 4-38 REP2.4 LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16).......................................... 4-40 REP2.5 LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) ......................................... 4-41 REP2.6 TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17)................................................................................. 4-42 REP2.7 GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23) ............................................................................................ 4-43 REP2.8 KIT SIDE GUIDE (PL2.1.99) ............................................................................................... 4-44 PL3 PAPER FEEDER............................................................................................................................ 4-47 REP3.1 (SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) ................................................................................ 4-47 REP3.2 BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2)................................................................................................... 4-50 REP3.3 UPPER UNIT (REFERENCE ONLY) .................................................................................. 4-51 REP3.4 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3) ..................................................................................... 4-57 REP3.5 STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7) ................................................................................................... 4-58 REP3.6 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20)............................................................................... 4-59 REP3.7 KIT SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.99) ....................................................................................... 4-61 REP3.8 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) .............................................................................................. 4-65 REP3.9 ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ............................................................................................... 4-68 REP3.10 SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) ................................................................ 4-71 REP3.11 SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) ............................................................... 4-73 REP3.12 SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13) ................................................................................. 4-74 REP3.13 ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11), SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12) ................................... 4-76 REP3.14 ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14), SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15).............................................. 4-77 REP3.15 SPRING STP (PL3.2.16), ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32) ............................. 4-80 PL4 XEROGRAPHICS........................................................................................................................... 4-81

REP4.1 HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3), HARN ASSY PHD XPRE (PL9.1.11) ...................................... 4-81 REP4.2 LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8) .............................................................................................. 4-84 REP4.3 (SCC) PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) .......................................................................................... 4-86 REP4.4 PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)......................................................................................................... 4-88 REP4.5 KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (PL4.1.97) ................................................................................... 4-90 REP4.6 KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (PL4.1.98)...................................................................................... 4-93 REP4.7 KIT ROS (PL4.1.99) ............................................................................................................ 4-96 PL5 DISPENSER................................................................................................................................. 4-103 REP5.1 DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) ........................................................................................... 4-103 REP5.2 FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)........................................................................................... 4-111 REP5.3 (SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) .............................................................................. 4-113 REP5.4 SWITCH (PL5.1.9)............................................................................................................. 4-114 REP5.5 HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10)................................................................................ 4-116 REP5.6 CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14)...................................................................................... 4-117 REP5.7 TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.21~24) ..................................................... 4-118 REP5.8 KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.96~99) ....................................................... 4-121 PL6 TRANSFER & FUSER.................................................................................................................. 4-123 REP6.1 FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) .................................................................................................... 4-123 REP6.2 STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5), SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6)......... 4-125 REP6.3 TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)............................................................................................. 4-130 PL7 DRIVE........................................................................................................................................... 4-133 REP7.1 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).................................................................................. 4-133 REP7.2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) ................................................................................ 4-136 REP7.3 GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3) ........................................................................................................... 4-138 REP7.4 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4) .................................................................................... 4-140 REP7.5 SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7) ............................. 4-144 PL8 ELECTRICAL ............................................................................................................................... 4-146 REP8.1 (SCC) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)............................................................................................... 4-146 REP8.2 DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2)......................................................................................................... 4-148 REP8.3 (ISC) (SCC) PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).................................................................................... 4-152 REP8.4 MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11).............................................................................. 4-159 REP8.5 MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12) ............................................................................................. 4-161 REP8.6 (SCC) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) ........................................................................................... 4-164 REP8.7 HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) ................................................................................ 4-167 REP8.8 SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) .................................................................................................. 4-169 REP8.9 (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9)........................................................................... 4-171 REP8.10 BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11)............................................................................................... 4-175 REP8.11 (SCC) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) ........................................................................................ 4-178 REP8.12 PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16) .............................................................................. 4-182 REP8.13 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL8.2.22)........................................................................... 4-184

4.3 Adjustments............................................................................................................4-186 ADJ4.3.1 Firmware .............................................................................................................................. 4-186 ADJ4.3.1.1 ESS F/W ...................................................................................................................... 4-186 ADJ4.3.1.2 MCU F/W ..................................................................................................................... 4-189 ADJ4.3.2 Directions for Replacing Important Information Stored Component..................................... 4-192

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.1 Preface

4.1 Preface Parts removal and replacement procedures are described in major 8 items which correspond to classification of parts list. z REP 1

COVERS

z REP 2

PAPER CASSETTE

z REP 3

PAPER FEEDER

z REP 4

XEROGRAPHICS

z REP 5

DISPENSER

z REP 6

TRANSFER & FUSER

z REP 7

DRIVE

z REP 8

ELECTRICAL

Note When working on an item which is controlled as a spare part but the procedure therefore is not described, observe carefully how the part is attached before removing the item.

Note As a general rule, optional items are assumed to be removed from the equipment. However, you may work with optional items attached if it does not disturb your work.

Safety Critical Component (SCC) Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to Fuji Xerox Co. Ltdstipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components. Important Information Stored Component (ISC) Important Information Stored Components store customers' important information they have entered after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care never to let customer information leak out.

4-1

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.1 Preface

4.1.1 Before starting service procedure z Start the procedure after turning off the power and removing the power cord from the outlet. z When performing the service operation around the FUSER ASSY, ensure that FUSER ASSY and its surrounding area have cooled down sufficiently. z Pay sufficient attention to the parts during the procedure because they may be broken or may not perform their functions properly if unreasonable force is applied. z Since various types of screws are used, ensure that the right screws are used in their right positions. Use special caution not to confuse the screws for plastic and the ones for sheet metal, because using the wrong type of screw may result in damage to the screw threads or other troubles.

No.

Type

Application

Shape

How to distinguish

Points to be noted

•Silver-colored •Thread is coarser than that of the sheet metal type. •Screw tip is thin.

Oblique screwing damages the thread because this screw cuts female threads in the base material as it goes in.

Plastic

1

Screw for plastic Silver, tap

Coarse

Parts etc Plastic

Major application locations

-

Sheet metal

2

Screw for metal sheet Silver Parts etc Sheet metal

3

Screw for metal sheet Silver, with an external tooth washer

Sheet metal

Parts etc Sheet metal

4-2

•Silver-colored •Diameter of the thread section is uniform.

-

•Silver-colored •Provided with an external tooth washer. •Diameter of the thread section is uniform.

•Mounting positions of the ground wires.

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.1 Preface z Wear a wristband or the like as far as possible to remove static electricity of the human body. z Keep the front cover closed. Buzzer goes off when the machine is left powered on with the front cover open for five minutes or longer to prevent the drum deterioration due to exposure to light. z When opening the front door in a removal/replacement operation, cover the drum to keep it from being exposed to light. z Remove PAPER CASSETTE, PHD ASSY, TONER CARTRIDGE and FUSER ASSY, and put them in a place where they do not affect the procedure. (Note that the service procedures can be performed with those parts in place depending on the target section of removal/replacement.)

FUSER ASSY

PHD ASSY

TONER CARTRIDGE (K)

PAPER CASSETTE TONER CARTRIDGE (C)

TONER CARTRIDGE (M)

TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Wsb03001GA

4-3

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.1 Preface

4.1.2 General notes z The string “(PL X.Y.Z)” suffixed to the part name in the procedure denotes that the part corresponds to the plate (PL) “X.Y”, item “Z” of [Engineering Parts list], and its shape and fitting position can be checked in [Engineering Parts list]. z Directional descriptions used in the procedures are defined as follows: -Front: Direction toward you when facing the front of the printer. -Rear: Direction opposite to the front when facing the front of the printer. -Left: Left-hand direction when facing the front of the printer. -Right: Right-hand direction when facing the front of the printer

Wsb03002GA Figure: Definitions of Printer Orientation

z The string “(REP X.Y)” that appears in or at the end of the procedure denotes that the related service procedure is described in [REP X.Y]. z Screws shown in the illustrations are to be unscrewed and removed using a Phillips head (cross-slot) screwdriver, unless otherwise specified. z Black arrows shown in the illustrations denote moving directions. When numbers are assigned to these arrows, they refer to the order in the procedure. z Refer to Chapter 7 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)] for the positions of connectors (P/J).

4-4

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) PL1

COVERS

REP1.1

(SCC) COVER TOP (PL1.1.1)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

4

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER TOP (PL1.1.1) to the printer.

4-5

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 5

Lift up the front side of the COVER TOP to release the COVER TOP from the two pegs on the printer.

6

Slide the COVER TOP to backward and lift up it to release the COVER TOP from the hooks.

Note Release the left and right sides of the COVER TOP in order.

4-6

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 7

Remove the COVER TOP from the printer.

4-7

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.2

TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2)

[Removal] 1

Open the TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2).

2

Press the right side of the TRAY EXT to the left, to release the hole of the TRAY EXT from the boss of the printer.

4-8

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 3

Remove the TRAY EXT.

4-9

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.3

(SCC) COVER REAR (PL1.1.3)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER REAR (PL1.1.3) to the printer.

4-10

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 11

Remove the COVER REAR from the printer.

4-11

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.4

COVER CST (PL1.1.4)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Press the left and right sides of the COVER CST (PL1.1.4) to release the two hooks from the holes of the printer, remove it.

4-12

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.5

COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5).

2

Press the upper hinge of the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR to release the boss on the hinge from the hole of the printer, move the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR to arrow direction.

4-13

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 3

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR.

4-14

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.6

COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

3

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

5

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

Accesses Position (The 7) shows the procedure number.)

4-15

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 6

Remove the seven screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6) to the printer.

7

Release the front hook of the COVER SIDE R.

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R from the printer.

4-16

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.7

COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

6

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

7

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

9

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

Accesses Position (The 10), 11) and 12) show the procedure number.)

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the COVER ASSY FRONT side.

4-17

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 10

Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17) from the rib of the printer, disengage the connector (P/J2900) of the HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12).

11

Release the HARNESS ASSY A-OP from the hooks of the printer.

12

Insert the right side under part of the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) into the inside of the printer.

4-18

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 13

Tilt the COVER ASSY FRONT, release the left side boss of the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

14

Release the right side boss of the TRANSFER ASSY from the COVER ASSY FRONT, remove the COVER ASSY FRONT from the printer.

4-19

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.8

LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

6

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

7

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

9

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

10

Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the left and right LATCH FRONTs. 11

Release the hook of the LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8), rotate the LATCH FRONT by 90 degrees.

4-20

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 12

Lift up the LATCH FRONT.

4-21

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.9

HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17), KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.97, 98, 99)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

6

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

7

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

9

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

10

Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

11

Remove the LATCH FRONT. (REP1.8)

12

Remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL. (REP1.11)

13

Remove the KIT CVR HARNESS. (REP1.13)

14

Remove the KIT GUIDE BELT. (REP1.14)

4-22

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 15

Remove the SPRING LATCH OUT (PL1.1.10) from the PLATE LATCH (PL1.1.9).

16

Move the PLATE LATCH to the left.

17

Remove the PLATE LATCH from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-23

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 18

Release the HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17) from the hooks of the COVER ASSY FRONT.

19

Pull the HARNESS ASSY A-OP out from the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL side, remove it.

4-24

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.10

SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18)

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the left and right SHAFT PIVOTs (PL1.1.18). [Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Release the hook of the SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) to pull out the SHAFT PIVOT.

4-25

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.11

CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note Take care not to move the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL away from the COVER ASSY FRONT too far because the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL is secured to the HARNESS ASSY A-OP.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL. 3

Release the six hooks of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19), using a miniature screwdriver.

4-26

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 4

Remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

5

Disengage the connector (P/J220) of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL, and then remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL.

4-27

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note Set the core of the HARNESS ASSY A-OP to the space of the COVER ASSY FRONT when attaching the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-28

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.12

(SCC) COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

4

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

Accesses Position (The 6) shows the procedure number.)

5

Remove the three screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20) to the printer.

4-29

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 6

Release the front hook of the COVER SIDE L.

7

Swing the COVER SIDE L to backward, to release the two notches of the COVER SIDE L from the two hooks of the COVER REAR (PL1.1.3). Remove the COVER SIDE L from the printer.

4-30

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.13

KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

6

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

7

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

9

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

10

Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

11

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95) to the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-31

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 12

Remove the KIT CVR HARNESS from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Note When attaching the KIT CVR HARNESS, mate the tabs of the KIT CVR HARNESS with the notch and the hole of the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-32

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP1.14

KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

6

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

7

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

9

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

10

Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

11

Remove the three screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96) to the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-33

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 12

Remove the KIT GUIDE BELT from the COVER ASSY FRONT.

Note When attaching the KIT GUIDE BELT, mate the tabs of the KIT GUIDE BELT with the notch and hole of the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-34

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL2

PAPER CASSETTE

REP2.1

CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1)

[Removal] 1

Pull out the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) from the printer.

4-35

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.2

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2)

[Removal] 1 2

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Push the LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14) and the LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), lift the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2) up.

3

Release the left and right bosses of the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM by pressing the left and right of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18) to outside direction.

4

Push the left and right hooks of the HOUSING CST 250 to release the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1).

Note When attaching the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, make sure that the bosses on the under side of the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM were attached to the SPRING N/F L (PL2.1.3) and the SPRING N/F R (PL2.1.4). LATCH BOTTOM R

LATCH BOTTOM L

Wsb04001FA

4-36

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM

SPRING N/F R

SPRING N/F L

Wsb04002FA

4-37

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.3

HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5)

[Removal] 1 2

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1) Hold the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) and pinch the left and right hooks of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5). Swing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to release the two hooks.

3

Pull up the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD from the CASSETTE ASSY 250.

4-38

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note Mate the under tab of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD with the hole of the CASSETTE ASSY 250 when attaching the HOLDER ASSY RETARD.

4-39

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.4

LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. (REP2.2)

3

Remove the SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) from the bosses of the LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14) and the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18)

4

Shift the LATCH BOTTOM L to inside, remove the LATCH BOTTOM L from the groove of the HOUSING CST 250.

Note When the LATCH BOTTOM L and the LATCH BOTTOM R are removed at same time, use caution not to confuse their securing positions. LATCH BOTTOM L

SPRING LATCH B

Wsb04003FA

4-40

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.5

LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. (REP2.2)

3

Remove the SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) from the bosses of the LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15) and the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18).

4

Shift the LATCH BOTTOM R to inside, remove the LATCH BOTTOM R from the groove of the HOUSING CST 250.

Note When the LATCH BOTTOM L and the LATCH BOTTOM R are removed at same time, use caution not to confuse their securing positions. LATCH BOTTOM R

SPRING LATCH B

Wsb04004FA

4-41

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.6

TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Shift the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17) to backward until it stops.

3

Push the back center of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18) to release the stopper of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION.

4

Remove the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) by depressing the latch lever of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION. TRAY ASSY EXTENSION

Wsb04005FA

4-42

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.7

GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Shift the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17) to backward until it stops.

3

Shift the GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23) to frontward until it stops.

4

Push the front center of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION to release the stopper of the GUIDE ASSY END.

5

Remove the GUIDE ASSY END from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) by depressing the latch lever of the GUIDE ASSY END. GUIDE ASSY END

Wsb04006FA

4-43

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP2.8

KIT SIDE GUIDE (PL2.1.99)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. (REP2.2)

3

Release the hook that fixes the GEAR PINION (PL2.1.7), remove the GEAR PINION from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1).

4

Shift the GUIDE SIDE L (PL2.1.6) to inside to mate the two under hooks on the GUIDE SIDE L with holes of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18).

5

Remove GUIDE SIDE L from CASETTTE ASSY 250 by sliding GUIDE SIDE L so that the three hooks (left, center, right) on the bottom are released from the holes on HOUSING CST 250. Ensure that the hooks are released one by one from left to right.

6

Shift the GUIDE SIDE ASSY R (PL2.1.8) to inside to mate the two under hooks on the GUIDE SIDE ASSY R with the holes of the HOUSING CST 250.

7

Remove GUIDE SIDE R from CASETTTE ASSY 250 by sliding GUIDE SIDE L so that the three hooks (right, center, left) on the bottom are released from the holes on HOUSING CST 250. Ensure that the hooks are released one by one from right to left.

Note Shift the GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE SIDE ASSY R to outside before attaching the GEAR PINION. GEAR PINION

Wsb04007FA

4-44

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

hook

GUIDE SIDE L

Wsb04008FA

4-45

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

hook

GUIDE SIDE R

Wsb04009FA

4-46

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL3

PAPER FEEDER

REP3.1

(SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

5

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

6

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

7

Release the harness of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) from the hook of the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4).

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the printer harness side.

4-47

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 8

Disengage the connector (P/J262) of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.

9

Remove the E-ring that fixes the CLUTCH ASSY DRV to the shaft, using a miniature screwdriver, remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.

4-48

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the CLUTCH ASSY DRV, mate the notch of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV with the rib of the DRIVE ASSY PH.

4-49

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.2

BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

5

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

6

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

7

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

8

Release the two hooks of the BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2), remove the BEARING REGI from the shaft.

4-50

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.3

UPPER UNIT (REFERENCE ONLY)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.7)

5

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

6

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 7

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

8

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

10

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

11

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

12

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

13

Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2)

14

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

15

Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2)

16

Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)

17

Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11)

18

Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)

19

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

20

Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

21

Remove the STOPPER PIVOT, GEAR T4 and SHAFT ASSY PIVOT. (REP6.2)

22

Remove the TRANSFER ASSY. (REP6.3)

4-51

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

23

Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10).

24

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the hook of the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-52

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 25

Remove the GUIDE HARNESS AC from the printer together with the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

26

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the BRACKET MCU R (PL8.2.15) to the printer.

27

Remove the BRACKET MCU R from the printer.

4-53

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 28

Remove the two screws that fix the front side of the printer frame.

29

Remove the two screws that fix the under part of the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).

30

Open the HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), and (Y), remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the right side of the printer frame.

4-54

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 31

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the rear side of the DISPENSER ASSY and the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the MCU L (PL8.2.18).

32

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the left side of the printer frame and the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the BRACKET MCU L.

33

Remove the UPPER UNIT.

4-55

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the UPPER UNIT, route the connection harness of the TRANSFER ASSY through the notch of the UPPER UNIT.

Note When attaching the UPPER UNIT, mate the two holes of the UPPER UNIT with the bosses of the FEEDER ASSY V.

4-56

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.4

(SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3)

[Removal] 1

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3)

2

Remove the eight screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME HVPS (PL4.1.20) to the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3).

3

Remove the FRAME HVPS from the FEEDER ASSY V together with the PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19), remove the FEEDER ASSY V.

4-57

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.5

STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

3

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7) to the printer.

4

Remove the STOPPER CST from the printer.

4-58

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.6

ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

3

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

5

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

6

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

7

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the PLATE EARTH FDR (PL3.1.19) and PLATE EARTH CST (PL3.1.21) to the printer.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, do not bend the PLATE EARTH FDR and the PLATE EARTH CST

4-59

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 8

Move the ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20) from between the PLATEs and the frame, remove it.

ARRESTER ENE112D-10A

Wsb04010FA

4-60

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.7

KIT SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.99)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

12

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

13

Remove the SPRING FEED OUT (PL3.1.13) from the printer.

4-61

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 14

Release the hook of the GEAR ASSY FEED (PL3.1.14), remove the GEAR ASSY FEED from the SHAFT ASSY FEED (PL3.2.2).

15

Remove the SPRING LEVER (PL3.1.10) from the printer.

16

Release the hook of the LEVER FEED (PL3.1.11), remove the LEVER FEED from the printer.

4-62

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 17

Release the harness of the SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL3.1.9) from the hooks of the printer.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the printer harness side. 18

Release the relay connector from the rib of the printer, disengage the connecter (P/J231) of the SOLENOID FEED MSI.

4-63

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 19

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SOLENOID FEED MSI to the printer, remove the SOLENOID FEED MSI.

Note When attaching the GEAR ASSY FEED, it is easier to put the D-cut surface of the SHAFT ASSY FEED on the front.

Note When attaching the SPRING FEED OUT, make sure that the SPRING FEED OUT position is correct.

4-64

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.8

ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Release the hook of the ROLL CORE MSI (PL3.2.3) on the left of the ROLL ASSY FEED (PL 3.2.4), and move the ROLL CORE MSI to left until it stops.

5

Release the groove on the ROLL ASSY FEED from the vertical pin mounted on the SHAFT ASSY FEED (PL3.2.2) by sliding the ROLL ASSY FEED to the left.

6

Close the COVER ASSY FRONT.

4-65

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 7

Remove the ROLL ASSY FEED from the SHAFT ASSY FEED by rotating the ROLL ASSY FEED 180 degrees.

ROLL CORE MSI

ROLL ASSY FEED

Wsb04011FA

4-66

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

ROLL ASSY FEED

Wsb04012FA

4-67

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.9

ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9)

[Removal] 1

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3)

2

Release the hook of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT (PL3.2.6), shift the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) to right side.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the SPRING REGI OUT (PL3.2.7). 3

Release the ACTUATOR REGI OUT from the hook on the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26), open the ACTUATOR REGI OUT.

4-68

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 4

Remove the left and right E-rings that fix the shaft of the ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9).

Note When carrying out work shown below, it is easier to push the ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) to frontward. 5

Remove the GEAR REGI R (PL3.2.22), the BEARING EARTH REGI (PL3.2.21) and the BEARING R (PL3.2.31) from the ROLL ASSY REGI.

6

Move the ACTUATOR REGI OUT to right until it stops.

7

Shift the ROLL ASSY REGI to left to remove the right shaft of the ROLL ASSY REGI, remove the ROLL ASSY REGI from the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3) together with the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL.

8

Remove the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL from the ROLL ASSY REGI.

4-69

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note After attaching the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL, check the movement of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI IN. ACTUATOR REGI OUT

BEARING R

NOTE GEAR REGI R BEARING EARTH REGI

ROLL REGI METAL Wsb04013FA ACTUATOR REGI OUT ACTUATOR REGI ROLL

ROLL ASSY REGI Wsb04014FA

4-70

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.10

SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Before working, put the paper on the transfer belt to protect from the damage.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to move the BRACKET SNS from the printer too far because they are connected with the harness.

4-71

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 5

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SNS (PL3.2.28) to the printer, remove the BRACKET SNS.

6

Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) to the BRACKET SNS, and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER.

7

Disengage the connector (P/J233) of the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER.

4-72

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.11

SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13)

[Removal] 1 2

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3) Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) to the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER.

3

Disengage the connector (P/J234) of the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER.

4-73

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.12

SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13)

[Removal] 1

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3)

2

Release the hook of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT (PL3.2.6), shift the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8) to right side.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the SPRING REGI OUT (PL3.2.7). 3

Release the ACTUATOR REGI OUT from the hook on the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26), open the ACTUATOR REGI OUT.

Note When carrying out the work this procedure, it is easier to push the ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) to downward.

4-74

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 4

Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13) to the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI.

5

Disengage the connector (P/J232) of the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI.

Note After attaching the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL, check the movement of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI IN.

4-75

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.13

ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11), SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12)

[Removal] 1

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3)

2

Remove the ROLL ASSY REGI. (REP3.9)

3

Release the left shaft of the ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) from the hook of the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26).

4

Remove the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12) by releasing the right shaft of the ACTUATOR REGI IN from the hole of the CHUTE UP.

5

Remove the SPRING ACT REGI from the ACTUATOR REGI IN.

Note When attaching the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the SPRING ACT REGI, ensure that the SPRING ACT REGI is hung to ACTUATOR REGI IN and the CHUTE UP correctly. NOTE

ACTUATOR REGI IN

SPRING ACT REGI

Wsb04025FA

4-76

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.14

ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14), SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Before working, put the paper on the transfer belt to protect from the damage.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to move the BRACKET SNS from the printer too far because they are connected with the harness.

4-77

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 5

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SNS (PL3.2.28) to the printer, remove the BRACKET SNS.

6

Release the left shaft of the ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) from the hook of the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26).

7

Remove the ACTUATOR SSI and the SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15) by releasing the right shaft of the ACTUATOR SSI from the hole of the CHUTE UP.

8

Remove the SPRING ACT SSI from the ACTUATOR SSI.

4-78

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the ACTUATOR SSI and the SPRING ACT SSI, ensure that the SPRING ACT SSI is hung to ACTUATOR SSI and the CHUTE UP correctly. NOTE

SPRING ACT SSI

ACTUATOR SSI

Wsb04026FA

4-79

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP3.15

SPRING STP (PL3.2.16), ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32)

[Removal] 1

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3)

2

Remove the FEEDER ASSY V. (REP3.4)

3

Remove the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER. (REP3.11)

4

Release the left and right shafts of the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32) from the hole of the CHUTE UP by pushing the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26). Remove the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER and the SPRING STP (PL3.2.16).

5

Remove the SPRING STP from the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER.

Note When attaching the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER and the SPRING STP, ensure that the SPRING STP is hung to ACTUATOR NO PAPER and the CHUTE UP correctly.

SPRING STP

NOTE

ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER

Wsb04027FA

4-80

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL4

XEROGRAPHICS

REP4.1

HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3), HARN ASSY PHD XPRE (PL9.1.11)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

12

Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2)

13

Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)

14

Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11)

15

Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)

16

Remove the KIT ROS. (REP4.7)

17

Release the three hooks that fix the HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3) to the printer, and remove the HOLDER CRUM.

18

Remove the CONNECTOR CRUM of the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11) from the printer.

19

Disengage the connector (P/J144) of the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16).

4-81

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 20

Release the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO from the hook of the printer and the GUIDE HARNESS MCU (PL8.2.19), remove it.

HOLDER CRUM

Wsb04015FA

4-82

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

CONNECT CRUM

HARN ASSY PHD XPRO

Wsb04016FA

4-83

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.2

LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

3

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

5

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

6

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

7

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8) to the printer.

4-84

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 8

Remove the LED ASSY ERASE from the printer.

9

Disengage the connector (P/J141) of the LED ASSY ERASE.

4-85

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.3

(SCC) PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19)

[Removal]

Note Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1

Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3)

2

Remove the seven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) to the FRAME HVPS (PL4.1.20).

3

Remove the PWBA HVPS from the FRAME HVPS.

4-86

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the PWBA HVPS, mate the notch and hole of the PWBA HVPS with the tabs of the FRAME HVPS.

4-87

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.4

PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)

[Removal]

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note When carrying out the work this procedure, take care not to cover the left and right of the belt guards with the paper. 2

Put the paper on the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) to protect the belt.

3

Rotate the four stoppers of the PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) to the counter clockwise direction, to release the lock.

4-88

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 4

Remove the PHD ASSY toward you by pulling it by the left and right handles.

5

Lift up the PHD ASSY from the printer.

Note When attaching the PHD ASSY, do not break the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY.

4-89

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.5

KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (PL4.1.97)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

3

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

5

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

6

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

7

Remove the LED ASSY ERASE. (REP4.2)

Accesses Position (The 8), 9), 10) and 11) show the procedure number.)

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the upper and lower BLOCK STOPPER PHD ADs (PL4.1.7).

4-90

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 8

Release the hook of the BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD (PL4.1.7), using a miniature screwdriver.

9

Remove the BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD from the printer.

10

Remove the SPRING PHD (PL4.1.4) from the printer.

4-91

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 11

Rotate the LEVER PHD (PL4.1.5) slightly, remove the LEVER PHD from the printer.

4-92

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.6

KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (PL4.1.98)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

12

Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2)

13

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

14

Remove the GEAR P2. (REP7.3)

15

Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (REP7.2)

4-93

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Accesses Position (The 16), 17), 18) and 19) show the procedure number.)

Note Described next procedure is the removal procedure common among the upper and lower BLOCK STOPPER PDH Ds (PL4.1.6). 16

Release the hook of the BLOCK STOPPER PHD D (PL4.1.6), using a miniature screwdriver.

17

Remove the BLOCK STOPPER PHD D from the printer.

4-94

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 18

Remove the SPRING PHD (PL4.1.4) from the printer.

19

Rotate the LEVER PHD (PL4.1.5) slightly, remove the LEVER PHD from the printer.

4-95

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP4.7

KIT ROS (PL4.1.99)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

12

Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2)

13

Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)

14

Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11)

15

Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)

4-96

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

16

Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10).

17

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the hook of the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-97

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 18

Remove the GUIDE HARNESS AC from the printer together with the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

19

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the BRACKET MCU R (PL8.2.15) to the printer.

20

Remove the BRACKET MCU R from the printer.

4-98

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 21

Remove all the connectors on the PWBA LVPS, release the harness of the HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) from the GUIDE HARNESS FSR (PL8.2.2).

22

Release the hooks of the GUIDE HARNESS FSR, move the GUIDE HARNESS FSR to remove it from the FRAME ASSY LVPS (PL8.2.3).

4-99

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 23

Remove the two screws (silver, M4, 6mm) and the six screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME ASSY LVPS to the printer.

24

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) to the FRAME ASSY LVPS, remove the FRAME ASSY LVPS from the printer together with the PWBA LVPS.

25

Disengage the two connectors (P/J411, 412) of the ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1).

4-100

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 26

Remove the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the left and right sides of the SPRING ROSs (PL4.1.2) to the printer. Remove the SPRING ROSs from the printer.

27

Lift up the ROS ASSY slowly from the printer.

4-101

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the ROS ASSY, Mate the under side boss of the ROS ASSY with the hole of the printer.

Note When attaching the ROS ASSY, ensure that the SPRING ROS is oriented to the direction.

Note Since two types of screws are used for securing the FRAME ASSY LVPS, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-102

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL5

DISPENSER

REP5.1

DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

12

Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2)

13

Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)

14

Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11)

15

Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)

16

Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.7)

17

Remove the KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.8)

4-103

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

18

Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10).

19

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the hook of the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-104

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 20

Remove the GUIDE HARNESS AC from the printer together with the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

21

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the BRACKET MCU R (PL8.2.15) to the printer.

22

Remove the BRACKET MCU R from the printer.

4-105

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 23

Remove all the connectors on the PWBA LVPS, release the harness of the HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2) from the GUIDE HARNESS FSR (PL8.2.2).

24

Release the hooks of the GUIDE HARNESS FSR, move the GUIDE HARNESS FSR to remove it from the FRAME ASSY LVPS (PL8.2.3).

4-106

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 25

Remove the two screws (silver, M4, 6mm) and the six screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME ASSY LVPS to the printer.

26

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) to the FRAME ASSY LVPS, remove the FRAME ASSY LVPS from the printer together with the PWBA LVPS.

4-107

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 27

Release the hook of the connector of the HARN ASSY TEST RL (PL5.1.28), using pliers, and then remove it from the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).

28

Remove the HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2), HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3), HARN ASSY 24V (PL9.1.4), HARN ASSY ESS POWER (PL9.1.10) and HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12) from the hooks of the DISPENSER ASSY.

4-108

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 29

Remove the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DISPENSER ASSY to the printer.

30

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the rear side of the DISPENSER ASSY to the printer.

31

Release the hole of the DISPENSER ASSY from the boss of the printer, move the DISPENSER ASSY to backward. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY from the printer.

4-109

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note Since two types of screws are used for securing the FRAME ASSY LVPS, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-110

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.2

FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)

[Removal] 1 2

Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1) Disengage all the connectors of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3), release all the harness from the hooks of the FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2).

3

Remove the five screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME ASSY MOT to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the GEARs. 4

Release the notch of the CONDUCTOR MOTOR (PL5.1.4) from the hook of the FRAME DISP (PL5.1.12), remove the FRAME ASSY MOT from the DISPENSER ASSY.

4-111

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note Ensure that the notch of the CONDUCTOR MOTOR is attached to the hook of the FRAME DISP.

FRAME ASSY MOT

Wsb04017FA

4-112

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.3

(SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3)

[Removal]

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the four MOTOR ASSY DISPs. 1

Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1)

2

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1), remove the MOTOR ASSY DISP.

3

Disengage the connector of the MOTOR ASSY DISP. MOTOR ASSY DISP

Wsb04018FA

4-113

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.4

SWITCH (PL5.1.9)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

3

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 4

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

5

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

6

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

7

Release the hooks of the SWITCH (PL5.1.9) by using the miniature screwdriver, remove the SWITCH from the printer.

4-114

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 8

Disengage the connector (P/J291) of the SWITCH.

4-115

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.5

HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10)

[Removal]

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the four HOUSING ASSY AUGERs. 1

Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1)

2

Remove the FRAME ASSY MOT. (REP5.2)

3

Release the six hooks that fix the HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10) to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1), and remove the HOUSING ASSY AUGER.

HOUSING ASSY AUGER

Wsb04019FA

4-116

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.6

CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14)

[Removal]

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the four CONNECTOR CRUMs. 1

Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1)

2

Release the two hooks that fix the CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) to the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1), and remove the CONNECTOR CRUM.

3

Disengage the connector of the CONNECTOR CRUM.

CONNECTOR CRUM

Wsb04020FA

4-117

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.7

TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.21~24)

[Removal]

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the four TONER CARTRIDGEs. 1

Open the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5).

2

Move the handle of the TONER CARTRIDGE to backward, to release the lock.

3

Open the HOLDER TCRU.

4-118

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 4

Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE from the HOLDER TCRU.

Note Shake the TONER CARTRIDGE five or six times for the distributing toner evenly when new toner cartridge.

4-119

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the TONER CARTRIDGE, mate the delta mark of the Handle with the lock mark on the cartridge holder.

4-120

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP5.8

KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.96~99)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.7)

Note Described below is the removal procedure common among the four KIT HOLDER TCRUs.

4-121

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 12

Press the central part of the KIT HOLDER TCRU to release the hole of the KIT HOLDER TCRU from the boss of the FRAME DISP (PL5.1.12). Open the KIT HOLDER TCRU by 90 degrees.

13

Press the boss part of the KIT HOLDER TCRU, remove the KIT HOLDER TCRU from the printer.

4-122

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL6

TRANSFER & FUSER

REP6.1

FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1)

[Removal]

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

2

Pull the LEVER to release the lock.

3

Disengage the connector of the FUSER ASSY by pulling the right side of the FUSER ASSY toward you with the LEVER released.

4-123

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 4

Lift up the FUSER ASSY, move the FUSER ASSY to the right side.

4-124

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP6.2

STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5), SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

6

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

7

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

9

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

10

Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)

4-125

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 11

Rotate the STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), mate the tabs of the STOPPER PIVOT with the notches of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2).

12

Remove the STOPPER PIVOT from the printer.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the GEAR T4.

4-126

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 13

Pull out the PIVOT TRANS L (PL6.1.4), remove the GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5) from the printer.

14

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6) to the printer.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, keep the TRANSFER ASSY slightly lifted for ease of work.

4-127

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 15

Pull out the SHAFT ASSY PIVOT from the printer.

Note Ensure that the GEAR T4 is oriented to the direction.

4-128

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the STOPPER PIVOT ensure that the flat face of the PIVOT TRANS L is oriented to the direction shown in the right.

4-129

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP6.3

TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 5

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

6

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

7

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

9

Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)

10

Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)

11

Insert the SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) to the hole of the frame, to fix the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7).

4-130

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to scratch the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY. 12

Release the hook of the COVER HARNESS 2 (PL6.1.8), using a miniature screwdriver, and then remove the COVER HARNESS 2.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the TRANSFER ASSY harness side. 13

Release the harness from the pegs of the TRANSFER ASSY, disengage the connector (P/J281) of the TRANSFER ASSY.

4-131

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 14

Release the harness coming from printer from hook of the TRANSFER ASSY.

15

Tilt the TRANSFER ASSY slowly.

16

Remove the STOPPER PIVOT, GEAR T4 and SHAFT ASSY PIVOT. (REP6.2)

17

Remove the TRANSFER ASSY from the printer.

4-132

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL7

DRIVE

REP7.1

(SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

12

Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2)

13

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

14

Remove the GEAR P2. (REP7.3)

15

Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (REP7.2)

16

Remove the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK. (REP8.7)

4-133

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 17

Disengage the connector (P/J221) of the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).

18

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) and the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY SUB to the printer.

19

Remove the DRIVE ASSY SUB from the printer.

4-134

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note Since two types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY SUB, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-135

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.2

(SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

12

Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2)

13

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

14

Remove the GEAR P2. (REP7.3)

4-136

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 15

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) and the five screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) to the printer.

16

Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN from the printer.

Note Since two types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-137

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.3

GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

12

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

13

Remove the GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3) from the shaft of the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).

4-138

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note Ensure that the GEAR P2 is oriented to the direction.

4-139

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.4

(SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

Accesses Position (The 12) shows the procedure number.)

4-140

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 12

Disengage the two connectors (P/J24, 26) on the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13), release the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

13

Disengage the connector (P/J211) of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2), release all the harness from the hooks of the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4).

4-141

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 14

Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm), the one screw (silver, M3, 6mm) and the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY PH to the printer.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the coupling gear to inside.

4-142

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 15

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH from the printer.

16

Disengage the connector (P/J261) of the color mode sensor on the DRIVE ASSY PH, release the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) from the hook of the DRIVE ASSY PH.

Note Since three types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY PH, ensure that the right screws are used at their right securing positions. The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T]. The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].

4-143

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP7.5

SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)

12

Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

13

Lift the lever of the SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.11) up, rotate the gear to release the cam on the gear from the sensor.

4-144

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 14

Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7) to the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR.

cam

Wsb04021FA

SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

Wsb04022FA

4-145

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL8

ELECTRICAL

REP8.1

(SCC) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Disengage the FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) connector (P/J503) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the harness of the FAN MAIN from the hooks of the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).

4-146

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 12

Release the four hooks of the DUCT FAN, remove the FAN MAIN from the printer.

Note Attach the FAN so that the labeled surface faces front.

4-147

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.2

DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

12

Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

4-148

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 13

Swing the PLATE ESS to upward slightly, to release the upper tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS after releasing the lower tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL8.1.3). Remove the PLATE ESS from the printer.

14

Remove the eleven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the SHIELD ASSY ESS to the printer.

4-149

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 15

Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS from the printer.

16

Disengage the two connectors (P/J101, 111) on the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9), release the harness from the hooks of the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).

17

Remove the one screw (silver, 6mm) that fixes the DUCT FAN to the printer.

4-150

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 18

Release the two hooks of the DUCT FAN, using a miniature screwdriver, and then remove the DUCT FAN from the printer.

4-151

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.3

(ISC) (SCC) PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)

[Removal]

Note Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

4-152

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 12

Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

13

Swing the PLATE ESS to upward slightly, to release the upper tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS after releasing the lower tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL8.1.3). Remove the PLATE ESS from the printer.

4-153

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 14

Remove the eleven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the SHIELD ASSY ESS to the printer.

15

Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS from the printer.

4-154

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 16

Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).

17

Pull out the connector (J401) of the HANESS ASSY ESS POWER (PL9.1.10) and the connector (J29) of the HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12) through the hole of the FRAME ESS (PL8.1.7).

18

Remove the six screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA ESS and the PLATE IF (PL8.1.8) to the printer, remove the PWBA ESS from the printer together with the PLATE IF.

4-155

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 19

Remove the one screw (silver, 4mm) that fixes the USB connector of the PWBA ESS to the PLATE IF.

20

Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA ESS to the PLATE IF, remove the PWBA ESS from the PLATE IF.

Note When replacing to new PWBA ESS, attach the NVM ROM of old PWBA ESS to new PWBA ESS.

Note Do not use the NVM ROM removed from new PWBA ESS.

Note Do not press the PWBA ESS when removing the NVM ROM.

Note Take care not to bend the terminal section of the NVM ROM when replacing the NVM ROM.

4-156

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note There are two NVM ROMs on the PWBA ESS, do not attach the NVM ROM to the wrong position.

Note When attaching the NVM ROM, Mate the notch of the NVM ROM with the notch the IC socket.

4-157

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note Insert the tab of the FRAME ESS into the hole of the PLATE IF, when attaching the PWBA ESS and PLATE IF.

4-158

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.4

MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11)

[Removal]

Note Use the wrist strap to protect the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the electrostatic. 1

Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

2

Remove the two SCREW KNURLINGs that fix the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11) to the printer.

4-159

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 3

Disengage the connector (P/J3) of the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).

4

Remove the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the printer.

4-160

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.5

MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12)

[Removal]

Note Use the wrist strap to protect the MEMORY CARD from the electrostatic. 1

Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).

2

Swing the PLATE ESS to upward slightly, to release the upper tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS after releasing the lower tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY ESS (PL8.1.3). Remove the PLATE ESS from the printer.

Note Remove the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD if the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD attached. (REP8.4)

4-161

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 3

Gently open the two hooks on the connector holding the MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12) until the MEMORY CARD pops up slightly.

4

Remove the MEMORY CARD from the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).

4-162

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the MEMORY CARD, Mate the notch of the MEMORY CARD with the boss on the socket.

4-163

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.6

(SCC) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1)

[Removal]

Note Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

4

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

5

Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1).

4-164

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 6

Remove the seven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA LVPS to the printer.

7

Remove the PWBA LVPS from the printer.

4-165

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the PWBA LVPS, mate the two notches of the PWBA LVPS with the tabs of the FRAME ASSY LVPS.

4-166

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.7

HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

4

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

5

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

6

Disengage the connector (P/J44) of the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1).

4-167

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 7

Release the clamps that fix the harness of the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK, remove the harness.

8

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 16mm) that fixes the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK to the printer, remove the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK.

4-168

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.8

SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7)

[Removal] 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

4

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

5

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

6

Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) to the printer, remove the SENSOR HUM.

4-169

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 7

Disengage the connector (P/J201) of the SENSOR HUM.

4-170

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.9

(SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)

12

Disengage the five connectors (P/J20, 23, 24, 26 and 28) on the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13), release the harness from the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).

4-171

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 13

Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY GFI GND (PL8.2.10), release the HARN ASSY GFI GND from the GUIDE HARNESS AC.

14

Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) from the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1).

4-172

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 15

Release the HARN ASSY SW PWR from the GUIDE HARNESS AC, remove the HARN ASSY SW PWR from the printer together with the BRACKET SW (PL8.2.8).

16

Release the hooks of the SWITCH POWER, remove the BRACKET SW from the HARN ASSY SW PWR.

4-173

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note When attaching the BRACKET SW to the HARN ASSY SW PWR, match the ON/OFF mark of the POWER SWITCH with the mark on the BRACKET SW.

4-174

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.10

BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SW (PL8.2.8) to the printer.

4-175

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) Note The MAIN SWITCH and the printer are connected with the harness, so they should not be far apart when carrying out the work described next procedure. 12

Release the BRAKET SW from the hook together with the MAIN SW.

13

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 12mm) that fix the BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11) to the printer.

4-176

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 14

Pull out the BREAKER GFI, disengage the three connectors (P/J482, 483, 484). Remove the BREAKER GFI from the printer.

Note Take care not to engage the connectors to wrong position.

4-177

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.11

(SCC) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)

[Removal]

Note Never fail to perform the diagnostic operation. Otherwise the data will be lost in the worst case.

Note Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1

Perform the diagnostic of NVM Save to evacuate MCU data.

2

Turn off the power to exit.

3

Remove the POWER CORD from outlet.

4

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

5

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 6

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

7

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

8

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 9

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

10

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

11

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

12

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

13

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

14

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

15

Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)

4-178

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 16

Remove the five screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the FRAME ESS (PL8.1.7) to the printer.

17

Swing the FRAME ESS slightly up and back as if it were hinged at the top.

18

Remove the hook of the PWBA ESS from the printer by lifting the FRAME ESS slightly. Remove the FRAME ESS from the printer together with the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).

4-179

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 19

Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13).

20

Remove the six screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA MCU to the printer.

4-180

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 21

Remove the PWBA MCU from the printer.

Note When attaching the PWBA MCU, mate the holes of the PWBA MCU with the tabs of the printer,

Note Execute the diagnostic operation of NVM Load, and write the data into the PWBA MCU.

4-181

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.12

PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16)

[Removal] 1

Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)

2

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 3

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

4

Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)

5

Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 6

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

7

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

8

Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)

9

Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)

10

Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)

11

Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)

12

Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2)

13

Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)

14

Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11)

15

Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)

16

Remove the KIT ROS. (REP4.7)

4-182

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 17

Disengage the connector (P/J144) of the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16).

18

Remove the one screw (silver, 6mm) that fixes the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) to the printer, remove the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO).

4-183

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

REP8.13

ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL8.2.22)

[Removal]

Note Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic. 1

Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).

Note Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light. 2

Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)

Note The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation. 3

Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)

4

Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)

5

Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the PLATE EARTH DRUM (PL8.2.20) and PLATE EARTH FSR (PL8.2.21) to the printer.

Note When carrying out the work described next procedure, do not bend the PLATE EARTH DRUM and the PLATE EARTH FSR.

4-184

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) 6

Move the ARRESTER ENE112D-10A from between the PLATEs and the frame, remove it. ARRESTER ENE112D-10A

Wsb04024FA

4-185

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.3 Adjustments

4.3 Adjustments ADJ4.3.1 Firmware Upgrade the firmware by downloading it from the PC to the Printer. Network (DocuPrint C1110 Only), USB port and parallel port are supported as communication interfaces. In this document, an example using a USB port will be described. When a USB port or parallel port is to be used, check that "Enable bi-directional support" is disabled (not ticked) in the Printer Port Settings on a PC.

ADJ4.3.1.1 ESS F/W Work time: Approximately 5 minutes. 1

When "Ready to Print" is displayed in the Control Panel on a printer, activate FWDLMgr.exe.

4-186

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.3 Adjustments 2

Click on the [Agree] button.

3

Click the [Next] button.

4

Specify [USB Port] and click the [Next] button.

4-187

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.3 Adjustments 5

Click on the [Finish] button.

6

After ESS F/W has been downloaded, the printer is automatically rebooted.

Note Print out the "Printer Settings" and check that the "Firmware Version" has been updated.

4-188

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.3 Adjustments ADJ4.3.1.2 MCU F/W Work time: Approximately 5 minutes.

1

When "Ready to Print" is displayed in the Control Panel on the printer, activate FWDLMgr.exe.

2

Click on the [Agree] button.

4-189

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.3 Adjustments 3

Click the [Next] button.

4

Specify [USB Port] and click the [Next] button.

5

Click on the [Finish] button.

4-190

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.3 Adjustments 6

When "Completed. Reboot printer" is displayed a few minutes later, turn the printer OFF and then ON for rebooting.

Note Print out the "Printer Settings" and check that the "Engine Version" has been updated.

4-191

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments 4.3 Adjustments

ADJ4.3.2 Directions for Replacing Important Information Stored Component [Purpose] To get a full understanding of how to handle Important Information Stored Components. Data that the customer has entered after machine installation is so important that nobody can be forgiven for a loss or leak of the data. Besides, from the perspective of earning the confidence of the customer, it is indispensable for the CE to be able to realize the components that store such data. The CE should also take great care in replacing such components. [Procedure] This product has the components below store important information. Perform the following procedure. IBG: Collect/discard components, following the way specified separately.

Component Name NVRAM on Controller Board

Stored Information Parameters that can be set by users (IP address, etc.) - Job log - Error log (Fault History, Counter)

Work before replacement/abolition - Initial Action Back up data by printing reports and using tools, in order to set the data again. Execute “Installation Clear All NVMs”in Clear All CE Mode.

- DV log/Auditron setting/ Total PV Information/ JBA Information Manipulation Log

Work after replacement - Handling the removed PWB Be sure to initialize the PWB and then take it back to your base. If the PWB cannot be initialized at the customer site, tell the customer the PWB will be initialized at the FX recycling location and that no security problem will occur.

- Final Action Restore the data, using tools. Return settings to their original values, using reports.

- Network Settings Information

4-192

Chapter 5 Parts List

Chapter 5 Parts List

Chapter 5 Parts List CONTENTS 1. Parts List.....................................................................................................................5 - 1 1.1 Caution for use of spare parts illustration ........................................................................................ 5 - 1 1.2 Caution for use of engineering parts list .......................................................................................... 5 - 1 PL1.1 Cover [Illustration]........................................................................................................................ 5 - 3 PL1.1 Cover [List] .................................................................................................................................. 5 - 4 PL2.1 Paper Cassette [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 5 PL2.1 Paper Cassette [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 6 PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [Illustration]................................................................................................... 5 - 7 PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [List].............................................................................................................. 5 - 8 PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [Illustration]................................................................................................... 5 - 9 PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [List]............................................................................................................ 5 - 10 PL4.1 Xerographics [Illustration] .......................................................................................................... 5 - 11 PL4.1 Xerographics [List]..................................................................................................................... 5 - 12 PL5.1 Dispenser [Illustration] ............................................................................................................... 5 - 13 PL5.1 Dispenser [List]........................................................................................................................... 5 - 14 PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [Illustration] .................................................................................................... 5 - 15 PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [List] ............................................................................................................... 5 - 16 PL7.1 Drive [Illustration]....................................................................................................................... 5 - 17 PL7.1 Drive [List].................................................................................................................................. 5 - 18 PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 19 PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 20 PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 21 PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 22 PL9.1 Harness [Illustration].................................................................................................................. 5 - 23 PL9.1 Harness [List]............................................................................................................................. 5 - 24

Chapter 5 Parts List

Chapter 5 Parts List CONTENTS

Chapter 5 Parts List

1. Parts List 1.1 Caution for use of spare parts illustration - Available spare parts are shown in the illustration by name. - [Ref PL X.Y.Z] shown below the part name denotes the item is "Z" in the plate "PL X.Y" of the engineering part list. - For the detailed composition of the KIT parts, check with the engineering part list.

1.2 Caution for use of engineering parts list - The figures indicating the illustrations are the item No. in the list and present correspondence between the illustrations and parts. - The notation of PL "X.Y.Z" is composed of the plate (PL), item "X.Y", and parts "Z". - The alphabet characters in the illustrations represent screws and clips as follows: "S": screw, "E": E-ring, "KL": KL clip, "C": C-ring, and "N": nut - "

" mark in the illustrations are attached to items indicating assembly parts in the illustrations.

- Encircled alphabetical figures in the illustrations indicate interrupted leader lines. Same characters in the illustrations represent lines to be connected. - The mark "(with 2-5)" attached to assembly parts on the illustrations and lists represents that the items "2, 3, 4, and 5" of that plate are contained and the mark "(with 2-5, PL6.1.1) represent that the item "2, 3, 4, and 5" of that plate and the item "1" of the plate "6.1" are contained. - The mark "[Ref PLX.Y.Z]" attached to parts in the illustrations and lists resents that the parts is the same as the parts of the item "Z" of the plate "X.Y". - The mark "∗" attached to parts in the list represents "Note" or "Reference" about that parts is contained in the same page. For the connector (P/J), parts such as harness, wire, etc. in the list, refer to "Chapter 7, Electric wiring"

Safety Critical Component (SCC) Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to Fuji Xerox Co. Ltd-stipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components. Important Information Stored Component (ISC) Important Information Stored Components store customers' important information they have entered after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care never to let customer information leak out.

5–1

Chapter 5 Parts List

5–2

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL1.1 Cover [Illustration] 2 1 3

20

4

19 8

97,98,99

8

10

9 (P220)

11

12 96 13

14 15

5

6 16

7 (with 8-17,19) 14

(J220)

15

95

21 18 18

17 (P/J2200-P2900)

5–3

Wsb05001GA

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL1.1 Cover [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

1 2 3 4 5 6

20 21

848E 20100 050E 24202 848E 20072 848E 20121 848K 10662 848E 20092 848K 11425 848K 11415 848K 13735 003E 73361 -809E 58520 003E 78561 -------962K 60030 806E 20160 848K 09883 848K 09893 848E 20082 --

TRAY EXT (SCC) COVER REAR COVER CST COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR COVER SIDE R COVER ASSY FRONT FX (with 8-17,19) COVER ASSY FRONT IBG H (with 8-17,19) COVER ASSY FRONT IBG L (with 8-17,19) LATCH FRONT PLATE LATCH SPRING LATCH OUT BUTTON LATCH (SCC) COVER FRONT FX (SCC) COVER FRONT IBG H (SCC) COVER FRONT IBG L GUIDE BELT DAMPER FRONT L DAMPER FRONT S COVER HARNESS HARNESS ASSY A-OP (J220-P/J2200-P2900) SHAFT PIVOT CONSOLE ASSY PANEL FX CONSOLE ASSY PANEL IBG (SCC) COVER SIDE L BADGE X

32B1 32B2 32B3 32B4 32B5 32B6 32B7 32B7 32B7 32B8 32B9 32BB 32BC 32BD 32BE 32BF 32BG 32BH 32BJ 32BK 71B1 32BL 7510 7510 32BM 32BN

95 96 97 98 99

675K 63130 675K 63140 675K 63110 675K 63120 675K 63100

KIT CVR HARNESS (with 14-16) KIT GUIDE BELT (with 13-15) KIT COVER FRONT (IBG) H (with 12,21) KIT COVER FRONT (IBG) L (with 12,21) KIT COVER FRONT (FX) (with 12,21)

32BP 32BQ 32BR 32BS 32BT

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

DESCRIPTION (SCC) COVER TOP

5–4

A.C

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL2.1 Paper Cassette [Illustration] 1 (with 2-25)

2 22

20 3

21 4

5

6

7 8

9 11 10

7

23 12 17

14 13

16

15 16 24

25 18

19

Wsb05002GA

5–5

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL2.1 Paper Cassette [List] ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Deleted 99

PARTS No.

DESCRIPTION

A.C

050K 61260 050K 61430 015K 75520 809E 72190 809E 72200 019K 09470 038E 36920 007E 75020 038K 18430 848E 19100 038E 36940 807E 22360 807E 22370 038E 36950 003E 73390 003E 73930 809E 82580 050K 61170 -003E 76710 032E 26410 032E 26420 019K 09240 038K 18440 003E 76750 809E 72211 896E 53160 896E 57850

PLATE ASSY BOTTOM SPRING N/F L SPRING N/F R HOLDER ASSY RETARD GUIDE SIDE L GEAR PINION GUIDE SIDE ASSY R COVER SSI GUIDE SIDE SSI L RACK GUIDE SIDE SSI L RACK GUIDE SIDE SSI R GUIDE SIDE SSI R LATCH BOTTOM L LATCH BOTTOM R SPRING LATCH B TRAY ASSY EXTENSION HOUSING CST 250 HANDLE CST GUIDE BOTTOM L GUIDE BOTTOM R PAD ASSY BOTTOM GUIDE ASSY END LATCH HSG END SPRING LATCH LABEL INSTRUCTION FX LABEL INSTRUCTION IBG

5012 5012 50B1 50B2 50B3 5233 50B4 50B5 50B6 51B1 51B2 51B3 51B4 51B5 50B7 50B8 50B9 50BB 50BC 50BD 50BE 50BF 50BG 50BH 50BJ 50BK 50BL 50BL

675K 62840

KIT GUIDE SIDE (with 6-8)

50BM

CASSETTE ASSY 250 FX(with 2-19) CASSETTE ASSY 250 IBG(with 2-19)

5–6

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [Illustration]

Deleted 99 (with 1,2) (J262)

1

2

99 (with 9-14

98 (with 9-14) (J23)

14 (with 15,16) 13

15

16

(J28)

18

17 (J281)

(P231)

12 11 (J234)

10 (J231)

7

(J232) (J233)

9

4

5 8 [Ref PL3.2.1]

19 5 3 (with 4,5,7-13,16-21,PL3.2.1,PL8.2.7,PL9.1.6)

20 21 Wsb05003GA

5–7

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

1 2

121K 42520 013E 30830

3

059K 56391

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

---003E 73341 -----------

18

962K 57541

19 20 21

----

99

675K 54150

DESCRIPTION

A.C

(SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV BEARING REGI (SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (with 4,5,7-13,16-21,PL3.2.1,PL8.2.7,PL9.1.6) CHASSIS FDR R FOOT -STOPPER CST CHASSIS FDR L SOLENOID FEED MSI SPRING LEVER LEVER FEED SPRING FEED IN SPRING FEED OUT GEAR ASSY FEED (with 15,16) GEAR FEED OUT GEAR FEED IN BEARING (SCC) HARN ASSY L SIDE (J23,J28-P231,J232,J233,J234,J281) PLATE EARTH FDR ARRESTER ENE112D-10A PALTE EARTH CST

50CK 50CL 50CM

KIT SOLENOID FEED (with 9-14)

5092

5–8

50C1 50C2 50C3 50C4 50C5 50C6 50C7 50C8 50C9 50CB 50CC 50CD 50CE 50CF 50CG 50CH 50CJ 71C1

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [Illustration] 1 (with 2-16,20-33) 3

4 2 3 5

6 8 7

9

10

33 11

16

(P232)

31

17

18

13

REGI SENSOR

29

32 (with 17-19)

12

14 15

13 (P234)

30

19

CST NO PAPER SENSOR

20

21

22

26 28 24

(P233)

13 SSI NO PAPER SENSOR

23 25

27 Wsb05004KA

5–9

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

--059E 03110 059K 50731 -120E 27831 809E 71020 120E 27931 059K 47041 -120E 27820 809E 70960 930W 00113 120E 27850 809E 71030 809E 70981 -----------674E 00991 ---120K 92294 --

DESCRIPTION CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI (with 2-16,20-33)

SHAF ASSY FEED ROLL CORE MSI ROLL ASSY FEED BEARING EARTH ACTUATOR REGI OUT SPRING REGI OUT ACTUATOR REGI ROLL ROLL ASSY REGI ROLL REGI METAL ACTUATOR REGI IN SPRING ACT REGI SENSOR PHOTO ACTUATOR SSI SPRING ACT SSI SPRING STP STOPPER ACT SPRING ACT NP ACTUATOR NO PAPER BEARING M EARTH BEARING EARTH REGI GEAR REGI R GEAR REGI M SPRING REGI R M PLATE EARTH REGI CHUTE UP CHUTE LOW BRACKET SNS SPRING REGI L M BEARING M BEARING R ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (with 17-19) PLATE WEIGHT

5 – 10

A.C 50D1 50D2 50D3 5033 50D4 50D5 50D6 50D7 50D8 50D9 50DB 50DC 50DD 50DE 50DF 50DG 50DH 50DJ 50DK 50DL 50DM 50DN 50DP 50DQ 50DR 50DS 50DT 50DV 50DW 50DX 50DY 50E1 50E2

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL4.1 Xerographics [Illustration] 99 (with 1,2x2pcs) 2 22

(J41) (J40) (J411)

23

2

(J412)

1

98 (with 4,5,6x2pcs) 6 3

4

97 (with 4,5,7x2pcs)

5

7

6

(P141)

4

9 9

8

9 9

5 10

11

15

12

16

13

17

7

18

21

(P161)

14 19

20

Wsb05005GA

5 – 11

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL4.1 Xerographics [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

DESCRIPTION

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

--019E 66470 ----122K 94041 ----------105K 22661 --962K 52060 962K 52070

SPRING ROS HOLDER CRUM SPRING PHD LEVER PHD BLOCK STOPPER PHD D BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD LED ASSY ERASE SPRING TRACKING SPRING CF SPRING TR4 SPRING TR3 SPRING TR2 SPRING TR1 SPRING D4 SPRING D3 SPRING D2 SPRING D1 (SCC) PWBA HVPS FRAME HVPS PHD ASSY (SCC) HARN ASSY ROS RE (J40-J411) HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO (J41-J412)

1310 13B1 4533 31B1 31B2 31B3 31B4 4421 71D1 71D2 71D3 71D4 71D5 71D6 71D7 71D8 71D9 71DB 7320 31B5 4510 13B2 13B3

97 98 99

675K 54241 675K 54251 604K 43050

KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (with 4,5,7x2pcs) KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (with 4,5,6x2pcs) KIT ROS (with 1,2x2pcs)

31B6 31B7 1310

(SCC) ROS ASSY

5 – 12

A.C

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL5.1 Dispenser [Illustration] 1 (with 2,9-11,14-16,25-27) 2 (with 3-8)

3 (J192)

5

4

6 6

(P192)

3 (J191)

6

(P191)

6

3 (J182)

27

(P182)

3

25 (J181)

(J19) (J18)

7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8

26

(P181)

30 10

(J291)

9 11 (with 12,13)

(P291)

12

10 10

28 (J29)

(P5041) (J504)

10

13 14 13 (P314) 14 13 (J313) 13 (P313) 14 13 (J312) 13 (P312) 14 13 (J311) 13 (P311)

(J314)

(J31)

15 15

16

17

15

16

18

15

16

19

16

21

20

29

22 23 24

96 (with 17,29) 97 (with 18,29) 98 (with 19,29) 99 (with 20,29) Wsb05006GA

5 – 13

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL5.1 Dispenser [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

094K 92290 801K 28430 127K 51010 -----110E 10200 848K 02570 ---113E 45540 -----------

25

962K 52050

26 27 28 29 30 96 97 98 99

DESCRIPTION DISPENSER ASSY (with 2,9-11,14-16,25-27)

A.C 4020 4030 4031 40B1 40B2 40B3 40B4 40B5 71E1 40B6 40B7 40B8 40B9 71E2 40BB 40BC 401K 401C 401M 401Y 409K 409C 409M 409Y

962K 51990 962K 52150 962K 57560 -809E 71190

FRAME ASSY MOT (with 3-8) (SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP CONDUCTOR MOTOR FRAME MOTOR GEAR IDLER GEAR IDLER AUG GEAR IDLER AGI SWITCH HOUSING ASSY AUGER FRAME ASSY DISP (with 12,13) FRAME DISP SEAL DISP AUG CONNECTOR CRUM SPRING DISP JOINT ASSY DISP HOLDER TCRU K HOLDER TCRU C HOLDER TCRU M HOLDER TCRU Y TONER CARTRIDGE (K) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (SCC) HARN ASSY TNR MOT (J18,J19-J181,J182,J191,J192) HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (J31-J311,J312,J313,J314) HARN ASSY SIDE SW (J29-J291) HARN ASSY TEST RL (J504-P5041) LABEL HOLDER SPRING-SHUTTER

71E4 71E5 71E6 40BD 40BE

604K 46340 604K 46350 604K 46360 604K 46370

KIT HOLDER TCRU K (with 17,29) KIT HOLDER TCRU C (with 18,29) KIT HOLDER TCRU M (with 19,29) KIT HOLDER TCRU Y (with 20,29)

401K 401C 401M 401Y

5 – 14

71E3

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [Illustration] 1 2 (P171)

(J171) (J17) (J47)

99 (with 3-6) 3

4

5

6 (P281)

8

7 Wsb05007GA

5 – 15

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [List] ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PARTS No. 126K 25041 --962K 52020 962K 57490 003E 73241 -807E 15192 006K 25551 848K 03270 848E 09620

DESCRIPTION FUSER ASSY (FX) FUSER ASSY 115V (IBG) FUSER ASSY 220V (IBG)

HARN ASSY FUSER 100V (J17,J47-P171) HARN ASSY FUSER 200V (J17,J47-P171) STOPPER PIVOT PIVOT TRANS L GEAR T4 SHAFT ASSY PIVOT TRANSFER ASSY COVER HARNESS 2

5 – 16

A.C 43AA 43AA 43AA 71F1 71F1 50F1 50F2 50F3 50F4 50F5 50F6

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL7.1 Drive [Illustration]

1

2 (P221)

5 6 (P211)

8 10 (P261) COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

7 (J24)

9

4 Wsb05008KA

5 – 17

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL7.1 Drive [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

1 2 3 4 5 6

007K 94691 007K 94685 807E 15100 007K 94705 --930W 00113 130E 87090 809E 70900 809E 78840 013E 30830

7 8 9 10

DESCRIPTION (SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (with6) (SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (with5) GEAR P2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (with7-9) (SCC) MOTOR ASSY MAIN (SCC) MOTOR ASSY SUB

SENSOR PHOTO SENSOR PHOTO (ALTERNATE PARTS) SPRING D3 SPRING C BEARING REGI

5 – 18

A.C 4523 4521 50G1 5093 4521 4523 50G2 50G3 50G4 50G5 50G6

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [Illustration] 2

(J503)

1

3

4

6 8 5

10 10

7 5 5

11

9 (with 10) (P101)

(P111)

12 (P401)

(P3)

(P29) Wsb05009GA

5 – 19

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

127E 85360 054E 31592 ------960K 37040 960K 36925 960K 36943 -960K 36690 133K 25240 133K 25250

9 10 11 12

DESCRIPTION (SCC) FAN MAIN DUCT FAN SHIELD ASSY ESS PLATE ESS SCREW KNURLING WASHER FRAME ESS PLATE IF (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS FX (with 10) (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS IBG H (with 10) (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS IBG L (with 10) NVM ROM MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (IBG-H OPTION) MEMORY CARD 256MB (IBG-H OPTION) MEMORY CARD 512MB (IBG-H OPTION)

5 – 20

A.C 3301 31C1 31C2 31C3 31C4 31C5 31C6 31C7 7630 7630 7630 76B1 72B1 72B2 72B3

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [Illustration]

(P501) (P502)

(P504) (P47)

(P503)

(P44)

1 (P40) (P48)

2

5

3

(J44)

20 (P40)

21 (P41)

(P15) (P14) (P17) (P101) (P31) (P19) (P18) (P29)

(P10)

(P16) (P20)

6

22

(P11) (P42) (P22) (P21) (P24) (P26) (P23) (P28)

15 (P144)

16

(J48) (T484)

(P201)

7

14 17

(J482) (J483)

9

8

19 18

(J484)

10

11

13 12

Wsb05010GA

5 – 21

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [List] ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

PARTS No. 105K 22382 105K 22721 ---962K 52120 -130E 93460 -962K 62110 962K 62120 962K 52160 962K 59630 908W 01201 117K 34750 117E 26280 917W 03106 917W 03110 917W 03111 917W 03109 917W 03108 917W 03107 960K 37262 --960K 32640 -----108E 98760

DESCRIPTION (SCC) PWBA LVPS 100V (SCC) PWBA LVPS 220V

GUIDE HARNESS FSR FRAME ASSY LVPS -HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (SW-J44) GUIDE HARNESS AC SENSOR HUM BRACKET SW (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR 100V (SW-J48,J482,J483) (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR 200V (SW-J48,J482,J483) (SCC) HARN ASSY GFI GND 100V (J484-T484) (SCC) HARN ASSY GFI GND 200V (J484-T484) BREAKER GFI POWER CORD -JPN POWER CORD-AP-TW POWER CORD-FXA/FANZ POWER CORD-FXCL POWER CORD-FXK POWER CORD-FXP POWER CORD-AG/THFX/ICO POWER CORD-FXS/FXM/FXHK (SCC) PWBA MCU EDGING SADDLE

BRACKET MCU R PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) CLAMP BRACKET MCU L GUIDE HARNESS MCU PLATE EARTH DRUM PLATE EARTH FSR ARRESTER ENE112D-10A

5 – 22

A.C 7310 7310 31D1 31D2 32C1 31D3 72C1 31D4 7121 7121 71G1 71G1 71G2 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7122 7210 31D5 31D6 71G3 31D7 31D8 31D9 31DB 31DC 71G4

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL9.1 Harness [Illustration] (J10)

(J21)

1

7

(J11)

(J22)

(J101)

(J211)

2

8

(J221)

(J14)

(J111)

(J26)

9

3

(J261)

(J501)

(J40) (J15)

(P262)

(J141)

10 4 (J42)

(J401) (J502)

11

(J16)

5 (P422)

(J161) (J20)

(J29) (J144)

6

(J201)

12

(J2900)

Wsb05011GA

5 – 23

Chapter 5 Parts List

PL9.1 Harness [List] ITEM

PARTS No.

1 2 3 4 5 6

962K 52080 962K 52090 962K 52110 962K 52100 962K 51950 962K 51960 962K 52030 962K 61720 962K 52040 962K 51980 962K 52130 962K 52000 962K 52190

7 8 9 10 11 12

DESCRIPTION HARN ASSY ESS (J10-J101) HARN ASSY ESS VIDEO (J11-J111) (SCC) HARN ASSY LVPS (J14-J141,J501) (SCC) HARN ASSY 24V (J15-J502) (SCC) HARN ASSY HVPS (J16-J161) HARN ASSY HUM (J20-J201) (SCC) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT FX (J21-J211) (SCC) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT IBG (J21-J211) (SCC) HARN ASSY SUB MOT (J22-J221) (SCC) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (J26-J261,P262) HARN ASSY ESS POWER (J40-J401) HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (J42-J144,P422) HARNESS ASSY B (J29-J2900)

5 – 24

A.C 71H1 71H2 71H3 71H4 71H5 71H6 71H7 71H8 71H9 71HB 71HC 71HD 71HE

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General CONTENTS 6.1 Configuration of Printer.............................................................................................6 - 1 6.1.1 Product Name ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 1 6.1.2 Basic Configuration....................................................................................................................... 6 - 1 6.1.3 Functional Configuration ............................................................................................................... 6 - 1

6.2 Electrical Properties..................................................................................................6 - 2 6.2.1 Power Source ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 2 6.2.2 Power Consumption...................................................................................................................... 6 - 2 6.2.3 Rush Current................................................................................................................................. 6 - 2

6.3 Mechanical Properties ..............................................................................................6 - 3 6.3.1 Dimensions/Mass of Printer .......................................................................................................... 6 - 3 6.3.2 Dimensions/Mass of Consumables and CRUs ............................................................................. 6 - 3 6.3.2.1 PHD Unit .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 3 6.3.2.2 FUSER CRU ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 3 6.3.2.3 Black toner cartridge ............................................................................................................ 6 - 4 6.3.2.4 Cyan toner cartridge ............................................................................................................ 6 - 4 6.3.2.5 Magenta toner cartridge ....................................................................................................... 6 - 4 6.3.2.6 Yellow toner cartridge .......................................................................................................... 6 - 4 6.3.3 Installation Space (min. installation space)................................................................................... 6 - 5

6.4 Functions ..................................................................................................................6 - 6 6.4.1 Recording System......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.2 Exposure System.......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.3 Development System.................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.4 Fixing System ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.5 Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6 6.4.6 Operation Mode ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 6 6.4.7 Warm-up Time .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 7 6.4.8 FPOT (First Print Output Time)*1 ................................................................................................. 6 - 7 6.4.9 Continuous Printing Speed ........................................................................................................... 6 - 7 6.4.10 Input Properties........................................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.10.1 Paper pick-up system ......................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.10.2 Paper pick-up capacity........................................................................................................ 6 - 8 6.4.11 Output Properties........................................................................................................................ 6 - 8 6.4.11.1 Paper delivery system......................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.11.2 Paper delivery capacity....................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.11.3 Delivery paper size/mass.................................................................................................... 6 - 8 6.4.11.4 Full stack detection ............................................................................................................. 6 - 8 6.4.12 Manual Duplex ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 8 6.4.13 Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 6 - 9 6.4.13.1 Paper type .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 9 6.4.13.2 Paper size ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 9

6.5 Consumables..........................................................................................................6 - 11 6.5.1 Items of Consumables ................................................................................................................ 6 - 11 6.5.2 Consumable Life ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 11 6.5.3 Periodic Replacing Parts (Reference)......................................................................................... 6 - 11

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General CONTENTS 6.6 Operating Environment...........................................................................................6 - 13 6.6.1 Installation Temperature / Humidity ............................................................................................ 6 - 13 6.6.2 Installation Altitude...................................................................................................................... 6 - 13 6.6.3 Installation Horizontality .............................................................................................................. 6 - 13 6.6.4 Ambient Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 13 6.6.5 Storage Temperature of a Toner Cartridge................................................................................. 6 - 13

6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions ............................................................................6 - 14 6.7.1 Safety Standard .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 14 6.7.2 Laser Safety Standard ................................................................................................................ 6 - 14 6.7.3 EMI.............................................................................................................................................. 6 - 14 6.7.4 Noise........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 14

6.8 Print image Quality .................................................................................................6 - 15 6.8.1 Image Quality Guarantee Conditions.......................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.1 Environmental conditions.................................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.2 Guaranteed paper............................................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.3 Paper condition ................................................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.4 Printer condition .................................................................................................................. 6 - 15 6.8.1.5 Image quality guaranteed area .......................................................................................... 6 - 15 6.8.1.6 Criterion .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 15

6.9 Option .....................................................................................................................6 - 16 6.9.1 Option to be Installed by Users................................................................................................... 6 - 16

6.10 ESS Specification .................................................................................................6 - 17 6.10.1 External Interface...................................................................................................................... 6 - 17 6.10.1.1 USB .................................................................................................................................. 6 - 17 6.10.1.2 Ethernet ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 17 6.10.2 Network Protocol....................................................................................................................... 6 - 18 6.10.2.1 Printing Protocol................................................................................................................ 6 - 18 6.10.2.2 Other Protocols ................................................................................................................. 6 - 19 6.10.3 Decomposer.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 20 6.10.3.1 PDL ................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20 6.10.3.2 Font................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20 6.10.3.3 Image Area ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 20 6.10.3.4 PostScript 3 Fonts............................................................................................................. 6 - 20 6.10.4 Job Control................................................................................................................................ 6 - 21 6.10.4.1 Cancel Print ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.2 Job Recovery .................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.3 Job Time Out .................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.4 Printer Auditron (DPC1110 only) ...................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.5 RAM DISK......................................................................................................................... 6 - 21 6.10.4.6 IP Filter.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 21 6.10.5 Logging ..................................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.5.1 Job Logging ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.5.2 Error Logging .................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.5.3 Billing Count...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22 6.10.6 Non-Genuine Mode................................................................................................................... 6 - 22

Chapter 6 General

Chapter 6 General CONTENTS 6.10.7 Utility Print................................................................................................................................. 6 - 23 6.10.7.1 Printer Settings List........................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.2 Font List Print.................................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.3 Job Log Print..................................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.4 PCL Macro List Print ......................................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.5 Print Meter Print ................................................................................................................ 6 - 23 6.10.7.6 Stored Document List Print ............................................................................................... 6 - 23 6.10.7.7 Error Log Print................................................................................................................... 6 - 24 6.10.7.8 Supported Language ........................................................................................................ 6 - 24 6.10.7.9 Demonstration Print .......................................................................................................... 6 - 24 6.10.7.10 PCL Macro List Print ....................................................................................................... 6 - 24 6.10.7.11 Print Meter Print .............................................................................................................. 6 - 24 6.10.8 Software Specifications............................................................................................................. 6 - 25 6.10.8.1 Firmware Update Tool ...................................................................................................... 6 - 25 6.10.8.2 Linux Driver (FX-PDF Driver)............................................................................................ 6 - 25 6.10.8.3 Mac Driver (FX-PDF Driver).............................................................................................. 6 - 25 6.10.8.4 Utility Software .................................................................................................................. 6 - 26 6.10.8.5 3rd Party Software Support............................................................................................... 6 - 26 6.10.8.6 Linkage with FX Brand Software....................................................................................... 6 - 26 6.10.8.7 Linkage with Other Brand Software .................................................................................. 6 - 27

6.11 Tools and Service Consumables..........................................................................6 - 29 6.11.1 Tools ......................................................................................................................................... 6 - 29 6.11.2 Service Consumable................................................................................................................. 6 - 29

6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110 ..............................................................6 - 30 6.12.1 Check the Contents .................................................................................................................. 6 - 30 6.12.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes..................................................................................................... 6 - 31 6.12.3 Set the Toner Cartridges........................................................................................................... 6 - 31 6.12.4 Set the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................. 6 - 32 6.12.5 Connect the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 6 - 34 6.12.6 Switch On the Power ................................................................................................................ 6 - 35 6.12.7 Connect the Network Cable ...................................................................................................... 6 - 36 6.12.8 Set the IP Address .................................................................................................................... 6 - 36 6.12.9 Install the Print Driver................................................................................................................ 6 - 39 6.12.10 Connect the USB Cable.......................................................................................................... 6 - 40 6.12.11 Load the Paper ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 40 6.12.12 View the User Guide (PDF) .................................................................................................... 6 - 42

6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B ............................................................6 - 43 6.13.1 Check the Contents .................................................................................................................. 6 - 43 6.13.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes..................................................................................................... 6 - 44 6.13.3 Set the Toner Cartridges........................................................................................................... 6 - 44 6.13.4 Set the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................. 6 - 45 6.13.5 Install the Print Driver................................................................................................................ 6 - 48 6.13.6 Connect the USB Cable............................................................................................................ 6 - 49 6.13.7 Connect the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 6 - 49 6.13.8 Switch On the Power ................................................................................................................ 6 - 49

Chapter 6 General 6.13.9 Load the Paper ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 50 6.13.10 View the User Guide (PDF) .................................................................................................... 6 - 52

6.14 Printer Environment Settings................................................................................6 - 53 6.14.1 Supported Operating Environments.......................................................................................... 6 - 53 6.14.2 Setting the Network Environment (DocuPrint C1110 only) ....................................................... 6 - 55 6.14.3 Installing a Printer Driver........................................................................................................... 6 - 63

6.15 Control Panel Manu Tree ....................................................................................6 - 64

Chapter 6 General

6.1 Configuration of Printer 6.1.1 Product Name Product Name

Destination

XJ Code

Product Code

Serial No.

DocuPrint C1110

Taiwan

XJ-TNJ

TL300451

100001~199999

AP/Korea

XJ-TNK

TL300452

200001~299999

China

XJ-TNL

TL300453

300001~399999

Taiwan

XJ-TNM

TL300454

500001~599999

AP/Korea

XJ-TNN

TL300455

600001~699999

China

XJ-TNP

TL300456

700001~799999

DocuPrint C1110B

6.1.2 Basic Configuration The printer has the following basic configurations depending on the destination. • print engine main unit (SSI and 250 feeder unit as the standard paper feeding) • consumables (CRU)

Wsb08001GA

6.1.3 Functional Configuration Functional configuration of this printer is shown below.

Wsb08002GA

6–1

Chapter 6 General

6.2 Electrical Properties 6.2.1 Power Source Two types of power source as follows are available for this printer, which are selected according to the specifications. - 100V/120V printer:............. voltage: 100-127VAC ±10% (90 - 140V), frequency: 50/60Hz ± 3Hz current: 11A or less phase: Single-phase two-wire system - 220/240V printer: ............... voltage: 220-240VAC ±10% (198 - 264V), frequency: 50/60Hz ± 3Hz current: 5A or less (230V printer) phase: Single-phase two-wire system

6.2.2 Power Consumption Power consumption in each operation mode at rated voltage input Operation mode

Power Consumption

Running mode (F/C)

420W or less

Running mode (B/W)

420W or less

Standby mode

95W or less

Sleep mode

110V: 7W or less 220V: 9W or less

Low Power mode*

18W or less

* The power consumption meets International Energy Star Program.

6.2.3 Rush Current When the power switch is turned on, the inrush current shall be maximum 50A (Cold start) / 135A (Hot start) at first 2.5ms, and 80A (120V/220V/240V) / 85A (100V) within 10ms.

6–2

Chapter 6 General

6.3 Mechanical Properties 6.3.1 Dimensions/Mass of Printer Width(mm)

Depth(mm)

Height(mm)

Mass(kg)

400

370

380

18 (with CRU)

* Depth of M/C is without paper tray.

Wsb08003GA

6.3.2 Dimensions/Mass of Consumables and CRUs 6.3.2.1 PHD Unit Width: 332mm Depth: 138mm Height: 196mm Mass: 3.4kg Reference: The PHD Unit has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08006KA

6.3.2.2 FUSER CRU Width: 393mm Depth: 121mm Height: 130mm Mass: 1.5kg

Wsb08004KA

6–3

Chapter 6 General 6.3.2.3 Black toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Black toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

6.3.2.4 Cyan toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Cyan toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

6.3.2.5 Magenta toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Magenta toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

6.3.2.6 Yellow toner cartridge Width: 185.8mm Depth: 63mm Height: 40.5mm Mass: 0.1kg Reference:The Yellow toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

Wsb08005KA

6–4

Chapter 6 General

6.3.3 Installation Space (min. installation space) Minimum space as shown below is required to install the printer when it is used for normal objects. (Space occupied by the operator is not included.) Top view 100mm

100mm

250mm

600mm

Wsb08007GA

Front view

100mm

400mm

250mm Wsb08008GA

Side view Front Cover

600mm

100mm Wsb08009GA

6–5

Chapter 6 General

6.4 Functions 6.4.1 Recording System Tandem electro-photographic system employing OPC drum and direct transfer by the transport belt

6.4.2 Exposure System Four laser beams semiconductor laser beam scanning system

6.4.3 Development System Double components trickle development

6.4.4 Fixing System Free belt NIP Quick thermal fusing system

6.4.5 Resolution 600 dots/25.4mm (fixed)

6.4.6 Operation Mode The printer can be operated in either of 4 operation modes. The modes are switched over by command from the printer controller or change of printer operation, etc. Proceeding from power ON, low power mode or sleep mode to standby mode will take place after going through a warm up stage. - Running mode State in running or recording operation. Fixing system: Held at operating temperature. Exposure system: Operating status Recording system: Operating status - Standby mode Ready state Fixing system: Held at ready temperature. Exposure system: Stop status Recording system: Stop status - Low Power mode Complete resting state. Compatible to E-Star and BAM requirement. Fixing system: Stop status Exposure system: Stop status Recording system: Stop status -Sleep mode Resting state from the sleep state. Fixing system: Stop status Exposure system: Stop status Recording system: Stop status

6–6

Chapter 6 General

6.4.7 Warm-up Time When nominal voltage (100V, 115V, 220V) is applied, the printer will proceed to standby mode from POWER-ON within 16 seconds. Reference: Measured at 22°C, 55% RH, nominal voltage, plain paper mode.

6.4.8 FPOT (First Print Output Time)*1 21.5 sec*2 (when loading A4 SEF in the tray 1) *1 The time from when the printer receives a print job until the first page is delivered in the output tray. *2 The values are measured based on the test pattern of Fuji Xerox.

6.4.9 Continuous Printing Speed The continuous printing speed is shown in the below. OS XP OS X

PDL

Test Chart

Paper Size

Paper Type

Paper Tray

Color

Average Print Speed

PCL6

J11E

A4 SEF

Plain

PCL6

J11E

A4 SEF

Plain

Tray

BW

61.5s, or less

PS

J11E

A4 SEF

Plain

Tray

Color

645s (Buckeye) x 12/20, or less

PS

J11E

A4 SEF

Plain

Tray

BW

390s (Buckeye) x 16/25, or less

NOTE

Tray

Color/ BW

78.0s, or less

Measurement is conducted five times. Print speed is caluculated as average of the three values after the maximum and minimum values are excluded.

Color: 12 sheets/min* BW: 16 sheets/min* *When continuously printing a single document of A4 size loaded in SEF.

6–7

Chapter 6 General

6.4.10 Input Properties 6.4.10.1 Paper pick-up system - Paper pick-up with paper tray Feeding method of this printer is ARRF method. 6.4.10.2 Paper pick-up capacity - Paper pick-up with paper tray • 250 sheet Paper Tray

: 250 sheets or below 27.6mm of standard paper

- SSI paper pick-up 1 sheet

6.4.11 Output Properties 6.4.11.1 Paper delivery system Paper can be delivered by the following method. - FACE DOWN delivery 6.4.11.2 Paper delivery capacity - FACE DOWN delivery 250 sheets (Letter/A4 standard paper) 6.4.11.3 Delivery paper size/mass - FACE DOWN delivery All paper sizes applicable to this printer 6.4.11.4 Full stack detection non

6.4.12 Manual Duplex The printer supports manual duplex function. The user operation is as follows. - The user chooses manual duplex function on the printer driver and starts printing. - After job submission, the help window instructs duplex operation comes up on the PC screen. - When side-1 printing is completed, Continue lamp on the operation panel starts blinking. - The user picks up side-1-printed paper on the output tray and set them back to the input tray. - The user presses Continue button on the operation panel. - The printer starts printing side-2.

NOTE

This function is available only for PCL6. Mixed paper size job can not be duplex.

6–8

Chapter 6 General

6.4.13 Paper 6.4.13.1 Paper type - Standard: Manual feeder: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Labels, Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2), Coated 3 (164 - 216 g/m2), Envelope, Recycled Tray 1: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Labels, Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2), Coated 3 (164 - 216 g/m2), Envelope, Recycled - Manual 2-sided printing: Manual feeder: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2), Recycled Tray 1: Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Recycled Important * Use only the recommended paper. Using paper other than that recommended for the printer can cause printing problems. Do not use ink jet paper or postcards made out of recycled paper. Printing on used paper or on its reverse side may impair print quality. * For information about the recommended paper, contact our Customer Support Center or your dealers. 6.4.13.2 Paper size - Manual feeder: A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5", COM-10 (4.1 x 9.5"), Monarch (3.9 x 7.5"), DL (110 x 220 mm), C5 (162 x 229 mm), custom size paper (width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm; length: 127 - 355.6 mm) - Tray 1: A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5", COM-10 (4.1 x 9.5"), Monarch (3.9 x 7.5"), DL (110 x 220 mm), C5 (162 x 229 mm), custom size paper (width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm; length: 127 - 355.6 mm) - Manual 2-sided printing: A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5",

6–9

Chapter 6 General custom size paper (width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm; length: 127 - 355.6 mm) - Image loss: 4 mm from the top, bottom, left, and right edges

6 – 10

Chapter 6 General

6.5 Consumables Consumables are usually replaced by costumers. In the event of recovery of failure attributable to consumables or isolation of failure, you may replace them.

6.5.1 Items of Consumables - Black toner cartridge Cartridge to supply black toner to the development unit. Black toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information. - Yellow toner cartridge Cartridge to supply yellow toner to the development unit. Yellow toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information. - Magenta toner cartridge Cartridge to supply magenta toner to the development unit. Magenta toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information. - Cyan toner cartridge Cartridge to supply cyan toner to the development unit. Cyan toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.

6.5.2 Consumable Life - Black toner cartridge:

2kPV

- Yellow toner cartridge:

2kPV

- Magenta toner cartridge:

2kPV

- Cyan toner cartridge:

2kPV

6.5.3 Periodic Replacing Parts (Reference) - PHD (Drum Cartridge)

20kPV

- FUSER Unit

50kPV

- Feed Roller Unit

50kPV

6 – 11

Chapter 6 General

PL6.1.1 FUSER ASSY

PL4.1.21 PHD ASSY

PL5.1.21 TONER CARTRIDGE (K) PL2.1.5 SEPARATOR ROLLER ASSY PL5.1.22 TONER CARTRIDGE (C)

PL5.1.23 TONER CARTRIDGE (M)

PL5.1.24 TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) Wsb08010GA

6 – 12

Chapter 6 General

6.6 Operating Environment 6.6.1 Installation Temperature / Humidity Installation temperature and humidity on the condition without condensation is as follows. At operating: 5-32 °C, 15-85%RH (No condensation) At standby: minus 20-40 °C, 5-85%RH (No condensation)

6.6.2 Installation Altitude 0 to 3,500m

6.6.3 Installation Horizontality Longitudinal levelness of table surface on which the printer is installed:1 degree or under Lateral levelness of table surface on which the printer is installed

:1 degree or under

6.6.4 Ambient Lighting 3,000 Lux or less (without no direct sun beams)

6.6.5 Storage Temperature of a Toner Cartridge The guaranteed period of the print cartridge before unpacked is as follows: Normal conditions: 24 months under 0 to 35°C, 15 to 80% RH. Harsh conditions: Up to one month under -20 to 0°C and 35 to 40°C, 5 to 15% RH and 80 to 95% RH. The storage altitude shall be 0 to 3,500m. Can be extended to 0 to 15,000m when shipped by air. (Provided that the cargo bay is pressurized to 70.9275Kpa or higher.)

6 – 13

Chapter 6 General

6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions 6.7.1 Safety Standard - 110V system UL60950 3rd Edition CSA C22.2 No.60950-00 - 200V system IEC60950 3rd Edition / EN60950 2000

6.7.2 Laser Safety Standard - 110V system FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040 - 200V system IEC60825-1 Amendment 1 + Amendment 2 / EN60825-1 Amendment 1 + Amendment 2 Class 1 Laser Product, CE Directive, Nordic Agency Approvals

6.7.3 EMI - 110V system (US) FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B - 200V system (EC) EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22), Class B

6.7.4 Noise Noise of priting is as follows. Noise

Sound power level (B)

Sound pressure (dBA)

During printing

6.3

55

During stand-by

4.0

26

Printer

*Measured according to ISO7779 and declared according to ISO9296. Unit B: acoustic power level (LwAd) Unit (dBA): radiated sound pressure (by stander point ) (LpAm)

6 – 14

Chapter 6 General

6.8 Print image Quality 6.8.1 Image Quality Guarantee Conditions The image quality is specified and guaranteed under the following conditions. 6.8.1.1 Environmental conditions Environment condition for evaluating image quality Temperature: 10-32 °C Humidity: 15-85%RH 6.8.1.2 Guaranteed paper The print image quality specified here is guaranteed with standard paper fed from the paper tray. Evaluation is performed with the maximum size of each standard paper. - Black and White printing: FX paper A4 - Color printing: FX C2 paper A4 6.8.1.3 Paper condition The paper used is fresh paper immediately after unpacked, which has been left in the operating environment for 12 hours before unpacking. 6.8.1.4 Printer condition The print image quality specified in this section is guaranteed with the printer in normal condition. 6.8.1.5 Image quality guaranteed area The print image quality specified in this section is guaranteed in the guaranteed image quality area specified in this manual. (Refer to Chapter 3) 6.8.1.6 Criterion The print image quality is guaranteed with the Spec. In rate = 90% (γ = 90%).

6 – 15

Chapter 6 General

6.9 Option 6.9.1 Option to be Installed by Users Users can install the following units. - Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) - Network Expansion Card

6 – 16

Chapter 6 General

6.10 ESS Specification 6.10.1 External Interface 6.10.1.1 USB Item

Specification

Connector

Type-B x 1

Protocol

USB2.0, HighSpeed

Supported Client

Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP (32/64bit)/Server 2003 (32/64bit)/Vista Mac OSX Linux

6.10.1.2 Ethernet Item Connection

Specification 10 Base-T/100Base-T

Protocol

See “10.2 Network Protocol” for details

Supported Client

Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP (32/64bit)/Server 2003 (32/64bit)/Vista Mac OSX Linux

6 – 17

Chapter 6 General

6.10.2 Network Protocol 6.10.2.1 Printing Protocol

Protocol

Transport

Maximum Session*2

Supported Client

LPR

TCP/IP

1

Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA Linux*4 Mac OS X*4

Port9100

TCP/IP

1

Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA Linux*4

*1

TCP/IP

5

Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA Mac OS 10.3,10.4*4

TCP/IP

5

Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA

NetBEUI

5

Windows 98SE, Me, 2000

NetWare TCP/IP*5 (DS-PServer)*1

1

NetWare5, 6,6.5*3

EtherTalk*1

ATP/DDP

1

Mac OS X*4

FTP

TCP/IP

1

Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003 (32/64), VISTA

IPP

SMB*1

*1: Optional multi-protocol processor card is required *2: Maximum session is defined as the number of print request acceptable at the same time. *3: NetWare 6.5 is required to apply support pack 1.1 or later provided by Novell. *4: Supported PS Driver. *5: Available for versions later than NetWare5. BS-Pserver mode is not supported. Only DS-Pserver mode is available.

6 – 18

Chapter 6 General 6.10.2.2 Other Protocols Protocol

SNMP

Transport

UDP/IP

Support Supported MIB] MIB-II (RFC1213) HostResources MIB (RFC1514) PrinterMIB (RFC1759) XCMI2.4

HTTP / HTTPS*1 TCP/IP (CWIS)

[Client] (Windows 2000/XP, x64) Netscape Communicator 7.x or later Internet Explorer 6.0 or later Firefox 1.5 or later (Mac OS X 10.2 or later) Firefox 1.5 or later Safari 2.0 or later JavaScript must be set/ready to operate on the above browsers.

DHCP

UDP/IP

[Supported Server OS] Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 Linux (RedHat8/9, SuSE9), Unix(Solaris 9)

BOOTP

UDP/IP

[Supported Server OS] Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003 Unix(Solaris 9)

RARP

TCP/IP

[Supported OS] Unix (Solaris 9)

AutoIP

TCP/IP

-

WINS*1

TCP/IP

[Supported OS] Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003

SMTP/POP3

TCP/IP

E-Mail Alert [Supported Mail Server] Lotus Notes, MS-Exchange, Eudora

FTP

TCP/IP

Firmware Update

Bonjour

UDP/IP

Supported OS] Mac OS 10.2 or later

DDNS*1

TCP/IP

[Supported OS] Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2003 Server, Unix

*1: Optional Multi-Protocol Card is required

6 – 19

Chapter 6 General

6.10.3 Decomposer 6.10.3.1 PDL PDL/Emulation

Interface/Protocol

PCL5c

PCL6

PS3

USB

Yes

Yes

Yes

LPR

Yes

Yes

Yes

Port9100

Yes

Yes

Yes

IPP

Yes

Yes

Yes

SMB

Yes

Yes

Yes

NetWare (P-Server)

Yes

Yes

Yes

EtherTalk (A-PAP)

No

No

Yes

FTP

No

No

Yes

Yes: Supported, No: Not supported 6.10.3.2 Font 81 fonts and 36 symbols for PCL, 137 fonts for PS3 are available as built in font. 6.10.3.3 Image Area Usable Area Size

Maximum : 215.9mm (8.5 in.) x 355.6mm (14 in.)

Unprintable Area

4.1 mm each from four edges (left, right, top and bottom) of paper

Printable Area

Maximum : 207.9mm (8.18 in.) x 347.6mm (13.68 in.)

Print Image Quality Guaranteed Same as Printable Area Area 6.10.3.4 PostScript 3 Fonts 137 fonts for PS3 are available as built-in fonts.

6 – 20

Chapter 6 General

6.10.4 Job Control 6.10.4.1 Cancel Print A print job in process can be cancelled at the operation panel. 6.10.4.2 Job Recovery When a job fails due to recoverable error like a paper jam, the printer automatically restarts the job after the jammed paper is removed. 6.10.4.3 Job Time Out When job transmission is interrupted for a certain period of time (Time can be changed at the operation panel and unlimited time can be selected), the print data is deleted as an error. 6.10.4.4 Printer Auditron (DPC1110 only) Auditron is a function to specify the availability of color print and to limit print volume per user. Only administrators are allowed to make limitation settings from the CWIS. User name and password is embedded in the print job in order to identify who the job is sent from. User name and password are entered by user from the printer driver. The printer can support maximum 5 accounts. 6.10.4.5 RAM DISK RAM DISK functions when memory is expanded, realizing Collation, Secure Print, Proof Print, Form Overlay, and Font Download. 6.10.4.6 IP Filter The user can select to accept or reject jobs for the specified IP address. Up to 5 IP addresses can be specified. IP filter is available only to LPR and Port 9100.

6 – 21

Chapter 6 General

6.10.5 Logging 6.10.5.1 Job Logging The printer can retain up to 20 job logs. Job log can be printed instantly according to the user's request or automatically printed when the number of the retained job logs has reached 10. Job log includes the following information: • Job sent date and time • Input interface (USB, Lpd, Port9100) • Document name (File name) • Output color • User name/Host name • Number of printed pages (Color, B/W) • Number of printed impressions (Color, B/W) • Paper size • Result (Successful, Error, etc.) 6.10.5.2 Error Logging The printer can retain up to 42 jam errors and up to 42 fatal errors. The user can pirnt error log by the panel operation. Jam error log includes the following information: • PV counter when jam has occurred • Name of Jam Fatal error log includes the following information: • PV counter when error has occurred • Error code 6.10.5.3 Billing Count

NOTE

The same data is stored in two or more addresses in one IC. Datacheck (checksum etc.) is conducted.

NOTE

When ESS is replaced, IC can be transferred. (IC is mounted on socket) Counter

Description

Color Print Counter

Count the number of paper printed in color

B/W Print Counter

Count the number of paper printed in B/W

Total Print Counter

Count the total number of paper printed in color and B/W

6.10.6 Non-Genuine Mode When life of toner cartridge has ended, the printer stops accepting print request (life of toner cartridge is counted by the counter in CRUM). Taking into consideration that some users use refilled toner cartridges, the printer can accept print request by the user’s panel operation even if life of toner cartridge has ended. When the mode has changed so that the printer does not stop even after life of toner cartridge ends, the printer displays a message on the operation panel to inform the user of the mode change. When the printer operates in this mode, print image quality is not guaranteed. Also, remaining toner level is not displayed (as CRUM data can not be guaranteed).

6 – 22

Chapter 6 General

6.10.7 Utility Print 6.10.7.1 Printer Settings List Printer Settings List can be printed according to the user's request. Printer Settings List is printed in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. Printer Settings List includes the following information: [Title] [Product name logo] [General] Total Impressions, Total Color Impressions, Total Black Impressions, Memory Capacity, Printer language, Number of Fonts Available, PostScript Version, PostScript Serial Number, Firmware Version, Boot Version, Engine Version, PostScript CRD Version, Default Paper, Default Plain, Default Label, Default Language [Network] Firmware Version, MAC Address, Ethernet Settings, TCP/IP, LPR, Port9100, IPP*, FTP, Netware*, Bonjour, HTTPS-SSL/TLS*, EtherTalk*, SNMP, E-Mail Alert, Internet Services, IP Filter *: Optional Multi-Protocol Card is required. [Print Volume] Print volume for each paper size 6.10.7.2 Font List Print Font List can be printed by the user's request. Font List is printed in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. PCL or PS Font List can be printed using the control panel. Font List is printed on A4 or Letter paper in the automatically selected paper tray. YMCK color patterns are printed on the Font List. (PCL Printer Driver Only) 6.10.7.3 Job Log Print The printer can store a record of recently printed jobs and print Job Log. Job Log can be instantly printed or automatically printed when the number of print jobs processed has reached the specified number. Job Log is printed in B/W on A4 paper in the tray. 6.10.7.4 PCL Macro List Print PCL Macro List can be printed by the user's operation. PCL Macro List is printed on A4 or Letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.5 Print Meter Print Print Meter Print can be printed by the user's operation. Print Meter is printed on A4 or Letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.6 Stored Document List Print The list of documents stored in the printer by Secure Print/Proof Print can be printed by the user's operation. The list is printed on A4 or Letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray.

6 – 23

Chapter 6 General 6.10.7.7 Error Log Print Error History Report can be printed according to the user's request. Error History Report in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.8 Supported Language The user can switch language on the operation panel or EWS (Language used in the EWS is switched in conjunction with the language used in the PC Browser. The PC Browser must be able to indicate that language.

NOTE 6.10.7.9 Demonstration Print

The following three types are under consideration for “Demonstration Print” menus. Demo Print |-A4 Sample

Demonstration Print (A4)

6.10.7.10 PCL Macro List Print PCL Macro List can be printed by the user's operation. PCL Macro List is printed on A4 size paper in the automatically selected paper tray. 6.10.7.11 Print Meter Print Print Meter Print can be printed by the user's operation. Print Meter is printed on A4 size paper in the automatically selected paper tray.

6 – 24

Chapter 6 General

6.10.8 Software Specifications 6.10.8.1 Firmware Update Tool By using firmware update tool, firmware update is easy operation once update data is acquired until it is completed. This tool runs under the Windows environment. This tool runs under the USB and network environment. Language: English 6.10.8.2 Linux Driver (FX-PDF Driver) The PDF driver that prints using the FX-PDF function of the device is provided. For distribution, operation check is performed in the following environments (but, no guarantee of proper operation). - ERed Hat Enterprise Linux v.4 WS - ENovell SUSE Linux desktop 10. For printing system, depends on CUPS (Common Unix Printing System). Tcl/Tk 8.3.5 or above is necessary to be installed. For language, supports English The RPM format installer is provided (including un-installation function) The following print functions are available. - Number of copies, Collate, Paper size*, Output color, Print mode, 2-sided print, Layout, Paper type, Paper tray, Job type *: Custom size is not supported. The following functions are displayed on the UI because this driver is common between the models. But, it is disabled on this printer due to device limitation. - Stapler, Punch The Linux driver is provided on the Web. Language: English 6.10.8.3 Mac Driver (FX-PDF Driver) The PDF driver that prints using the FX-PDF function of the device is provided. Supports Mac OS X 10.3 and 10.4 (When 10.3 is custom-installed, "BSD system" also needs to be installed) (For 10.4, Macintosh with Intel CPU is included) Depends on CUPS, the OS-standard printing system. For language, supports English only. The installer is provided. The uninstaller is not provided. The following print functions are available. - Number of copies, Collate, Paper size, Paper orientation, N-up, Page order specification, Output color, Print mode, Paper type, Paper tray, Job type, Authentication settings

6 – 25

Chapter 6 General *: Custom size is not supported. The Mac driver is provided on the Web and Driver CD KIT. Language: English 6.10.8.4 Utility Software - Network Setting Tool (Wired LANÅFIP Setup Utility)(Product H only) Network setting is available. Network Setting Tool is included in the Software Pack CD-ROM. - DPU (Direct Print Utility) For Windows 98/Me - FX USB For Windows 98/Me Font Download Tool PCL5 forms and fonts can be downloaded to RAM DISK. 6.10.8.5 3rd Party Software Support The following 3rd Party Softwares are supported: - Mail Client Software (for StatusMessenger) - Microsoft Outlook Express (6 or later) - Microsoft Outlook2003 - Netscape (Mail) (7 or later) - Ftp Client Software - Console command of Windows Me/2000/XP/x64 XP - Console command of Mac OSX, Linux (Red Hat Enterprise Linux v.4 WS,Novell SUSE Linux desktop 10. )*1 *1: Support only FTP user command from command line 6.10.8.6 Linkage with FX Brand Software The printer links up with the following softwares provided by FX - DocuHouse Linkage with printer management software "DocuHouse" is possible. DocuHouse history service is supported. Features and performance: Comply with the acceptance criteria of DocuHouse program Support timing: Post Launch (Comply with the support schedule of DocuHouse program) Table below shows the Language and Supported DocuHouse. English OS DocuHouse

*1

KO/TC/SC OS Supported*2

Supported

*1: Support with Windows2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, Vista(include x64). *2: Using English UI

6 – 26

Chapter 6 General - PrintXchange PrintXchange is not supported - ARC-opl ARC-opl is not supported (currently Japanese version only) - CentreWare Flow Services CentreWare Flow Services is not supported - TrustMark Basic TrustMark Basic is not supported (currently domestic ART-EX version only) 6.10.8.7 Linkage with Other Brand Software The printer links up with the following softwares provided by other companies (except for FX). - Citrix MetaFrame and Presentation Server - SAP SAP R/3 - Print Utility for MetaFrame (Linkage with Citrix MetaFrame) Citrix MetaFrame and Presentation Server are supported. Develop basic linkage software, “Print Utility for MetaFrame” for linkage. Features and performance: Comply with the standard of basic distribution output program. Support timing: PostLaunch (Comply with the support schedule of the basic linkage program. About within one month after product launch) - Interstage (Advance Certified) The printer does not link up with Fujitsu Interstage. - SAP R/3 FX device type file (V1.x.x.) is provided. (See Table Language & Device Type Name) Test script of FX device type file (English and Japanese prepared) must be output properly. The development division performs the test. (CPF) Support timing: At Launch Reference URL http://www.fujixerox.co.jp/solution/kikanbunsan/sap/ Language

Language & Device Type Name (V1.xx) Device name (PCL) Device type name (PS)

English

ZFXPCL

ZFXPST

Korean

ZKPFXPCL

-

Chinese (simplified)

ZCNFXPCL

-

Chinese (Traditional)

ZTWFXPCL

-

Language

Language & Device Type Name (V2.xx) Device name (PCL) Device type name (PS)

English

-

ZFXPST

Korean

-

-

Chinese (simplified)

-

-

Chinese (Traditional)

-

-

6 – 27

Chapter 6 General - IBM AS400 (IBM Printing Utility for Personal Communication) Japan only. Not supported. - JP1(Drop all model support) from SRD) Not supported.

6 – 28

Chapter 6 General

6.11 Tools and Service Consumables 6.11.1 Tools There are no tools that are specific to this machine. Basic Tool

6.11.2 Service Consumable There are no service consumables that are specific to this machine.

6 – 29

Chapter 6 General

6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110 6.12.1 Check the Contents - Printer

- Control panel label (Can be placed on the control panel as necessary) - Setup Guide - Safety Notes

- Power cord - Driver CD Kit

NOTE

- PS Driver Library CD

Interface cables and paper must be purchased separately. When you purchase additional memory, install it following the User Guide (PDF) provided with the Driver CD Kit. When you purchase the optional network expansion card, install it following the installation guide.

6 – 30

Chapter 6 General

6.12.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes Shipping Tapes

Do not remove these tapes in this step.

6.12.3 Set the Toner Cartridges

1

Press and slide the orange latches of the four toner cartridges towards the front of the printer. 3

2

4

6 – 31

Chapter 6 General

6.12.4 Set the Drum Cartridge Remove the Drum Cartridge

2

1

Drum cartridge

3

Belt unit

NOTE Pull the cartridge frontward and out, securely holding the tabs on both sides.

NOTE

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

4

Hold the Drum Cartridge firmly so as not to drop it.

6 – 32

Chapter 6 General Remove the 8 Pieces of Yellow Tapes

5

Do not remove the protective sheet in this step.

Insert the Drum Cartridge and Remove the Sheet

6

Insert the cartridge until the line on the gray tab meets the white line on the printer. 7

8

NOTE

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

6 – 33

Chapter 6 General

9

10

6.12.5 Connect the Power Cord

6 – 34

Chapter 6 General

6.12.6 Switch On the Power

To use a network connection, go to 6.12.7. To use a USB connection, go to 6.12.9.

6 – 35

Chapter 6 General

6.12.7 Connect the Network Cable

6.12.8 Set the IP Address The following explains the how to set the IP address using the control panel. For a details on the procedure and other network settings, refer to the User Guide. 1

1

Menu Report / List

2

2

Menu Admin Menu

2 times

3

3

Admin Menu Wired Network 4

4

Wired Network Ethernet 5

5

Wired Network TCP/IP 6

6

TCP/IP IPv4 or

6 – 36

Chapter 6 General 7

7

IPv4 Get IP Address 8

8

Get IP Address DHCP/Autonet * 9

9

Get IP Address Panel

4 times

10

10

Reboot to apply settings Get IP Address Panel * 11

11

IPv4 Get IP Address 12

12

IPv4 IP Address 13

13

IP Address 000.000.000.000* 14

14

IP Address 192.000.000.000 Ex. 192.168.1.100 15

15

IP Address 192.000.000.000 16 Repeat steps 14 and 15 to set the IP address.

16

IP Address 192.168.001.100

6 – 37

Chapter 6 General 17

17

Reboot to apply settings IP Address 192.168.001.100* 18

18

IPv4 Subnet Mask 19

19

Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000* 20 Set the subnet mask in the same way as the IP address.

20

21

21

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.000*

IPv4 Gateway Address 22

22

Gateway Address 000.000.000.000* 23 Set the gateway address in the same way as the IP address.

23

Gateway Address 192.168.001.254*

24 Switch the printer off and then on again.

Refer to 6.14.2 setting the Network Environment.

6 – 38

Chapter 6 General

6.12.9 Install the Print Driver

1

Driver CD Kit

Click here for [Documentation (HTML)] that explains the procedure in detail. 2

3a

3b

4 Install the print driver following the on-screen instructions.

6 – 39

To Use a Network Connection To Use a USB Connection

Chapter 6 General

6.12.10 Connect the USB Cable NOTE

Be sure to switch off the printer before connecting the USB cable.

6.12.11 Load the Paper

1

2a When loading A5/B5/A4/8.5 x 11"/7.25 x 10.5" paper

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

6 – 40

Chapter 6 General 2b When loading 8.5 x 13"/8.5 x 14" paper Slide the length guide to the edge of the tray.

Extend the tray.

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

4

3

6 – 41

Chapter 6 General

6.12.12 View the User Guide (PDF)

1

NOTE

Driver CD Kit

To view the User Guide, You must have Adobe Reader installed on your computer.

2

3

4 Select your printer's User Guide following the on-screen instructions. Finish

6 – 42

Chapter 6 General

6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B 6.13.1 Check the Contents - Printer

- Control panel label (Can be placed on the control panel as necessary) - Setup Guide - Safety Notes

- Power cord - Driver CD Kit

NOTE

Interface cables and paper must be purchased separately. When you purchase additional memory, install it following the User Guide (PDF) provided with the Driver CD Kit.

6 – 43

Chapter 6 General

6.13.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes Shipping Tapes

Do not remove these tapes in this step.

6.13.3 Set the Toner Cartridges

1

Press and slide the orange latches of the four toner cartridges towards the front of the printer. 3

2

4

6 – 44

Chapter 6 General

6.13.4 Set the Drum Cartridge Remove the Drum Cartridge

2

1

Drum cartridge

3

Belt unit

NOTE Pull the cartridge frontward and out, securely holding the tabs on both sides.

NOTE

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

4

Hold the Drum Cartridge firmly so as not to drop it.

6 – 45

Chapter 6 General Remove the 8 Pieces of Yellow Tapes

5

Do not remove the protective sheet in this step.

Insert the Drum Cartridge and Remove the Sheet

6

Insert the cartridge until the line on the gray tab meets the white line on the printer. 7

8

NOTE

Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.

6 – 46

Chapter 6 General

9

10

6 – 47

Chapter 6 General

6.13.5 Install the Print Driver

1

Driver CD Kit

Click here for [Documentation (HTML)] that explains the procedure in detail. 2

3

4 Install the print driver following the on-screen instructions.

6 – 48

Chapter 6 General

6.13.6 Connect the USB Cable

6.13.7 Connect the Power Cord

6.13.8 Switch On the Power

6 – 49

Chapter 6 General

6.13.9 Load the Paper

1

2a When loading A5/B5/A4/8.5 x 11"/7.25 x 10.5" paper

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

2b When loading 8.5 x 13"/8.5 x 14" paper Slide the length guide to the edge of the tray.

Extend the tray.

Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.

6 – 50

Chapter 6 General

4

3

6 – 51

Chapter 6 General

6.13.10 View the User Guide (PDF)

1

NOTE

Driver CD Kit

To view the User Guide, You must have Adobe Reader installed on your computer.

2

3

4 Select your printer's User Guide following the on-screen instructions. Finish

6 – 52

Chapter 6 General

6.14 Printer Environment Settings This chapter describes the supported operating environments and necessary settings to use the printer.

6.14.1 Supported Operating Environments The DocuPrint C1110 can be used as both a local and a network printer, while the DocuPrint C1110 B can be used only as a local printer. When used as a local printer, the printer is connected directly to a computer. When used as a network printer, the printer is connected to a computer over a network. To use the printer as a network printer, set all ports you want to use to [Enable] on the control panel. (default: [Enable])

DocuPrint C1110 Internet IPP

DocuPrint C1110

Local Connection USB

Network Connection LPD/SMB/Port9100/EtherTalk/FTP

Network Connection NetWare/Windows Shared Printer

Server

DocuPrint C1110 B

Local Connection USB

6 – 53

Chapter 6 General Supported Operating Systems and Operating Environments The supported operating systems are subject to change without prior notice. Visit our web site for the latest information.

NOTE

indicates the items that can be configured only on the DocuPrint C1110.

Connection Method

Local

Network (DocuPrint C1110 only)

Port Name

USB*2

Protocol

-

TCP/ IP

TCP/ IP

IPX/ SPX

Net BEUI

Windows® 2000

O

O

O

O

O

Windows® XP (x32/x64)

O

O

O

Windows

O

O

O

Windows Vista™ (x32/x64)

O

O

Mac OS X 10.2.8/ 10.3.9/10.4

O

O

LPD

Ether

IPP*1

Port 9100

Talk*1

TCP/ IP

TCP/IP

TCP/ IP

Apple Talk

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

NetWare*1

SMB*1

FTP

WSD*1

TCP/ IP

TCP/ IP

Server® 2003 (x32/x64)

O*3

O

O

*1: The network expansion card (optional) must be installed. *2: USB port must be set on the computer connected to the printer. *3: Supported on Mac OS X 10.3.9 or 10.4. Note (DocuPrint C1110 only) • When printing from Macintosh, refer to the ‘User Guide’ on the PostScript Driver Library CD-ROM.

6 – 54

Chapter 6 General

6.14.2 Setting the Network Environment (DocuPrint C1110 only) This section explains how to install your printer in a TCP/IP environment. When installing the printer in a different environment, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. Setting IP Address To use TCP/IP protocol, you must configure an IP address for the printer. If your printer has the network expansion card (optional) installed, the printer can print using the IPv6 communication as well as the IPv4 communication. The following explains how to set the IP address in IPv4 mode. When using the IP address in IPv6 mode, refer to " Using the Printer in an IPv6 Environment". Setting the IP Address in IPv4 Mode By default, the printer is set to obtain its IP address (via the [Get IP Address] setting on the control panel) using [DHCP/Autonet]. Thus, when the printer is connected to a network that has a DHCP server, the printer automatically obtains its IP address from the server. Print the [Printer Settings] list to see if the printer already has an IP address. If the printer does not have an IP address, set [Get IP Address] to [Panel] and configure the address.

NOTE

The printer can obtain its IP address also by using a BOOTP or RARP server. If using a BOOTP or RARP server, set [Get IP Address] to [BOOTP] or [RARP]. If using a DHCP server, the printer's IP address may change without notice. Make sure to check the IP address periodically. To use DHCP in a WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) environment, the network expansion card (optional) must be installed.

Printing the [Printer Settings] List Use the following procedure to print the [Printer Settings] list.

1

Press the button to display the menu screen.

Menu Report / List

2

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. [Printer Settings] is displayed.

Report / List Printer Settings

3

Press the button to print the report. The report is printed.

6 – 55

Chapter 6 General Example of the [Printer Settings] list

NOTE

The following example uses the printer with the network expansion card (optional) not installed. If the network expansion card is installed to your printer, some items to be listed may differ.

If an IP address is listed, skip the following procedure. If an IP address is not listed, or if you want to change the current IP address, configure the setting using the following procedure.

To Set the IP Address on the Control Panel Use the following procedure to configure the printer's IP address on the control panel. Depending on your network environment, your printer also needs a subnet mask and gateway address. Consult your network administrator for the settings required for your printer. -To Set the IP Address 1

Press the button to display the menu screen.

Menu Report / List

2

Press the < > button until [Admin Menu] is displayed. Note If you went past the desired item, return to the item by pressing the <

Menu Admin Menu

> button.

3

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. [Wired Network] is displayed.

Admin Menu Wired Network

Note If you pressed the < > button on the wrong item, return to the previous screen by pressing the < > button. To start over from the beginning, press the button. 4

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. [Ethernet] is displayed.

Wired Network Ethernet

5

Press the < > button until [TCP/IP] is displayed.

6 – 56

Wired Network TCP/IP

Chapter 6 General

6

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. [IPv4] or [IP Mode] is displayed. If [IP Mode] is displayed, press the < > button to display [IPv4].

TCP/IP IPv4

7

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. [Get IP Address] is displayed.

IPv4 Get IP Address

8

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. The current setting is displayed.

Get IP Address DHCP/Autonet*

9

Press the < > button until [Panel] is displayed.

Get IP Address Panel

10

Confirm your selection by pressing the button. The display shows [Reboot to apply settings] for 3 seconds and returns to the setting screen. You will reboot the printer after setting the gateway address. Go on to the next step.

Get IP Address Panel*

11

Press the < > button to return to [Get IP Address].

IPv4 Get IP Address

12

Press the < > button to display [IP Address].

IPv4 IP Address

13

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. The current IP address is displayed.

IP Address 000.000.000.000*

14

Enter the value in the first field using the < > or < > button, and press the < > button. Note If you do not need to change the setting, press the < next field.

> button to advance to the

Pressing and holding down the <

> or

< > button increments the value by 10. To return to the previous field, press the <

> button.

6 – 57

IP Address 192.000.000.000

Chapter 6 General 15

Enter the rest of the fields in the same manner. After entering the last (4th) field, press the button to confirm your entry.

IP Address 192.168.001.100*

16

If you want to set a subnet mask and gateway address, press the < > button and proceed to Step 17. If you want to finish the setting, proceed to Step 24. To Set the Subnet Mask/Gateway Addressl 17

Press the < > button until [Subnet Mask] is displayed.

IPv4 Subnet Mask

18

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. The current subnet mask is displayed.

Subnet Mask 000.000.000.000*

19

Enter the subnet mask in the same way you entered the IP address, and press the button to confirm your entry.

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.000*

20

Press the < > button to return to [Subnet Mask].

IPv4 Subnet Mask

21

Press the < > button to display [Gateway Address].

IPv4 Gateway Address

22

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. The current gateway address is displayed.

Gateway Address 000.000.000.000*

23

Enter the gateway address in the same way you entered the IP address, and press the button to confirm your entry. 24

The setting is now complete. Reboot the printer by switching the power off and then on again. 25

Print the [Printer Settings] list to verify your settings.

6 – 58

Gateway Address 192.168.001.254*

Chapter 6 General Using the Printer in an IPv6 Environment If the printer is connected to a network with an IPv6 router that advertises network prefixes, the printer automatically configures the IPv6 stateless address. For details, consult your system administrator. You can check the IPv6 link-local address and IPv6 stateless address by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Printing the [Printer Settings] List Use the following procedure to print the [Printer Settings] list and check the addresses.

1

Press the button to display the menu screen.

Menu Report / List

2

Press the < > or button to accept the selection. [Printer Settings] is displayed.

Report / List Printer Settings

3

Press the button to print the report. The report is printed. Example of the [Printer Settings] list

IPv6 link-local address

IPv6 stateless addresses are listed here if they are automatically configured.

NOTE

To set an IP address manually, set the IP address under the [Properties] tab > [TCP/IP] on CentreWare Internet Services. For information on how to access CentreWare Internet Services, refer to " Configuring the Printer Using CentreWare Internet Services". To specify an IPv6 address, enter the address and then "64" after a slash (/) under the [Properties] tab > [Protocol Settings] > [TCP/IP] on CentreWare Internet Services. For details, consult your system administrator.

6 – 59

Chapter 6 General Configuring the Printer Using CentreWare Internet Services CentreWare Internet Services is a service that allows you to monitor or remotely configure the printer using a web browser when the printer is on a TCP/IP network. Some of the control panel settings can be set also on the service's [Properties] tab.

NOTE

CentreWare Internet Services cannot be used when your printer is a local printer.

Supported Operating Environments CentreWare Internet Services has been tested to work on the following web browsers. On Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista - Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6/7 - Mozilla Firefox 2 On Mac OS X 10.4 - Mozilla Firefox 2 - Safari 2 Setting Up a Web Browser When accessing CentreWare Internet Services, we recommend you to set your web browser: - not to use a proxy server when specifying the printer’s IP address. - to enable JavaScript.

NOTE

If you access CentreWare Internet Services using a proxy server, the response from the service may be slow or the window of the service may not be displayed. Some buttons on the service do not appear when JavaScript is not running or disabled. In such case, the buttons are displayed as URL links. For information on how to set up your web browser, refer to the online help for the web browser.

If you want to change the display language of CentreWare Internet Services, change the display language of your web browser.

NOTE

For information on how to change the display language of your web browser, refer to the online help for the web browser.

6 – 60

Chapter 6 General Setting Up the Printer To use CentreWare Internet Services, you must configure the printer's IP address and enable [InternetServices] (default: [Enable]). When [InternetServices] is set to [Disable], change it to [Enable] on the control panel. Refer to “Protocol” (User Guide p.88) CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items The followings are the main features on each tab of CentreWare Internet Services.

Tab Name

Feature

Status

• General Displays the printer's product name, IP address, and status. • Printer Status Displays the sizes and remaining volumes of the paper loaded in the paper trays, the status of the output tray, and the remaining life of consumables. • Fault Status Displays the status of the control panel and error information (error location and details).

Jobs

• Displays the job status list and job history list.

Properties

• Description Displays the printer's product name and serial number. It also sets the printer's name*, installation location*, contact person*, and administrator's e-mail address*. • Configuration Displays the specifications of the print features, page description languages, and memory information. • Usage Counters Displays the total number of color and monochrome pages printed to date. • Initialization Initializes the NV memory or reboots the printer. • Security* Sets the settings for IPsec. It also creates/manages/deletes self-signed certificates and enables SSL/TLS communication. This item appears only when the network expansion card (optional) is installed. • StatusMessenger* The printer can notify its status via e-mail to users who have been registered through this feature. You can set the e-mail addresses of the users and the items or events that the users will be notified of. • Internet Services Settings* Sets whether or not to automatically update the window of CentreWare Internet Services and the interval at which the window is updated (in seconds). This also enables or disables the Administrator Mode and sets the administrator's ID and password, if the Administrator Mode is enabled. The default system administrator ID and password are "11111" and "x-admin", respectively. Make sure to change the password before using the Administrator Mode. • Port Status Enables or disables each port. • Port Settings Sets the settings for Ethernet. • Protocol Settings* Sets the details of each protocol.

Print

• Print Auditron* This feature allows you to control user access to the printer. If enabling this feature, register users who are granted access to the printer.

Support

• Displays a link to customer support.

* These items can be configured only on CentreWare Internet Services and not on the control panel. The security features are not supported on the model available in China.

6 – 61

Chapter 6 General Using CentreWare Internet Services Follow these steps when accessing CentreWare Internet Services. 1. Start your computer and launch a web browser. 2. In the URL field, enter the IP address or URL of the printer, and press the key. The top page of CentreWare Internet Services is displayed • Example - URL

• Example - IP address

• Example - IPv6 address

Note • When specifying a port number, enter ":" (colon) and then "80" (the factory default port number) after the address. To find out the printer’s port number, print the [Printer Settings] list from the printer. • The port number can be changed under the [Properties] tab > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. If you change the port number, you must enter ":" (colon) and then the port number after the address.

• When SSL/TLS server communication is enabled, enter "https" before the address instead of "http". This feature is not supported on the model available in China. • For information about the Authentication/Auditron Administration and data encryption features, refer to "7.7 Security Features" (User Guide P. 146) and "7.8 Authentication and Auditron Administration Features (DocuPrint C1110 only)" (User Guide P. 155).

Using the Online Help For details on each setting item, refer to the online help for CentreWare Internet Services. You can browse the online help by clicking the [Help] button on the service.

6 – 62

Chapter 6 General

6.14.3 Installing a Printer Driver To print from your computer, install a PCL print driver using the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. The installation procedure varies depending on how your computer is connected to the printer. For installation instructions, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CD-ROM. Note • Refer to the ‘CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)’ also when installing ContentsBridge Utility or other software.

Uninstalling a Print Driver and Other Software To Uninstall a Print Driver Your print driver can be uninstalled using the uninstallation tool contained on the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit. For more information, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CDROM. To Uninstall Other Software When uninstalling other software installed from the Driver CD Kit, refer to the "Readme" file provided for each software. The "Readme" files can be viewed under the `Product Information (HTML)' in the Driver CD Kit.

6 – 63

Chapter 6 General

6.15 Control Panel Manu Tree

Control Panel Menu Tree Basic Control Panel Functions To move up and down the menus:

< > or < > button

To select a menu or move to the right:

< > or button

To cancel a selection or return to the left:

< > button

To confirm an entry:

button

To exit the menu screen:

button

Character/Number Entry Functions To increase or decrease a value:

< > or < > button

To move between digits or fields:

< > or < > button

To reset a value to the default:

< > and < > buttons

Print Menus

The print menus appear on the display only when additional memory of 256 MB or above is installed.

Ready to Print <

> button

Print Menu Secure Print

Select User ID User01

Password+SET key [xxxxxxxxxxxx]

Secure Print No Jobs

Print Menu Sample Print

Select Document All Documents

All Documents Print and Delete All Documents Print and Save All Documents Delete

Enter Quantity Use PC Settings Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

Select Document document1

document1 Print and Delete document1 Print and Save document1 Delete

Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

Select User ID User01

Select Document All Documents

All Documents Print and Delete All Documents Print and Save All Documents Delete

Enter Quantity Use PC settings Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

Proof Print No Jobs

Select Document document1

document1 Print and Delete document1 Print and Save document1 Delete

Enter Quantity xxx Set(s)

6 – 64

Chapter 6 General

Conventions for the Administrator Menus : Main menus : Items that appear/do not appear depending on the options installed in the printer. * : Default

Administrator Menus Ready to Print

button

Password

Report / List

Meter Readings

If the control panel is locked with a password, [0000] enter the password here.

Printer Settings, Panel Settings, PCL Font List, PCL Macro List, PS Font List, PDF Font List, Job History, Error History, Print Meter, Demo Print, Stored Documents

Meter 1, Meter 2, Meter 3, Meter 4

Wired Network

USB Settings

*1

Continued on the next page To A

*1

Continued on the next page To B

System Settings

Continued on the next page To C

Maintenance Mode

Continued on the next page To D

PDF

Continued on the next page To F

PCL

Continued on the next page To G

Admin Menu

Continued on the next page To H

PostScript *1

Continued on the next page To  I

Panel Settings

*1 : This item appears only on the DocuPrint C1110. Tray Settings

Tray 1

Paper Type PS Error Report

Plain On *, Paper*, Recycled Paper, Off Paper, Heavyweight 1, Bond Heavyweight 2, Labels, Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope

Paper Size

A4 Portrait*, A5 Portrait, B5 Portrait, 8.5 x 11" P, 8.5 x 13" P, 8.5 x 14" P, 7.25 x 10.5" P, Env3.9 x 7.5" P, Env3.9 x 7.5" L, Env 110x220mm P, Env 110x220mm L, Env 162x229mm P, Env4.1 x 9.5" P

Custom Size

Display Screen

6 – 65

On*, Off

Length Y

xxxmm*

Width X

xxxmm*

Chapter 6 General

A (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.) Wired Network

Ethernet

Auto*, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full

TCP/IP

IP Mode

Dual Stack*, IPv4, IPv6

IPv4

Get IP Address

DHCP / Autonet*, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP, Panel 000.000.000.000*

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address

IPsec

Disable These items do not appear on the model available in China.

Protocol

LPD, Port 9100, IPP, SMB (TCP/IP), SMB (NetBEUI), FTP, WSD, E-mail Printing, StatusMessenger, InternetServices, EtherTalk Compat, Bonjour (mDNS)

HTTP - SSL/TLS

Enable*, Disable

Disable*, Enable

This item appears only when a certificate is registered in the printer. These items do not appear on the model available in China. NetWare

NetWare IP

Enable*, Disable

NetWare IPX

SNMP

SNMP (UDP/IP) SNMP (IPX)

IPX/SPX

Auto*, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet SNAP

IP Filter

No.n / Address No.n / Mask No.n / Mode

000.000.000.000* Off*, Accept, Reject

n: 1-5 Initialize NVM

Ready to Init

Adobe Protocol

Auto*, Standard, BCP, TBCP, Binary

B (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.) USB Settings

Adobe Protocol

TBCP*, Binary, Auto, Standard, BCP

6 – 66

Enable*, Disable

Chapter 6 General

C System Settings

3 - 60 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

Low Power Timer

3 Minutes*

Sleep Mode

Enable*, Disable

Sleep Mode Timer

2 Minutes*

Audio Tones

Control Panel, Invalid Key, Machine Ready, Job Completed, Fault Tone, Alert Tone, Out of Paper, Low Toner Alert, Base Tone

Job Time-out

30 Seconds*

Auto Job History

Off*, On

Print ID

Off*, Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Right

Print Text

Off*, On

RAM Disk

Off*, On

Substitute Tray

Off*, Larger Size, Closest Size

mm / inch

Millimeters(mm)*, Inches (")

Interrupt Print

On*, Off

Print Priority

Off*, On

DefaultPaperSize

A4*, 8.5 x 11"

Adjust PaperType Paper Type

Plain Paper

These items do not appear on the model available in China.

2 - 120 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

Off, On*

Off or 5 - 300 Seconds (increment: 1 sec.)

D Maintenance Mode

Lightweight, Heavyweight*

Labels

Adjust BTR

Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond Paper, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2, Labels, Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope

Adjust Fuser

Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond Paper, Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2, Labels, Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope

0* -6 - +6 (unit: 1) 0* -2 - +2 (unit: 1)

Auto Adjust Regi

On*, Off

To E (next page)

6 – 67

Chapter 6 General

From E (previous page)

([Maintenance Mode] continued)

Adjust ColorRegi Paper Type

PlainAdjust Auto Paper

Ready to Adjust

Color Regi Chart Enter Adjustment

Fast Scan

Y=0 M=0 C=0

Slow Scan

Adjust Altitude

0m*, 1000m, 2000m, 3000m

Clean Developer

Are you sure?

Toner Refresh

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

Drum Refresh

Are you sure?

Print Meter

Reset?

Initialize NVM

Ready to Init

Storage Disk

Ready to Init

Adjust Paper Type Quantity

Plain 1 Set(s) Paper *

Print Mode

Normal*, High Quality, High Speed

Password

[1234567890123]

Collated

Off*, On

Are you sure?

F PDF

1 - 999 sets

32 characters Code 0x20 - 0x7d

When [DefaultPaperSize] is [A4] Output Size

Auto, A4*

Auto, 8.5x11"*

When [DefaultPaperSize] is [8.5 x 11"]

Layout

Auto %*, 100% (No Zoom), Booklet, 2 Pages Up, 4 Pages Up

Output Color

Color (Auto)*, Black

6 – 68

-9 - +9 (unit: 1)

Chapter 6 General

G PCL

Adjust Size Output Paper Type

A4*, A5, B5, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 14", 7.25 x 10.5", Env 3.9 x 7.5", Env 110 x 220mm, Env 162 x 229mm, Env 4.1 x 9.5" Custom Size

Length Y

xxxmm*

Width X

xxxmm*

Orientation

Portrait*, Landscape

Font

Courier*

Select from 81 fonts

Symbol Set

Roman-8*

Select from 36 sets

Font Size

12.00*

4.00 - 50.00 (increment: 0.25 pt)

Font Pitch

10.00*

6.00 - 24.00 (increment: 0.01 cpi)

Form Lines

64*

5 - 128 (increment: 1)

Quantity

1*

1 - 999 (increment: 1)

Image Enhance

On*, Off

HexDump

Disable*, Enable

Draft Mode

Disable*, Enable

Line Termination

Off*, Add-LF, Add-CR, CR-XX

Output Color

Black*, Color

H (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.) PostScript

Adjust PS Error Paper Report Type

On*, Paper Plain Off

PS Job Time-out

Off*, xx Minutes

PaperSelect Mode

Auto*, Select FromTray

Default Color

Black, Color*

Adjust PS Panel Error Lock Paper Report Type

Off Plain On ,, Paper ** Off On

Change Password

Current Password

1 - 900 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)

 I Panel Settings

These items appear only when [Panel Lock] is [On].

6 – 69

New Password

Reenter

Chapter 6 General

6 – 70

Chapter 7 Wiring Data

CONTENTS 7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)].....................................................................................7-1 7.1.1 List of P/J ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1.2 IOT P/J layout diagram ................................................................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram........................................................................................7-7 7.2.1 Symbols in the General Connection Wiring Diagram...................................................................... 7-7 7.2.2 General Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................................. 7-9

7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts..................................................................7-10 7.3.1 Notes on Using the Wiring Diagram between Parts...................................................................... 7-10 7.3.2 Configuration of the Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts...................................................... 7-12 § 1 DC POWER SUPPLY ....................................................................................................................... 7-14 § 2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI ...................................................................................................................... 7-16 § 3 DRIVE ............................................................................................................................................... 7-18 § 4 ROS .................................................................................................................................................. 7-20 § 5 XEROGRAPHIC ............................................................................................................................... 7-22 § 6 HIGH VOLTAGE ............................................................................................................................... 7-24 § 7 DEVELOPER .................................................................................................................................... 7-26 § 8 FUSER.............................................................................................................................................. 7-28 § 9 CONTROLLER ................................................................................................................................. 7-30

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)] 7.1.1 List of P/J Printer P/J

Coordiates

Remarks

3

D-139

Connects PWBA ESS and MULTI PROTOCOL CARD

10

I-156

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ESS

11

I-156

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ESS VIDEO

14

H-157

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY LVPS

15

H-156

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY 24V

16

I-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY HVPS

17

H-157

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY FUSER

18

H-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT

19

H-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT

20

J-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY HUM

21

J-157

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT

22

J-157

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY SUB MOT

23

J-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE

24

J-158

Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PH (Color Mode Switching Solenoid)

26

J-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL

28

J-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE

29

C-140

Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY B

29

I-158

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY SIDE SW

31

H-157

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM

40

C-136

Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY ESS POWER

40

I-156

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ROS RE

41

I-156

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO

42

J-157

Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO

44

G-136

Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK

47

F-136

Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY FUSER

48

G-137

Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR

101

D-138

Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS

101

I-157

Not Connect (Debug only)

111

E-138

Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS VIDEO

141

G-107

Connects LED ASSY ERASE and HARNESS ASSY LVPS

144

G-151

Connects PWBA EEPROM and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO

161

F-153

Connects PWBA HVPS and HARNESS ASSY HVPS

171

H-106

Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY FUSER

7-1

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)] P/J

Coordiates

Remarks

181

C-152

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP Y) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT

182

C-151

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP M) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT

191

C-151

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP C) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT

192

C-150

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP K) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT

201

H-140

Connects FEEDER ASSY V (HUM Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY HUM

211

J-138

Connects DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Main Motor) and HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT

220

E-106

Connects CONSOLE ASSY PANEL and HARNESS ASSY A-OP

221

H-138

Connects DRIVE ASSY SUB (Sub Motor) and HARNESS ASSY SUB MOT

231

C-125

Connects FEEDER ASSY V (Feed Solenoid) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE

232

F-125

Connects FEEDER ASSY V (REGI Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE

233

G-125

Connects FEEDER ASSY V (SSI No Paper Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE

234

F-124

Connects FEEDER ASSY V (CST No Paper Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE

261

H-139

Connects DRIVE ASSY PH (Color Mode Switching Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL

262

I-139

Connects CLUTCH ASSY DRV and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL

281

C-108

Connects TRANSFER ASSY (Harness Assy CTD SNR2) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE

291

H-107

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Side Cover Switch) and HARNESS ASSY SIDE SW

311

H-110

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM Y) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM

312

H-109

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM M) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM

313

H-108

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM C) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM

314

H-108

Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM K) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM

401

C-139

Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS POWER

411

D-122

Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS RE

412

D-123

Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO

422

G-150

Connects PHD ASSY ( Eeprom PHD) and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO

482

G-140

Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR

483

G-140

Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR

484

G-141

Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY GFI GND

501

D-136

Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY LVPS

502

C-136

Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY 24V

503

C-136

Connects PWBA LVPS and FAN MAIN

504

D-136

Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY TEST RL

2811

D-107

Connects ADC Sensor and HARNESS ASSY CTD SNR2 (TRANSFER ASSY)

5041

I-107

Not Connects (Used in production process only)

2200/ 2900

H-111

Connects HARNESS ASSY A-OP and HARNESS ASSY B

7-2

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

7.1.2 IOT P/J layout diagram

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

101

102

103

220 171 291

104

105

106

5041

2811

141

107

314 108

281

313

109

312 311

110

111

2200/2900

112

113

114

115

Wsb07001FA

7-3

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

411

123

412 124

125

126

231

233

127

234 232

128

129

130

Wsb07002FA

7-4

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

131

132

504

133

47

501 502 134

48

44

503 40

135

136

137

138

221 101 111

211

401 139

3 29

140

141

262 261 201

142

483 482

484

143

144

145

Wsb07003FA

7-5

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

146

144 147

422

148

149

150

192 191

151

182 152

181 153

154

155

40 156

41

15 14 17 101 31 19 18

161

157

158

159

29

16

20

10 11 42 22 21 24 26 23 28

160

Wsb07004FA

7-6

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram

7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram 7.2.1 Symbols in the General Connection Wiring Diagram The symbols in the general connection wiring diagram are described below.

Symbol

Description Represents an interconnection between parts using wiring harness or wire. Represents an interconnection which differs according to the specifications. Represents an interconnection between parts using a conductive member such as a plate spring. Represents a connection between parts by tightening of a screw.

Indicates a frame ground.

Represents a connector. The connector No. is indicated inside the box.

Represents a connection terminal with a plate spring on the printed circuit board. The connector (terminal) No. is indicated inside the box.

Represents a connector directly connected to the printed circuit board. The connector No. is indicated inside the box.

The box containing a part name represents a part. "PL X.Y.Z" indicates the item "Z" of the plate (PL) "X.Y" described in Chapter 5 "Parts List."

Represents a functional part within a part, and indicates the name of the functional part.

Represents a section in "7.3. Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts," and indicates its section No.

7-7

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram Symbol

Description Represents a screw for fixing wiring harness and a conductive member such as a plate spring.

Represents a conductive member such as a plate spring.

7-8

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram

7.2.2 General Wiring Diagram

8

PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1 P/J47

Fuser FUSER ASSY PL6.1.1

P/J171 Used in production process only.

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

J5041

HARN ASSY SW PWR PL8.2.9

P/J48

P/J483

FAN MAIN PL8.1.1

P/J503

P/J29

HARN ASSY INTERLOCK PL8.2.5

P/J291 P/J44

4

ROS

ROS ASSY PL4.1.1

P/J411

P/J40

P/J412

P/J41

P/J15

BREAKER GFI PL8.2.11

P/J504

SWITCH PL5.1.9

P/J17

P/J482

P/J502 DC Power Supply

Controller P/J40

6

9

PWBA HVPS PL4.1.19

High Voltage

P161

P/J16

P/J141

LED ASSY ERASE PL4.1.8

EEPROM PHD

PWBA EEPROM PL8.2.16

P/J10

P/J101

P/J11

P/J111

P/J144 P/J18

SENSOR HUM PL8.2.7

Xerographic

2

Feeder, SSI & Regi

SOLENOID FEED MSI PL3.1.9 P/J231

P/J233

CST NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13

P/J234

CLUTCH ASSY DRV PL3.1.1

P/J262

P/J2900

P/J220

P/J181

MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y) PL5.1.3

P/J182

MOTOR ASSY DISP (M) PL5.1.3

P/J191

MOTOR ASSY DISP (C) PL5.1.3

P/J192

MOTOR ASSY DISP (K) PL5.1.3

P/J314

CONNECTOR CRUM (K) PL5.1.14

P/J313

CONNECTOR CRUM (C) PL5.1.14

P/J312

CONNECTOR CRUM (M) PL5.1.14

P/J311

CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) PL5.1.14

Developer

7

Drive

3

ADC SENSOR P/J2811

P/J281

P/J28

P/J23

P/J31

P/J232

SSI NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13

P/J29

P/J20

P/J201

P/J19

5

CONSOLE ASSY PANEL PL1.1.19

P/J42

P/J422

TRANSFER ASSY PL6.1.7

P/J401 PWB ESS PL8.1.9

PHD ASSY PL4.1.21

REGI SENSOR PL3.2.13

1

P/J501

P/J14

P/J26

P/J21

P/J211

DRIVE ASSY MAIN PL7.1.2

P/J22

P/J221

DRIVE ASSY SUB PL7.1.1

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

P/J24

P/J261

DRIVE ASSY PH PL7.1.4

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

WSB07001KC

7-9

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts 7.3.1 Notes on Using the Wiring Diagram between Parts The following describes the legend of the wiring diagrams between parts shown on the following pages.

Symbols

Description

Denotes a plug.

Denotes a jack.

P/JXX YY

PWBA HNB DRV (PL X.Y.Z)

Heater

Control

DEVE_A

REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC

Denotes Pin yy and Jack yy of the connector Pxx and Jxx.

Denotes the parts. PL X.Y.Z implies the item "Z" of plate (PL) "X.Y" in Chapter 5. Parts List.

Denotes functional parts attached with functional parts name.

Denotes the control and its outline in PWB.

Denotes a connection between parts with harnesses or wires, attached with signal name/contents.

Denotes the function, and logic value of the signal to operate the function (Low: L, High: H). The given voltage is for signal in high status. The arrow indicates the direction of signal.

7-10

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts Symbols EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC

Description Denotes the function, and logic value of the signal when the function operated (Low: L, High: H). The given voltage is for signal in high status. The arrow indicates the direction of signal.

Denotes a connection between wires.

I/L +24VDC

+5VDC +3.3VDC

Denotes DC voltage when the interlock switch in HNB MCU WITH CPU turns on.

Denotes DC voltage.

SG

Denotes signal ground.

AG

Denotes analog ground.

RTN

Denotes the return.

7-11

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

7.3.2 Configuration of the Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts The interconnection wiring diagram is divided into 9 sections. § 1 to § 9 indicate details of the interconnections of parts. §1

DC POWER SUPPLY Connections of PWBA LVPS with PWBA MCU. Connections of HARN ASSY SW PWR with PWBA LVPS. Connections of BREAKER GFI with HARN ASSY SW PWR. Connections of FAN MAIN with PWBA LVPS. Connections of HARN ASSY INTERLOCK with PWBA LVPS. Connections of SWITCH with PWBA MCU.

§2

FEEDER, SSI & REGI Connections of SOLENOID FEED MSI with PWBA MCU. Connections of REGI SENSOR with PWBA MCU. Connections of SSI NO PAPER SENSOR with PWBA MCU. Connections of CST NO PAPER SENSOR with PWBA MCU. Connections of CLUTCH ASSY DRV with PWBA MCU.

§3

DRIVE Connections of DRIVE ASSY PH with PWBA MCU. Connections of DRIVE ASSY MAIN with PWBA MCU. Connections of DRIVE ASSY SUB with PWBA MCU.

§4

ROS Connections of ROS ASSY with PWBA MCU.

§5

XEROGRAPHIC Connections of PWBA EEPROM with PWBA MCU. Connections of PHD ASSY with PWBA MCU. Connections of SENSOR HUM with PWBA MCU. Connections of LED ASSY ERASE with PWBA MCU. Connections of TRANSFER ASSY with PWBA MCU.

§6

HIGH VOLTAGE Connections of PWBA HVPS with PWBA MCU.

7-12

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts §7

DEVELOPER Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y) with PWBA MCU. Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (M) with PWBA MCU. Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (C) with PWBA MCU. Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (K) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (M) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (C) with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (K) with PWBA MCU.

§8

FUSER Connections of FUSER ASSY with PWBA MCU. Connections of FUSER ASSY with PWBA LVPS. Connections of PWBA MCU with PWBA LVPS.

§9

CONTROLLER Connections of PWB ESS with PWBA MCU. Connections of CONSOLE ASSY PANEL with PWB ESS. Connections of PWBA LVPS with PWB ESS.

7-13

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 1 DC POWER SUPPLY

PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1 P/J44 POWER CONTROL

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

HARN ASSY INTERLOCK PL8.2.5

1

I/L +24VDC

3

SWITCH PL5.1.9

2

P/J291 P/J29 R/H COVER OPEN

2

HARN ASSY SIDE SW PL5.1.27

HARN ASSY LVPS PL9.1.3 P/J501

+5VDC P/J14

+5VDC

1

14

SG

2

12

SG

4

11

LV TYPE

7

8

DEEP SLEEP

8

7

SLEEP

9

6

24V ON

10

5

FAN ON

11

4

FAN LOW

12

3

FAN ALARM

13

2

I/L OPEN

14

1 HARN ASSY 24V PL9.1.4

P/J502

INTERLOCK +24VDC P/J15

I/L +24VDC

1

1

SG

2

2

FAN MAIN PL8.1.1

P/J503 1 FAN CONTROL

2

FAN +24VDC FAN ALARM SG

3

P/J48

+3.3VDC

13

+3.3VDC

3

1

SG

1

HARN ASSY SW PWR PL8.2.9

BREAKER GFI PL8.2.11

1 2

4

3

3

2

1

LINE NUT

P/J483 P/J482 P/J484

T484 HARN ASSY GFI GND PL8.2.10

WSB07002KC

7-14

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

LV TYPE DEEP SLEEP SLEEP 24V ON

Control signal of the LVPS

FAN ON FAN LOW FAN ALARM

Drive control signal of the SIDE FAN

LVPS overcurrent protection circuit This circuit stops all outputs, if the power supply voltage 24VDC, 5VDC, or 3.3VDC is shorted. LVPS overvoltage protection circuit This circuit stops all outputs, if the power supply voltage 24VDC, 5VDC, or 3.3VDC exceeds the specified voltage respectively. At this time, the operating point is 36VDC or less for 24VDC, 7VDC or less for 5VDC and 3.3VDC. Low Power mode and Sleep mode The output of the following power supply are stopped according to the these signals.

Output

+24VDC

+5VDC

+3.3VDC

Sleep (Low Power mode)

OFF

OFF

ON

Deep sleep (Sleep mode)

OFF

OFF

OFF

Signal

7-15

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

HARN ASSY L SIDE PL3.1.18 P/J23 1 2

P/J231 I/L +24VDC

2 1

CST FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC

1 2

SOLENOID FEED MSI PL3.1.9

+3.3VDC

3 4 5

P/J232 3

PULL UP +3.3VDC SG

2

REGI SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

REGI SENSOR PL3.2.13

1

+3.3VDC

6 7 8

PULL UP +3.3VDC

P/J233 3

SG PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +3.3VDC

2 1

SSI NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13

+3.3VDC

P/J234 9 10 11

INTERLOCK +24VDC

PULL UP +3.3VDC

3

SG

2

PAPER EMPTY SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

1

CST NO PAPER SENSOR PL3.2.13

HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL PL9.1.9 P/J262

P/J26 4 5

I/L +24VDC

2 1

REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC

1 2

CLUTCH ASSY DRV PL3.1.1

WSB07003GA

7-16

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

CST FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC

ON/OFF signal of the SOLENOID FEED MSI

REGI SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

Paper detect signal of the Regi part by the Sensor Photo (REGI SENSOR)

PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +3.3VDC

Paper detect signal of the SSI by the Sensor Photo (SSI NO PAPER SENSOR)

PAPER EMPTY SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

Paper detect signal of the Paper Cassette by the Sensor Photo (CST NO PAPER SENSOR)

REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF signal of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV

7-17

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 3 DRIVE

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

DRIVE ASSY PH PL7.1.4

INTERLOCK +24VDC P/J24 1 2

I/L +24VDC

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

K MODE SOL ON (L) +24VDC

HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL PL9.1.9

+3.3VDC

P/J26 1

PULL UP +3.3VDC SG

2 3

INTERLOCK +24VDC

P/J261 3 COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

2

K MODE SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

1

HARN ASSY MAIN MOT PL9.1.7 P/J21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

INTERLOCK +24VDC

P/J211 SG

11

I/L +24VDC

DRIVE ASSY MAIN PL7.1.2

10

SG

9

I/L +24VDC

8

SG

7

MAIN MOT ON

M

6

MAIN MOT ALARM

5

MAIN MOT CLK

4

MAIN MOT LOW

3

MAIN MOT CW/CCW

2

HARN ASSY SUB MOT PL9.1.8 P/J22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

P/J221 SG

10

I/L +24VDC

DRIVE ASSY SUB PL7.1.1

9

SG

8

I/L +24VDC

7

SG

6

SUB MOTO ON SUB MOT ALARM SUB MOT CLK SUB MOT LOW SUB MOT BRAKE

M

5 4 3 2 1

WSB07004KC

7-18

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

K MODE SOL ON (L) +24VDC

ON/OFF signal of the COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

K MODE SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

Color mode detect signal of the DRIVE ASSY PH by the Sensor Photo (COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR)

MAIN MOT ON MAIN MOT ALARM MAIN MOT CLK MAIN MOT LOW MAIN MOT CW/CCW

Drive control signal of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN

SUB MOT ON SUB MOT ALARM SUB MOT CLK SUB MOT LOW SUB MOT BRAKE

Drive control signal of the DRIVE ASSY SUB

7-19

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 4 ROS

ROS ASSY PL4.1.1

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

HARNESS ASSY ROS RE PL4.1.22

INTERLOCK +24VDC

P/J40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ROS MOT ON SG

P/J411 15

1

14

2

13

3

12

4

11

5

I/L +24VDC ROS MOT CLK SOS LD ERR

CLK LOCK ROS MOT ON SG +24VDC

5

ROS MOT

4 3 2 1

10

PCONT

9

SG

8

V REF K V REF C V REF M

7

1

+5VDC

3

6

2

SOS

2

3

SG

1

5

V REF Y ENB

PWBA SOS

4 3

SG

2

+3.3V LD

1

from Xerography

HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO PL4.1.23 P/J41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SG DATA K SG DATA C SG DATA M SG DATA Y

P/J412 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

WSB07006KD

7-20

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

ROS MOT ON ROS MOT CLK

Drive control signal of the ROS MOTOR

SOS

Reference signal for scan start of LASER

V REF K V REF C V REF M V REF Y

Emission control signal of the laser diode

LD ERR

Error signal of the laser diode

PCONT

Power control signal of the laser diode

DATA K DATA C DATA M DATA Y

Video signal of the laser diode

7-21

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 5 XEROGRAPHIC

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

HARN ASSY PHD XPRO PL9.1.11 P/J144

P/J42 +3.3VDC

1 2 3 4

DATA

4

CLOCK

3

+3.3VDC

PWBA EEPROM PL8.2.16

2

SG

1

PHD ASSY PL4.1.21 P/J422 5 +3.3VDC

6 7 8 9 10

+3.3VLD

6

DATA

EEPROM PHD

5

CLOCK

4

+3.3VDC

3

SG

2

+3.3VLD

1

to ROS HARN ASSY HUM PL9.1.6 P/J20 +5VDC

1 2 3 4

P/J201 TEMP.

4

SG

3

HUMI.

SENSOR HUM PL8.2.7

2

+5VDC

1

HARN ASSY LVPS PL9.1.3

+3.3VDC

P/J14 15 16 17

P/J141 +3.3VDC

3

ERASE Y/M/C ON (L) +3.3VDC

2

ERASE K ON (L) +3.3VDC

1

TRANSFER ASSY PL6.1.7

HARN ASSY L SIDE PL3.1.18 P/J28 1 2 3 4 5

LED ASSY ERASE PL4.1.8

P/J281

+5VDC ADC SENSOR LED REM ADC V MONI SG

P/J2811

5 1

5

4 2

4

3 3

3

2 4

2

1 5

1

ADC SENSOR

WSB07007KC

7-22

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

CLOCK DATA

Control signal of the PWBA EEPROM

CLOCK DATA

Control signal of the EEPROM PHD

TEMP.

Temperature data in the printer by the SENSOR HUM (Analog value)

HUMI.

Humidity data in the printer by the SENSOR HUM (Analog value)

ERASE K ON (L) +3.3VDC ERASE Y/M/C ON (L) +3.3VDC

ON/OFF signal of the LED ASSY ERASE

ADC SENSOR

Toner patch density data measured by the ADC SENSOR (Analog value)

LED REM

Remote signal of the LED of ADC SENSOR

ADC V MONI

Control signal of the ADC SENSOR

7-23

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 6 HIGH VOLTAGE

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

PWBA HVPS PL4.1.19

P/J16 10 +3.0V REF

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P/J161 TR MON

A

1

CF MON

2

HV DO

3

HV LD

4

HV CLK

5

+3.0V REF

6

SG

7

MAIN CLK

8

SG

9

I/L +24V

10

E I D H C G B F

BCR BTR

K

Developer

C BTR : Bias Transfer Roll BCR : Bias Charge Roll

M

Y

WSB07008KB

7-24

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name TR MON CF MON HV DO HV LD HV CLK MAIN CLK

Description

Control signal of the HVPS

7-25

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 7 DEVELOPER

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13 INTERLOCK +24VDC

HARN ASSY TNR MOT PL5.1.25 Y DISPENSE MOT A Y DISPENSE MOT B

2

I/L +24VDC

3 INTERLOCK +24VDC

Y DISPENSE MOT XA

4

Y DISPENSE MOT XB

5

M DISPENSE MOT A

6

I/L +24VDC

8

M DISPENSE MOT XA

9

M DISPENSE MOT XB

10 P/J19 1 2 3 4 INTERLOCK +24VDC

5 6

N.C.

5

1

4

2

3

3

2

4

1

5

5

1

4

2

3

3

2

4

1

5

5

1

C DISPENSE MOT B

4

2

I/L +24VDC C DISPENSE MOT XA

3

3

2

4

C DISPENSE MOT XB

1

5

5

1

8 9 10 11

+3.3VDC

K DISPENSE MOT A K DISPENSE MOT B I/L +24VDC

4

2

3

K DISPENSE MOT XA

3

2

4

K DISPENSE MOT XB

1

5

HARN ASSY TONER CRUM P/J31 PL5.1.26 DATA Y IN 1 CLK Y OUT 2 +3.3VDC 3 SG 4

MOTOR ASSY DISP (M) PL5.1.3

M

MOTOR ASSY DISP (C) PL5.1.3

M

J192

P192 7

M

J191

P191 C DISPENSE MOT A

MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y) PL5.1.3

J182

P182

M DISPENSE MOT B

7

INTERLOCK +24VDC

J181

P181

P/J18 1

MOTOR ASSY DISP (K) PL5.1.3

M

P/J311 4 3 2

CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) PL5.1.14

1 P/J312

5 6 7 8

DATA M IN

4

CLK M OUT

3

+3.3VDC

2

SG

CONNECTOR CRUM (M) PL5.1.14

1 P/J313

9 10 11 12

DATA C IN

4

CLK C OUT

3

+3.3VDC

2

SG

CONNECTOR CRUM (C) PL5.1.14

1 P/J314

13 14 15 16

DATA K IN CLK K OUT +3.3VDC SG

4 3 2

CONNECTOR CRUM (K) PL5.1.14

1

WSB07009KB

7-26

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

Y DISPENSE MOT A Y DISPENSE MOT B Y DISPENSE MOT XA Y DISPENSE MOT XB

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y)

M DISPENSE MOT A M DISPENSE MOT B M DISPENSE MOT XA M DISPENSE MOT XB

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (M)

C DISPENSE MOT A C DISPENSE MOT B C DISPENSE MOT XA C DISPENSE MOT XB

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (C)

K DISPENSE MOT A K DISPENSE MOT B K DISPENSE MOT XA K DISPENSE MOT XB

Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (K)

DATA Y IN CLK Y OUT

Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (Y)

DATA M IN CLK M OUT

Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (M)

DATA C IN CLK C OUT

Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (C)

DATA K IN CLK K OUT

Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (K)

7-27

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 8 FUSER

FUSER ASSY PL6.1.1

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

HARN ASSY FUSER PL6.1.2 VC

P/J17 8

P/J171

VD

7

SG

6

1 8

P/J175 1 3

2 7

2 2

3 6

3 1

NC SNS

P/J176 SG

4 5

1 2

5 4

2 1

FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

6 3

P/J172 1 3

P/J173 1

SG PULL UP +3.3VDC

7 2

2 2

2

8 1

3 1

3

5

STS

4 +3.3VDC

3 2 1

STS

EXIT SENSOR PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1

P/J14 10 9

P/J501 xHEAT1

5

FUSER ON

P/J171 1

LAMP CONTROL

6

1

P1711

Heater

P/J47 3

N HEAT1

2

2

P1712

LINE

3

3

P1713

1

Thermostat

P/J504 1 2 J5041 1

Used in production 2 process only. 3

RELAY TEST LOW RELAY TEST HIGH

HARN ASSY TEST RL PL5.1.28

230V Spec. P/J171 1 P/J47 3 1

1

N HEAT1

LINE

2

2

3

3

WSB07010GC

7-28

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

VC VD

Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for controlling temperature (analog value)

STS

Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for detecting high temperature (analog value)

FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +3.3VDC

Paper detect signal of the Fuser Exit by the Sensor Photo (EXIT SENSOR)

FUSER ON

Lighting signal of Fuser Lamp

RELAY TEST LOW RELAY TEST HIGH

Test signal of the LVPS (Used in production process only)

7-29

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts § 9 CONTROLLER

PWB ESS PL8.1.9

+3.3VDC

P/J101 1

PWBA MCU PL8.2.13

HARN ASSY ESS PL9.1.1

P/J10 TEST PRINT

18

SG

2

17

+3.3VDC

3

16

DEEP SLEEP

4

15

SG

5

14

STS

6

13

CMD

7

12

CREADY

8

11

SREADY

9

10

SG

10

9

VSYNC K

11

8

VSYNC C

12

7

VSYNC M

13

6

VSYNC Y

14

5

SG

15

4

HSYNC

16

3

SG

17

+3.3VDC

2

18

1

HARN ASSY ESS VIDEO PL9.1.2 P/J111 1

P/J11 SG

6

DATA C

4

5

SG

5

4

DATA M

6

3

SG

7

2

DATA Y

8

1

PWBA LVPS PL8.2.1

HARN ASSY ESS POWER PL9.1.10

+5VDC

P/J401 1 2 3 4

HARNESS ASSY B PL9.1.12 P/J29 7 +5VDC

7

SG

3

+3.3VDC

8

DATA K

2

6

+5VDC

P/J40

+5VDC

1

SG

2

+3.3VDC

3

SG

4

HARNESS ASSY A-OP PL1.1.17 P/J2900 1 7 2

+3.3VDC

SG

P/J220 1

6

DATA

2 3 4

5

3

5

CLK

4

4

4

+5VDC

3

5

3

2

6

2

LED ON

6

1

7

1

+3.3VDC

7

WAKE UP

CONSOLE ASSY PANEL PL1.1.19 +5VDC

5

WSB07011GA

7-30

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

Signal line name

Description

TEST PRINT

Control signal for the TEST PRINT mode

DEEP SLEEP

Control signal for the DEEP SLEEP mode

STS

Status signal transmitted fro the PWBA MCU to the PWB ESS

CMD

Command signal transmitted from the PWB ESS to the PWBA MCU

CREADY SREADY

Signal for indicating weather or not the printer is ready for receiving command signal

VSYNC K VSYNC C VSYNC M VSYNC Y

Signal for indicating registration position of each of images Y, M, C and K

HSYNC

Signal for data

DATA K DATA C DATA M DATA Y

Video data of four colors

DATA CLK WAKE UP LED ON

Control signal of the CONSOLE ASSY

7-31

Chapter 7 Wiring Data 7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts

7-32

Chapter 8 Accessories

Chapter 8 Accessories Table of Contents

Table of Contents 8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional) .........................................................................8-1 8.1.1 8.1.2

Checking the Package Contents ............................................................................................ 8-1 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................. 8-2

8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) .........................................................................8-5 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3

Checking the Package Contents ............................................................................................ 8-5 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................. 8-5 Changing the Accessory Configuration on the Print Driver .................................................... 8-9

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional)

8.1

Network Expansion Card (Optional) CAUTION

Before plugging or unplugging the interface cable connector, be sure to switch off the printer or unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging or unplugging the connector when the printer is on can cause printer failure. If installing the network expansion card to the printer when the printer is used in a network environment, the entire network-related settings on the printer will be initialized to the defaults. Before installing the network expansion card, we suggest you to record the current settings by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Refer to the User Guide on how to print the [Printer Settings] list..

8.1.1

Checking the Package Contents The packaging box contains the following items. If you find any items missing, please contact our Customer Support Center or your dealers. •

Network expansion card

8-1

•

2 screws

•

Installation guide

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional) 8.1.2

Installation Procedure The network expansion card goes into the controller board right above additional memory (optional). If you purchased additional memory, install it before installing the network expansion card. For information on how to install additional memory to the printer, refer to the User Guide.

Network expansion card

Additional memory

Follow these steps when installing the network expansion card to the printer.

1.

Switch the power off by pressing the power switch located on the left side of the printer to the position. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2.

Loosen the screw on the rear cover of the printer and open the cover.

3.

Remove the rear cover from the printer by pulling out the bottom tab of the cover from the slot, tilting the cover, and pulling out the top tab of the cover from the slot.

8-2

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional)

4.

Remove the black plastic part (used for the wireless LAN) from the network expansion card. Important Remove the black plastic part from the network expansion card before installing the card to the printer. Otherwise, the rear cover cannot be closed. The black plastic part cannot be removed after the network expansion card is installed to the printer. Make sure to remove the part in this step.

5.

Align the connector of the network expansion card with the card connector on the printer and insert the card into the connector. Use the following procedure since the opening on the printer is narrow. 1) Insert the left side of the card at an angle into the opening on the printer. 2) Insert the right side of the card into the opening and align the connector of the network expansion card with the card connector on the printer. 3) Push the network expansion card by the part shown in the figure and firmly insert it into the connector.

6.

Check the following to ensure that the connector of the network expansion card is inserted correctly. - There is no gap between the connector of the network expansion card and the card connector on the printer. - The two screw holes on the network expansion card are perfectly aligned with the holes on the printer.

8-3

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional)

7.

Secure the network expansion card onto the controller board by tightening the two screws (supplied) from the outside of the printer.

8.

Re-attach the rear cover on the printer by inserting the top tab and then bottom one of the cover into the slots. Then, close the rear cover and tighten the screw loosened in Step 2.

9.

Plug in the power cord and switch the power on by pressing the power switch to the position.

The installation is now complete.

NOTE

You can check whether the network expansion card has been installed correctly by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Refer to the User Guide on how to print the [Printer Settings] list.

8-4

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

8.2

Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) In case of the following situations, install additional memory to the printer. - When the [Out of Memory] message appears frequently on the control panel - When using the Secure/Sample Print feature - When using the electronic sort function Additional memory may be required also when printing large data such as complex graphics.

NOTE

8.2.1

For more information about additional memory and how to order it, refer to "A.2 Optional Accessories" (User Guide P. 182).

Checking the Package Contents The packaging box contains the following items. If you find any items missing, please contact our Customer Support Center or your dealers. • Memory card

8.2.2

Installation Procedure Additional memory goes into the controller board right underneath a network expansion card (optional). If your printer is the DocuPrint 1110 with a network expansion card installed, remove the network expansion card to get an access to the RAM slot. For information on how to uninstall/reinstall the network expansion card, refer to the installation guide included with the printer.

Network expansion card

Additional memory

The following describes how to install additional memory to the printer. The printer has one slot for installing a memory card. If you want to add memory when the slot already has a memory card, replace the memory card with the one with larger capacity.

CAUTION

Before plugging or unplugging the interface cable connector, be sure to switch off the printer or unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Plugging or unplugging the connector when the printer is on can cause printer failure.

8-5

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

1.

Switch the power off by pressing the power switch located on the left side of the printer to the position. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and the printer.

2.

Loosen the screw on the rear cover of the printer and open the cover.

3.

Remove the rear cover from the printer by pulling out the bottom tab of the cover from the slot, tilting the cover, and pulling out the top tab of the cover from the slot.

4.

If a network expansion card is installed, remove it temporarily.

5. If another memory card is already installed, push the retaining clips on both ends in the outward direction. After the memory card pops up, pull it out at an angle.

8-6

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

6.

7.

1)

Hold the new memory card so that the notch on the card comes below the center of the card.

Use the following steps to install the memory card to the printer.

Align the notch on the new memory card with the projection on the RAM slot, and insert the memory card at an angle into the slot. Important Make sure to insert the memory card securely until the terminal area cannot be seen.

2)

Check the following points to ensure that the memory card is inserted correctly. - The terminal area of the memory card cannot be seen. - The memory card is not inserted at an angle.

8-7

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

3)

Push the new memory card by the part shown in the figure. When the card is installed correctly, it clicks into place.

8.

If the network expansion card was removed, reinstall it to the printer.

9.

Re-attach the rear cover on the printer by inserting the top tab and then bottom one of the cover into the slots. Then, close the rear cover and tighten the screw loosened in Step 2.

10. Plug in the power cord and switch on the power by pressing the power switch to the position. The installation is now complete.

NOTE

You can check whether the memory card is installed correctly by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. [Memory Capacity] under [General] shows the total memory capacity of the printer (which is the memory on the controller board (128 MB) plus the memory you just added). For information on how to print the [Printer Settings] list, refer to " Printing a Report/List" (User Guide P. 138).

8-8

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) 8.2.3

Changing the Accessory Configuration on the Print Driver If you are finished installing additional memory to the printer, change the accessory configuration. This can be done on the [Options] tab on your print driver. The following procedure use the PCL print driver as an example. 1.

On the Windows [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes]. Select to highlight the printer, and select [Properties] from the [File] menu.

2.

The Properties dialog box appears. In the dialog box, click the [Options] tab.

3.

Select [Memory Capacity] from [Items], and then select the total memory capacity of the printer from [Memory Capacity].

4.

Select [RAM Disk] from [Items], and then select [Available] from [RAM Disk].

5.

Click [OK] to close the Properties dialog box.

8-9

Chapter 8 Accessories 8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

8-10

Chapter 10 Machine Overview

CONTENTS 10.1 Printing Process .....................................................................................................10-1 10.1.1 Summary of Printing Process ..................................................................................................... 10-1 10.1.2 Schematic Diagram for Printing Processes ................................................................................ 10-2 10.1.3 Description of Printing Process Techniques ............................................................................... 10-3 10.1.3.1 Charging with electricity ...................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.3.2 Exposure............................................................................................................................. 10-4 10.1.3.3 Development....................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.1.3.4 Transfer (Drum -> Paper) ................................................................................................... 10-8 10.1.3.5 Cleaning............................................................................................................................ 10-10 10.1.3.6 Excess Toner Collecting ................................................................................................... 10-11 10.1.3.7 Fusing ............................................................................................................................... 10-12

10.2 Paper Path............................................................................................................10-13 10.2.1 Paper Path ................................................................................................................................ 10-13 10.2.2 Layout of Paper Path ................................................................................................................ 10-14

10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components .........................................................10-15 10.3.1 Paper Cassette ......................................................................................................................... 10-15 10.3.1.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-15 10.3.1.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-16 10.3.1.3 Multiple Sheet Feed Prevention........................................................................................ 10-17 10.3.1.4 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-17 10.3.2 Paper Feeder ............................................................................................................................ 10-18 10.3.2.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-18 10.3.2.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-19 10.3.3 SSI & Regi Assy........................................................................................................................ 10-20 10.3.3.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-20 10.3.3.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-21 10.3.3.3 Lead-edge Registration..................................................................................................... 10-22 10.3.3.4 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-22 10.3.3.5 Paper detection by the Regi Sensor ................................................................................. 10-23 10.3.4 Transfer Belt & Fuser................................................................................................................ 10-24 10.3.4.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-24 10.3.4.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-25 10.3.5 ROS ASSY................................................................................................................................ 10-26 10.3.5.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-26 10.3.5.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-27 10.3.6 TONER CARTRIDGE & DISPENSER ...................................................................................... 10-28 10.3.6.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-28 10.3.6.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-28 10.3.7 PHD ASSY................................................................................................................................ 10-29 10.3.7.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-29 10.3.7.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-30 10.3.8 Drive.......................................................................................................................................... 10-31 10.3.8.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-31 10.3.8.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-33 10.3.9 Electrical ................................................................................................................................... 10-34

10.3.9.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-34 10.3.9.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-36 10.3.9.3 Data Flow.......................................................................................................................... 10-37

10.4 MODES ................................................................................................................10-38 10.4.1 Operation Modes ...................................................................................................................... 10-38

10.5 Control ..................................................................................................................10-39 10.5.1 Control of Paper Size................................................................................................................ 10-39 10.5.2 ROS Light Quantity Control ...................................................................................................... 10-39 10.5.3 Process Control ........................................................................................................................ 10-40 10.5.3.1 Potential Control ............................................................................................................... 10-40 10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control ....................................................................................................... 10-41 10.5.3.3 High Area Coverage Mode ............................................................................................... 10-42 10.5.3.4 Admix Mode ...................................................................................................................... 10-42 10.5.3.5 LED Light Quantity Control of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR.................. 10-43 10.5.4 Color Registration Control......................................................................................................... 10-44 10.5.5 Fuser Control ............................................................................................................................ 10-45 10.5.5.1 Fuser temperature control................................................................................................. 10-45 10.5.5.2 Cooling down .................................................................................................................... 10-45 10.5.5.3 Sensor Warm-up............................................................................................................... 10-45

10.6 Drive Transmission Route ....................................................................................10-46 10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN .................................................................................................................. 10-46 10.6.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB DRIVE ................................................................ 10-49 10.6.3 TONER DISPENSER (Y, M, C, K)............................................................................................ 10-54 10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB .................................................................................................................... 10-56

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process

10.1 Printing Process 10.1.1 Summary of Printing Process This printer is a "Full-color laser printer" which applies the principle of an electrophotographic recording system. The tandem system comprising the four color PHD ASSY of yellow, magenta, cyan and black (Y, M, C and K) creates the toner image. Printing processes of this printer is composed of the basic steps as follows. (1) Charge: ........................ Drum surface is charged with electricity. (2) Exposure: .................... Image unit is exposed to laser beams. (3) Development:.............. Image is developed with toner. (4) Transfer: ...................... Four-color finished toner image on the Drum is transferred onto the paper. (5) Cleaning: ..................... Remaining toner on the drum is collected. (6) Fusing:......................... Toner on the paper is fixed by heat and pressure. (7) Cleaning: ..................... Remaining toner on the belt is collected.

PHD ASSY

Wsb10001FA

10-1

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process

10.1.2 Schematic Diagram for Printing Processes Outline of printing processes is shown in the figure below.

: Laser beam

ROS [(2) Exposure]

PHD ASSY [(1) Charge] [(3) Development] [(4) Transfer] [(5) Cleaning]

: Paper transfer

FUSER [(6) Fusing]

TRANSFER BELT [(4) Transfer] [(7) Cleaning]

Wsb10002FA

10-2

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process

10.1.3 Description of Printing Process Techniques 10.1.3.1 Charging with electricity In the charging process, the drum surface rotating at a constant speed is charged uniformly with negative electricity by the discharge from BCR (Bias Charge Roll). This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. z The BCR is kept in contact with the drum and rotates following the rotations of the drum. BCR is a conductive roll, receives discharge voltage from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) and discharges a negative DC voltage. z The drum surface is uniformly and negatively charged with DC bias voltage. The drum surface is a photoreceptor (which is an insulator in the dark and a conductor in the light) and the drum inside is composed of a conductor. z The Cleaning Roll is a sponge, which contacts with the BCR to catch the toner.

Wsb06003KA

engine principle0006FA

engine principle0005FA

10-3

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.2 Exposure In the exposure process, the drum surface charged negatively is scanned by laser beams to form invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors. z Laser beams are emitted from the laser diode in the ROS ASSY. By the rotating polygon mirror, fixed mirror and lens attached to the Scanner Motor Assy of the ROS ASSY, the surface of each color drum is scanned from end to end in the axial direction. : Laser beams (K) : Laser beams (C) : Laser beams (M) : Laser beams (Y) Mirror

Mirror

Mirror

Drum (K) Lens

Mirror

Polygon Mirror

Drum (C) Lens

Mirror Drum (M) Mirror

Lens

Lens Mirror

Drum (Y)

Lens

Mirror

Mirror

Wsb06004KA

10-4

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process z The laser beam is irradiated according to the printing data (image data) output from the printer controller. The laser beam is output only when printing data is pixels (micro points composing characters or pictures). (The laser diode lights up for parts to be developed by toner, and not for parts that are not to be developed.) The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, and the negative charge on the drum surface flows to the positive side and the charges cancel each other out so that the potential on the drum surface drops. The part on the surface where potential drops becomes the electrostatic latent image.

10-5

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.3 Development In the development process, toner is electrically attached to the invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum surface to form visible toner image on the drum. This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black color independently. z The toner in the toner cartridge is agitated by the built-in Agitator and fed into the developer. The Auger is driven by the toner motor.The amount of toner to be consumed according to the print count is calculated and that amount is fed into the developer. This is called "toner dispensation", which is controlled by two types of control, "PCDC" and "ADC". (Refer to “10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control”) z The toner fed into the developer and the carrier in the developer are agitated by the Auger, and supplied to the Magnet Roll arranged in the vicinity of the drum surface. The toner and carrier are charged by friction due to the agitation (toner in negative, carrier in positive), and they are attracted to one another electrically. As the carrier is a magnetic substance, it is attracted to the Magnet Roll having a magnetic force and a homogeneous layer is formed by the Trimmer Rod. z The magnet roll is covered by a thin semi-conductive sleeve over the surface. DB (Developing Bias) voltage is supplied to this semiconductor sleeve from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). DB voltage is negative DC voltage combined with AC voltage. The magnet roll is kept at a constant negative voltage against the photoreceptor layer of the drum by DC voltage. Therefore, at the area surface where the negative electric charge on the drum does not decrease, potential is lower than the magnet roll, while the potential is higher than the magnet roll at the area where the negative charge on the drum surface decreases. The AC voltage shakes the developer on the magnet roll surface Stimulating the toner to fly to the drum. Thus, the toner charged negatively is attracted only to the drum surface area where the negative charge has decreased below that of the magnet roll (electrostatic latent image) and the toner image is formed on the drum. Once the toner is adhered on the drum, the negative charge of the toner-bearing portion increases, which decreases the potential and the toner-attracting force of that portion.

10-6

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process

: Negative electric charge : Positive electric charge : Toner : Carrier

Toner Cartridge Agitator

Paddle Trimmer Rod

Drum

Auger Magnet Roll

Auger

HVPS

Wsb06005KA

engine principle0013FA engine principle0014FA

10-7

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.4 Transfer (Drum -> Paper) In the transfer process, toner image formed on the drum surface is transferred onto the surface of the paper. The toner is transferred onto the paper in the order of Y, M, C, and K. z BTR The BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) is a conductive roll, to which the positive voltage is applied from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). The BTR contacts the rear side of the Belt and applies the positive voltage to the Belt. z Belt The Belt is a conductive belt, to which the positive voltage is applied from the BTR. After the negatively charged toner image on the drum surface is drawn by the positive charge on the belt, it is transferred from the drum to the paper. The Belt feeds the paper to the direction of FUSER. Paper

: Negative electric charge : Positive electric charge : Toner

Drum (K)

BTR

Drum surface

Drum (C)

BTR

Drum (M)

BTR

BTR

Drum (Y)

HVPS Transfer Belt

Wsb06007KA

10-8

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process

Kmy06007KA

10-9

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.5 Cleaning In the cleaning process, excess toner is removed from the drum surfaces, while excess charge is also eliminated from the drum surface. z Drum cleaning The cleaning blade contacts the surface of the drum collecting the excess toner by scraping. z Cleaning Roll The Cleaning Roll contacts the surface of the BCR collecting the foreign matter. z Charge cleaning When the drum is charged by BCR, any excess charge hinders the drum surface from being uniformly charged, which may lead to print quality problems. The excess charge on the surface of the drum is eliminated by irradiating the light of the Erase Lamp (LED ASSEMBLY).

Wsb06008KA

10-10

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.6 Excess Toner Collecting (1) The excess toner is collected by the cleaner blade contacting the drum, and then carried to the AUGER CLNG SIDE by the Auger. (2) The toner is carried by the AUGER CLNG SIDE to the joint to the collection box in the toner cartridge. (3) The toner then falls into the collection box in the toner cartridge.

AUGER CLNG SIDE Collection Box Toner Cartridge 2)

Auger 1)

Cleaner Blade

3)

Wsb06006KA

10-11

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.1 Printing Process 10.1.3.7 Fusing In the fusing process, toner is fixed on the paper by heat and pressure. z Since the finished toner image transferred from the belt can be easily broken by a finger touch, the toner image must be fixed on the paper with the FUSER (fusing unit). The toner particles are melted by the HEAT ROLL heated by the Heater lamp and is deposited on the paper under pressure given by the belt opposed against the heat roll.

Table 10-1 Conditions to be met to light up the Heater Lamp

Main Heater Lamp

Warm up

Stand by

Printing

ON

ON/OFF

ON

Spring Nip

Nip Head

Paper Felt

Belt

Frame Belt

Fixed toner

Heat Roll Heater Lamp

Sheet Not fixed toner

10-12

Wsb06009KA

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.2 Paper Path

10.2 Paper Path 10.2.1 Paper Path

Wsb06010KA

10-13

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.2 Paper Path

10.2.2 Layout of Paper Path

: Laser beam : Paper transfer : Paper sensors Exit roll [Fuser] Exit Sensor [Fuser] Heat roll [Fuser] Pressure belt [Fuser]

Belt [Transfer Belt]

Regi roll (rubber) [Regi Assembly] Regi roll (metal) [Regi Assembly] SSI No Paper Sensor [Regi Assembly]

Regi Sensor [Regi Assembly] Retard roller [Tray 1] Feed roll [Feeder Assy V] Tray No Paper Sensor [Feeder Assy V] Wsb10011FA

10-14

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components Major functional components of the printer are described below with illustrations. These components are classified into the following blocks based on the configuration of the printer. z Paper Cassette z Paper Feeder z SSI & Regi Assy z Transfer Belt & Fuser z ROS ASSY z TONER CARTRIDGE & Dispenser z PHD ASSY z Drive z Electrical

10.3.1 Paper Cassette 10.3.1.1 Major functions SIDE GUIDE(R/L) The SIDE GUIDE(R/L) can move at a right angle to the paper transfer direction to align the paper width. END GUIDE The END GUIDE can move in the paper transfer direction to determine the paper size. RETARD ROLLER The RETARD ROLLER and the FEED ROLLER pinch the paper to prevent multiple sheet feed. BOTTOM PLATE BOTTOM PLATE is locked to the bottom side when paper cassette is pulled out from the paper feeder and unlocked when paper cassette is installed to the paper feeder. Pushes the paper against the feed roll using a spring tension.

10-15

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.1.2 Reference diagram Bottom Plate

End Guide

Side Guide (L)

Side Guide (R)

Retard Roller Wsb10012FA

10-16

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.1.3 Multiple Sheet Feed Prevention The sheets set in a tray or cassette are occasionally stuck together along the edges. The stuck sheets cause a multiple sheet feed or a jam. The sheets are fed by the Feed Roll to a position between the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. Normally, when only one sheet is fed, both the Feed Roll and Retard Roll rotate to allow the sheet to pass. However, when two sheets are fed concurrently, only the Feed Roll rotates and the Retard Roll is locked thereby allowing the upper sheet to pass by being separated from the lower sheet that is stopped by the friction with the Retard Roll at rest. The Retard Roll is being pushed toward the Feed Roll by spring pressure, and controlled by the torque limiter (Clutch Assy Friction) with which it is coupled.

10.3.1.4 Reference diagram Feed Roller

Retard Roller

Clutch Assy Friction

Retard Roller

Wsb10013FA

10-17

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.2 Paper Feeder 10.3.2.1 Major functions SENSOR PHOTO (No Paper Sensor) Detects the presence/absence of paper in the paper tray based on the position of ACTUATOR NO PAPER. (No paper: Sensor beam is intercepted) SENSOR PHOTO (Tray No Paper Sensor)

SENSOR PHOTO (Tray No Paper Sensor)

Paper Bottom Plate

ACTUATOR NO PAPER

ACTUATOR NO PAPER (No Paper Position)

Wsb06014KA

SOLENOID ASSY FEED Transmits the drive from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to FEED ROLLER. (Refer to “10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB”) FEED ROLLER When the SOLENOID ASSY FEED operates, the FEED ROLLER starts rotating and the FEED ROLLER feeds the paper. (Refer to “10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB”)

DRIVE ASSY MAIN

DRIVE ASSY PH

FEED ROLLER

SOLENOID ASSY FEED Wsb06015KA

10-18

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.2.2 Reference diagram

FEED ROLLER SENSOR PHOTO (Tray No Paper Sensor) SOLENOID ASSY FEED

10-19

Wsb06016GA

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.3 SSI & Regi Assy 10.3.3.1 Major functions SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor) Detects presence/absence of paper in the SSI tray by the change in actuator position. SSI No Paper Sensor Upon detecting the sheet, the Regi Roll rotates for a predetermined duration to feed the sheet. The sheet is fixed between the Rolls so that it may not fall from the SSI. The Rolls stop immediately when the Regi Sensor detects the presence of paper.

SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor)

SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor)

ACTUATOR SSI

Paper Regi Roll

Regi Roll

ACTUATOR SSI (No Paper Position)

Wsb06017GA

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) It detects when the paper front end reaches the CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI. When the paper feeds from the SSI, Regi Sensor is measuring the paper length (size). The ON time of Regi Sensor is converted into the paper length. ON: The paper activates the actuator. Regi Clutch CLUTCH ASSY REGI transmits the driving power from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to ROLL ASSY REGI, and transports the paper from the tray and SSI toward the PHD ASSY direction. The timing of sheet feed from the Regi Assy is adjusted by the duration of the Regi Clutch operation so that the toner image on the drum can be transferred to the appropriate position on the sheet. (Refer to “10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB”)

10-20

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.3.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration ACTUATOR REGI ROLL

ACTUATOR REGI OUT

SPRING REGI OUT

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) ACTUATOR REGI IN SPRING ACT REGI

ROLL REGI METAL

REGI CLUTCH

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) ROLL ASSY REGI(Rubber) Wsb06018GA

10-21

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.3.3 Lead-edge Registration When a sheet is fed from the Tray to the toner transfer position, the registration of the sheet may not be correctly maintained due to such troubles as misalignment of lead edges in the Tray.To avoid this trouble, the lead edge position needs to be aligned at the Regi part before the sheet is fed to the toner transfer position. By thrusting the edge of the sheet coming out of the Tray against the Regi Roll that is at rest, the lead edge of the sheet is registered.

10.3.3.4 Reference diagram

REGI ROLL

Wsb06019KA

REGI ROLL

SKEWED PAPER

Wsb06020KA

10-22

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.3.5 Paper detection by the Regi Sensor Since the paper path from the SSI to the Regi Sensor and that from the Paper Tray to the Regi Sensor are different, the Regi Sensor is provided with the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. The ACTUATOR REGI ROLL detects the sheet from the SSI and detects the tail edge of the paper from the paper tray. The ACTUATOR REGI IN detects the lead edge of the paper from the paper tray. However, the movement of ACTUATOR REGI IN does not affect that of ACTUATOR REGI ROLL.

Rear view illustration ACTUATOR REGI ROLL

ACTUATOR REGI OUT

SPRING REGI OUT

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) ACTUATOR REGI IN SPRING ACT REGI

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

Normal Position SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

From Paper Tray ACTUATOR REGI ROLL ACTUATOR REGI IN

ACTUATOR REGI IN

SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor) PAPER

Detection of paper (Tail Edge)

From SSI PAPER

ACTUATOR REGI ROLL

ACTUATOR REGI ROLL SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

PAPER SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

ACTUATOR REGI IN

ACTUATOR REGI IN Wsb06041KA

10-23

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.4 Transfer Belt & Fuser 10.3.4.1 Major functions TRANSFER BELT z Belt Belt feeds the paper to the direction of FUSER. z Sensor ADC Sensor ADC reads the toner patch on the BELT, and converts it to voltage value. Voltage value is used to control the density of toner. (Refer to “10.5.3.1 Potential Control”) FUSER The FUSER fixes toner which was transferred onto the paper but not fixed by the heat and pressure and feeds paper before and after being fixed. The FUSER mainly consists of the following parts: z Heat Roll

z Pressure Belt

z Heater Lamp

z Roll Assy Exit

z Thermostat

z Exit Sensor

z Temp. Sensor z Exit Sensor Detects passage of print after fixed based on the change of position of the actuator.

10-24

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.4.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration

HEAT ROLL

PRESSURE BELT SENSOR PHOTO (Exit Sensor)

THERMOSTAT

HEATER LAMP

TEMP. SENSOR (Un-contacting type) TEMP. SENSOR (Contacted type) ROLL ASSY EXIT FUSER

SENSOR ADC

BLADE ASSY

TRANSFER BELT BELT

10-25

Wsb06021GA

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.5 ROS ASSY 10.3.5.1 Major functions ROS ASSY ROS ASSY is an exposure unit that generates laser beams to form electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. In this manual, the ROS ASSY is referred to as ROS. The ROS mainly consists of the following parts: z LD PWB z Scanner ASSY z SOS PWB z Lens z Mirror z Window LD PWB The LD PWB is comprised of four LDs (laser diodes) corresponding to Y, M, C, and K. Each LD converts the electric signals of incoming image data into laser wave or pulse. In order to stabilize the laser light quantity during formation of an electrostatic latent image, the LD PWB always monitors the laser light quantity to adjust it to the appropriate level. This is called "APC (auto power control)". Scanner Assy The Scanner Assy is comprised of the Scanner Motor that rotates at a constant speed and the Polygon Mirror that is mounted on the motor shaft. The laser light output from the LD is irradiated onto the Polygon Mirror via the Mirror. The Polygon Mirror, provided with six reflecting mirror faces, changes the reflection angle of the laser light as it rotates by the Scanner Motor, thereby allowing the laser light to scan the drum along its axial direction. Scanning is performed using one reflecting mirror face for each line. SOS PWB The SOS sensor on the SOS (start of scan) PWB converts an incoming laser beam, upon detection, to an electric signal as the reference signal for starting scanning and transmits this signal to the PWBA MCU. The SOS sensor signals are used to synchronize the starting point of the laser-beam scanning with the starting point of the image writing. Lens Mirror Window The laser light reflected from the Polygon Mirror reaches the drum surface via the Lens, Mirror, and Window. The Lens corrects aberration, the Mirror secures an optical path, and the Window prevents foreign matters from entering the ROS.

10-26

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.5.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration

Mirror Polygon Mirror

Scanner Assy Mirror

LD PWB

Lens Mirror SOS PWB SOS Sensor

Mirror

ROS

Lens

Window

Wsb06022GA

10-27

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.6 TONER CARTRIDGE & DISPENSER 10.3.6.1 Major functions CONNECTOR CRUM (CRUM Sensor) The CONNECTOR CRUM reads and writes the data of the CRUM. (CRUM : Customer Replaceable Unit Memory) Printer specific information is stored. DISPENSE MOTOR (Y/M/C/K) The dispense motor supplies the drive to the Agitator and Auger in the TONER CARTRIDGE, and supplies toner to the developer.

10.3.6.2 Reference diagram

DISPENSE MOTOR (K)

TONER CARTRIDGE (K)

DISPENSE MOTOR (C)

CONNECTOR CRUM (K) DISPENSE MOTOR (M)

TONER CARTRIDGE (C) CONNECTOR CRUM (C)

DISPENSE MOTOR (Y) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) CONNECTOR CRUM (M) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) CONNECTOR CRUM (Y)

Wsb06023GA

10-28

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.7 PHD ASSY 10.3.7.1 Major functions PHD ASSY PHD ASSY carries out a series of operation in the print process such as charging, and transfer. PHD ASSY mainly consists of the following parts. Developer is an equipment which develops images in the print process. z Drum (Y)

z Developer (Y)

z Drum (M)

z Developer (M)

z Drum (C)

z Developer (C)

z Drum (K)

z Developer (K)

CRUM PHD specific information is stored. Erase Lamp (LED ASSEMBLY) The light of the LED is reflected by the HOLDER ASSY ERASE. The light of the LED eliminates the charge on the drum.

PHD ASSY

HOLDER ASSY ERASE

DRUM

ERASE LAMP

LED ASSEMBLY Wsb10024FA

10-29

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.7.2 Reference diagram

Rear view illustration

CRUM

Developer (K)

Developer (C)

Developer (M)

Developer (Y)

PHD ASSY

Drum (K)

Drum (C)

Drum (M)

Drum (Y)

LED ASSEMBLY Wsb10025FA

10-30

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.8 Drive 10.3.8.1 Major functions DRIVE ASSY MAIN Supplies the drive to parts as follows. (Refer to “10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN”) z (C/M/Y/K) Drum z Transfer Belt z Regi z Feeder DRIVE ASSY SUB Supplies the drive to parts as follows. z Fuser z Developer (C/M/Y/K)

10-31

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components DRIVE ASSY PH DRIVE ASSY PH transmits the driving force from the DRIV ASSY SUB to relevant parts. The transmission channel is changed by the COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID in the DRIVE ASSY PH to allow the driving force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to reach the Black Developer only. This is performed to ensure that the Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan Developers cannot be rotated by the DRIVE ASSY SUB during B/W printing. The COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR detects the status of the transmission route (whether it is set for B/W or full color).

[ FULL COLOR MODE ] CAM C DRIVE ASSY PH

GEAR D3 OUT Drive to Developer (Y, M, C)

Drive from Sub Motor

GEAR D3 IN [ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]

CAM C GEAR D3 OUT

Drive from Sub Motor

GEAR D3 IN

[ FULL COLOR MODE ]

[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ] COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR CAM C

CAM C

GEAR C

GEAR C

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID Wsb06026KA

10-32

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.8.2 Reference diagram

DRIVE ASSY MAIN

DRIVE ASSY SUB

DRIVE ASSY PH

Wsb06027GA

10-33

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

10.3.9 Electrical 10.3.9.1 Major functions FAN Disspates heat out of the printer to prevent the printer from overheating. SWITCH The SWITCH turns ON/OFF the AC power supply of the printer. Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) The LVPS is provided in two types, 120V and 240V. Supplies AC power from the power source to the FUSER heater and generates and supplies stable low voltage DC power used for the logic circuit, etc. LVPS contains control circuit for the heater of the FUSER, in addition to the power circuit. Machine Control Unit (MCU) Controls printing operation based on the communication with the print controller and information from the sensor/ switch. Major functions are as follows: z Communication with the ESS. z Receive of information from the sensors or switches. z Control of Motor in DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB. z Distributing low voltage DC power output from LVPS to each component z Control of ROS High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) Supplies high voltage to the following parts in the Transfer Belt and Developer to perform charging, development, and primary transfer. z BCR z BTR z Developer PWBA EEPROM Information unique to the printer is stored. Electronic Sub System (ESS) The ESS connected to the MCU controls the entire system (Diagnostic, Interface and Image processing). HUMIDITY SENSOR HUMIDITY SENSOR reads the temperature/humidity within the printer and converts the values to voltage values.

10-34

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components OPERATOR PANEL OPERATOR PANEL displays the state of the printer using LED. INTERLOCK SWITCH INTERLOCK SWITCH is a switch that cuts the +24VDC power supply to the HVPS or Motor, etc. upon the opening of the Front Cover. Network Adaptor A adaptor for enabling the network connectivity of the printer. Connecting the network cable without inserting Network Adaptor does not connect the printer to the network. SIDE COVER SWITCH SIDE COVER SW is a switch that detects the right side cover open. BREAKER GFI Opens the circuit upon detecting any voltage or current or leakage current that exceeds the rating of the AC power supply.

10-35

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.9.2 Reference diagram

OPERATOR PANEL SIDE COVER SWITCH INTERLOCK SWITCH

PWBA LVPS FAN

PWBA EEPROM

PWBA ESS PWBA MCU

SENSOR HUM MULTI PROTOCOL CARD

BREAKER GFI PWBA HVPS

10-36

POWER SWITCH Wsb06028GA

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components 10.3.9.3 Data Flow Print data (electric signal) from the printer controller flows as shown below until it is turned into a print.

Wsb06042KA

10-37

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.4 MODES

10.4 MODES 10.4.1 Operation Modes For the operation of the printer, the following four modes are provided. z READY mode The printer is ready for printing. z PRINTING mode The printer is under printing. z Low Power mode The printer is under power saving. z Sleep mode The printer is under power saving.

10-38

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.5 Control

10.5 Control 10.5.1 Control of Paper Size The printer doesn't have switches for detecting paper size, and only length of paper is detected by the Regi Sensor when feeding paper. If printing data and paper size don't match, error is sent to the ESS.

10.5.2 ROS Light Quantity Control The image data are entered to the laser diodes in the ROS as electric signals (data are expressed with high and low voltage values), and the laser diodes convert the image data from electric signals to optical signals (data are expressed with blinking laser beams). Variations in light quantity of laser beams or variations in optical system (such as lenses) or drum sensitivity cannot attain a proper electrostatic image, therefore, the laser beam light quantity is monitored and controlled by the laser diodes. The ROS in this printer has four laser diodes for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black respectively, and the light quantity is automatically adjusted for each color.

10-39

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.5 Control

10.5.3 Process Control For a stable printing, the parameters related to the image forming must be corrected as necessary. The control of entire printing process including parameter correction control is called "process control". Mainly, the following two controls are made: z Potential control z Toner density control To supplement these two controls, the following controls are provided: z High Area Coverage Mode z Admix Mode z AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR LED light quantity setting

10.5.3.1 Potential Control To attain stable printing image density, the drum charging voltage and the developing DC voltage are adjusted according to the developing capability of each color carrier that varies momentarily. The adjusted drum charging voltage and the developing DC voltage are fed back to keep the printing image density constant. The potential control is made immediately before the start of printing, if either of the following conditions is satisfied: z At the first printing after the power on z When cumulative print count after the power on exceeds 25 z When a cleaning cycle is executed during continuous printing The outline of control is as follows. 1

The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR (temperature and humidity sensor) detects the temperature and humidity, and sets target values of drum charging voltage and developing DC voltage.

2

The patches of respective colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) for the potential control are generated and transferred on the BTR. (For the shape of patches, see the following figure.)

About 11mm

Y

About 12mm

M

About 3mm About 57mm

C

K engine principle0046FA

3

3) The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR (density sensor) detects the density of the area on BTR where no toner is present and the density of patches.

10-40

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.5 Control 4

4) The density measured in step 3) is compared with target value set in step 1) to change the drum charging voltage and the developing DC voltage for each color according to a difference.

10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control The toner density must be kept constant to attain stable printing image. To keep the toner density constant, the toner should be dispensed exactly by the quantity consumed for the printing. This system is the PCDC. However, the system with only the PCDC generates a difference from target toner density, thus requiring the system to correct this error. This is the toner density control by the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR. These two control systems are altogether called the toner density control. 1

PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control) The toner quantity consumed in the developing process is calculated by counting the video signals entered to the PRINT HEAD. The video signal counting is made by the charging and discharging of the capacitor in the CR circuit arranged in parallel to the video signal line. The consumed toner quantity is calculated by the toner dispense time. The Toner Motor in the TONER DISPENSER ASSEMBLY is driven by the amount of calculated toner dispense time to supply the toner into the developer.

2

ADC (Auto Density Control) The patches of respective colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) for the toner density control are generated under specified potential condition, and transferred on the BTR. The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR measures this density. The measured value is compared with reference value, and if the toner density is low, the toner dispense quantity is increased at the next printing, or if the toner density is high, the toner dispense quantity is reduced at the next printing. The toner dispense quantity is calculated by the toner dispense time. This calculation is made for each color. ADC is made after the completion of printing, if either of the following conditions is satisfied: - When cumulative print count after the power on exceeds 25 - When a cleaning cycle is executed during continuous printing

3

Example of toner dispensation The Toner Motor revolves for the duration of the specified time per 1-time dispensation. The toner dispense time in 1) and 2) above is calculated with the number of revolutions of Toner Motor. In the following description, this is called the dispense count. The dispense count calculated by the ADC is cancelled in the subsequent 8 prints. If 16 dispense counts were calculated as a lack of toner by the ADC, the toner is dispensed additionally to the dispense count calculated by the PCDC by 2 counts (16/8=2) in the subsequent 8 prints. Or, if 16 dispense counts were calculated as an excess of toner by the ADC, the toner is dispensed by subtracting from the dispense count calculated by the PCDC in the subsequent 8 prints. If the excess amount cannot be subtracted in 8 prints, the remainder is subtracted in 9 and subsequent prints.

10-41

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.5 Control

Total dispense counts

4

5

3

4

2

2

3

4

3

2

Even allotment in first 8 prints Correction amount by ADC +16

Dispense counts by PCDC

2

3

1

2

0

0

1

2

3

2

1

2

0

1

0

0

0

0

2

2

Correction amount by ADC -8 Total dispense counts

engine principle0044FA

10.5.3.3 High Area Coverage Mode A continuous printing of the image of area coverage exceeding the toner dispense capability causes the toner density in the developer to be lowered. The High Area Coverage Mode extends the next page feed and dispenses the toner during this time, if the toner dispense time reached the specified value during a continuous printing.

10.5.3.4 Admix Mode Even the High Area Coverage Mode may not be able to cope with the reduction of toner density in the developer. Also, if the machine used in high humidity environment is relocated to the place in low humidity environment, the reference value of toner density is different in respective environments, thus causing large discrepancy between measured value by AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR and reference value of toner density. The Admix Mode dispenses the toner immediately to prevent the reduction of toner density, if the patch density result measured by the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is far lower than the reference value when the patches for toner density control are generated.

10-42

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.5 Control 10.5.3.5 LED Light Quantity Control of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is a reflection type density sensor that radiates the light to an objective from the LED in the sensor and detects the reflected light from the objective to output electric signal according to the light quantity. For exact density measurement, the sensor output value (reflected light quantity) must be the specified value when no toner is put on the BTR as an objective. The reflected light quantity varies depending on the BTR surface condition or dirty condition of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR surface. The light quantity emitted from the LED is controlled so that the reflected light quantity satisfies the specified value. This control is made in two ways; one to set the light quantity so that the reflected light quantity satisfies the specified value, and one to adjust the subsequent light quantity to be within the tolerance. 1

Light quantity setting The reflected light quantity may vary largely, if the Transfer Roller was replaced or the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR was cleaned. Assuming this fact, the light quantity is set when the power is turned on, or the front cover is opened and closed. The light quantity of LED is increased gradually, and the set value is fixed when the output of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR exceeds the specified value. At this time, if the output of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR does not reach the specified value even though the light quantity is increased to the upper limit, the controller judges the sensor as dirty. Also, the controller judges the sensor as faulty in the event of extremely high output.

2

Light quantity adjustment At the execution of ADC, the light quantity adjustment is made immediately before the patches for toner density control are generated. The light is emitted from the LED with current setting of light quantity to check if the output value of the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is within the specified range. If the output value is low, the light quantity is increased by the specified amount at the next ADC, or if high, the light quantity is reduced at the next ADC. At this time, if the output value is less than the first lower limit, the controller judges the sensor as dirty and outputs the warning. Further, if less than the second lower limit, the controller judges the sensor as faulty and stops the printing.

10-43

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.5 Control

10.5.4 Color Registration Control The printer uses a tandem system where the drums and developers are arranged respectively for each of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black colors. Since the images are formed on the drum of each color to be overlayed one another, a color shift may occur. The color registration control calculates how much the registration is shifted, and adjusts the ROS write timing. The lateral registration control adjusts all of four colors in lateral directions. The color registration control is made from a change in inside temperature and the print count at the execution of the process control. The control is outlined below: 1

With no toner on the Belt, the output value of ADC Sensor is measured to determine the threshold value.

2

The patches for color registration control are generated on the Belt. These patches are composed of 10mm lines of K, C, K, M, K, and Y in this order.

3

The density of patches generated by the ADC Sensor is read.

4

The shift correction amount is calculated from the threshold value determined in 1) and the patch density measured in 3).

5

The ROS write timing is changed according to the shift correction amount.

10-44

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.5 Control

10.5.5 Fuser Control 10.5.5.1 Fuser temperature control As for the fuser temperature control, the target temperature is set, then the Heat Roll surface temperature is controlled so that it can meet the target value by turning on/off the Heater Lamp. Temperature of individual area of the Heat Roll is detected by the Fuser Non-Contact Sensor (NCS) in the middle of the Heat Roll and the Temp Sensor at the edge of it. When the temperature detected is higher than the target value, the Heater Lamp will be turned OFF. When the temperature is below the target value, the Heater Lamp will be turned ON. The target temperature setting varies depending on the time of Warm-up, Printing, or Process Control. The target temperature varies according to such environmental factors as the interior temperature detected by the Sensor Hum Temp.

10.5.5.2 Cooling down As the printing continues, the temperature distribution in the Heat Roll becomes uneven both in the paper feed and nonpaper feed areas. Cooling Down suspends paper feeling for a certain period of time so that the Heat Roll temperature distribution can be uniform. When the temperature of the Heat Roll edge is high, cooling down is performed to lower the temperature to the target value.

10.5.5.3 Sensor Warm-up The Fuser NCS (Non Contact Sensor) at the center of the Heat Roll will be lose its accuracy of detecting temperature when the temperature of the Sensor itself is below -5°C. Therefore, the Sensor will be warmed up when the temperature is below -5°C. This action is called Sensor Warm-up.

10-45

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6 Drive Transmission Route 10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN is transmitted through the route below. [ Name of moving parts ] DRIVE ASSY MAIN

GEAR T4

GEAR P2

GEAR DRV

GEAR P3

GEAR P4

[ BELT ]

GEAR P5 TRANSFER BELT

DRIVE ASSY PH

REGI CLUTCH

SOLENOID ASSY FEED

GEAR ASSY FEED

[ ROLL ASSY REGI ]

[ FEED ROLLER ]

GEAR REGI RUBBER

GEAR REGI METAL

[ ROLL REGI METAL ]

CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI

GEAR PHD 1

GEAR PHD 2

GEAR PHD 2

[ DRUM (K) ]

[ DRUM (C) ]

[ DRUM (M) ]

[ DRUM (Y) ]

HSG ASSY XERO (K)

HSG ASSY XERO (C)

HSG ASSY XERO (M)

HSG ASSY XERO (Y)

PHD ASSY

Wsb10029FA

10-46

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ PAPER FEED DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

DRIVE ASSY MAIN

DRIVE ASSY PH GEAR P2

GEAR REGI RUBBER GEAR REGI METAL [ ROLL ASSY REGI ] GEAR P4 GEAR P3 GEAR P5

REGI CLUTCH

[ ROLL REGI METAL ]

FRONT [ FEED ROLLER ]

SOLENOID ASSY FEED GEAR ASSY FEED

10-47

Wsb10051FA

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ DRUM and BELT DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

PHD ASSY

[ DRUM (K) ] [ DRUM (C) ]

GEAR PHD 2 GEAR PHD 1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

[ BELT ] [ DRUM (M) ] GEAR PHD 2 [ DRUM (Y) ] GEAR DRV

FRONT GEAR T4

Wsb10052FA

10-48

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB DRIVE Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB are transmitted through the route below. [ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]

[ Name of moving parts ]

DRIVE ASSY SUB SUB MOTOR

DRIVE ASSY MAIN

GEAR D1

GEAR P2

GEAR DK

GEAR D1

GEAR P3

GEAR D5

GEAR D2

GEAR P4

GEAR P4-2

GEAR MAG (K)

GEAR D3 IN

GEAR C

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID

CAM C [ MAGNET ROLL (K) ]

HSG ASSY DEVE (K)

GEAR D3 OUT

FLANGE D3

DRIVE ASSY PH

PHD ASSY

Wsb10031FA

10-49

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

GEAR D5 DRIVE ASSY SUB

GEAR DK

GEAR D1 [ MAGNET ROLL (K) ] GEAR MAG (K)

SUB MOTOR

GEAR D1

GEAR D2

DRIVE ASSY PH FLANGE D3

FRONT

CAM C

GEAR D4 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

GEAR D2 GEAR D3 OUT GEAR D3 IN FLANGE D3

CAM C

GEAR P2 DRIVE ASSY PH

GEAR P3 GEAR P4 GEAR P4-2

10-50

GEAR C

COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID Wsb10053FA

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ DEVELOPMENT and EXCESS TONER COLLECTING ] DRIVE ASSY MAIN

[ Name of moving parts ] DRIVE ASSY SUB

GEAR PHD 1

GEAR PHD 2

GEAR MAG (Y, M, C, K)

[ MAGNET ROLL ]

[ DRUM ]

GEAR MAG IDLR

GEAR AUGER CLNG

[ AUGER ]

GEAR IDLER AUGER SIDE

GEAR IDLER PADDLE

GEAR AUGER SIDE

GEAR PADDLE

[ AUGER CLNG SIDE ]

[ PADDLE DEVE ]

GEAR AUGER

[ AUGER FRONT ] GEAR AUGER

[ AUGER REAR ] HSG ASSY DEVE (Y, M, C, K)

HSG ASSY XERO (Y, M, C, K) PHD ASSY

Wsb10037FA

10-51

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ EXCESS TONER COLLECTING DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

[ AUGER CLNG SIDE ] HSG ASSY XERO

[ AUGER ]

GEAR AUGER SIDE

GEAR AUGER CLNG GEAR IDLER AUGER SIDE

[ DRUM ]

GEAR PHD 2 GEAR PHD 1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN

FRONT PHD ASSY GEAR PHD 2

Wsb10054FA

10-52

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ DEVELOPMENT DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

[ PADDLE DEVE ] [ AUGER FRONT ] [ AUGER REAR ] GEAR IDLER PADDLE GEAR PADDLE HSG ASSY DEVE

[ MAGNET ROLL ]

GEAR AUGER

GEAR MAG IDLR

GEAR MAG GEAR AUGER

FRONT PHD ASSY DRIVE ASSY SUB

Wsb10055FA

10-53

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6.3 TONER DISPENSER (Y, M, C, K) Rotation power of the TONER DISPENSER drives the agitator and the auger in the TONER CARTRIDGE. [TONER CARTRIDGE] [ TONER DISPENSER ]

[ Name of moving parts ]

DISPENSE MOTOR (K)

DISPENSE MOTOR (C)

DISPENSE MOTOR (M)

DISPENSE MOTOR (Y)

GEAR IDLER (K)

GEAR IDLER (C)

GEAR IDLER (M)

GEAR IDLER (Y)

GEAR IDLER AUG (K)

GEAR IDLER AUG (C)

GEAR IDLER AUG (M)

GEAR IDLER AUG (Y)

GEAR AUGER (K)

GEAR AUGER (C)

GEAR AUGER (M)

GEAR AUGER (Y)

[ AUGER (K) ]

[ AUGER (C) ]

[ AUGER (M) ]

[ AUGER (Y) ]

GEAR IDLER AGI (K)

GEAR IDLER AGI (C)

GEAR IDLER AGI (M)

GEAR IDLER AGI (Y)

DISPENSER ASSY

GEAR AGITATOR (K)

GEAR AGITATOR (C)

GEAR AGITATOR (M)

GEAR AGITATOR (Y)

[ AGITATOR (K) ]

[ AGITATOR (C) ]

[ AGITATOR (M) ]

[ AGITATOR (Y) ]

TONER CARTRIDGE (K)

TONER CARTRIDGE (C)

TONER CARTRIDGE (M)

TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)

Wsb06039KA

10-54

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route [TONER CARTRIDGE] [ TONER DISPENSER ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

TONER CARTRIDGE [ AUGER ]

[ AGITATOR ]

GEAR IDLER AGI GEAR IDLER FRONT

GEAR AGITATOR GEAR AUGER DISPENSE MOTOR GEAR IDLER AUG Wsb10056FA

10-55

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY SUB is transmitted through the route below. [PAPER HANDLING] [ FULL COLOR MODE ]

[ Name of moving parts ]

DRIVE ASSY SUB

DRIVE ASSY PH

SUB MOTOR

GEAR D1

GEAR D1

GEAR DK

GEAR D2

GEAR D3 IN

GEAR D3 OUT

GEAR D4

GEAR D4

GEAR D5

GEAR D5

GEAR D5

GEAR D5

GEAR MAG (K)

GEAR MAG (C)

GEAR MAG (M)

GEAR MAG (Y)

[ MAGNET ROLL (K) ]

[ MAGNET ROLL (C) ]

[ MAGNET ROLL (M) ]

[ MAGNET ROLL (Y) ]

HSG ASSY DEVE (K)

HSG ASSY DEVE (C)

HSG ASSY DEVE (M)

HSG ASSY DEVE (Y)

PHD ASSY

Wsb10033FA

10-56

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route [PAPER HANDLING]

[ FULL COLOR MODE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

DRIVE ASSY SUB GEAR DK GEAR D1

GEAR MAG (K) GEAR D5

[ MAGNET ROLL (K) ]

SUB MOTOR GEAR MAG (C) GEAR D5 GEAR D4

[ MAGNET ROLL (C) ]

GEAR D1

GEAR MAG (M)

GEAR D2 GEAR D5 GEAR D4

[ MAGNET ROLL (M) ]

DRIVE ASSY PH

GEAR MAG (Y) GEAR D5

[ MAGNET ROLL (Y) ]

FRONT

GEAR D3 OUT

GEAR D4 GEAR D2 GEAR D3 IN Wsb10057FA

10-57

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ FUSER DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] DRIVE ASSY SUB

GEAR IDLER HR

GEAR HR

GEAR IDLER EXIT

[ HEAT ROLL ]

GEAR EXIT

[ ROLL ASSY EXIT ] FUSER

Wsb06035KA

10-58

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

[ FUSER DRIVE ]

[ Name of moving parts ] : Indicates the engagement of gears.

[ ROLL ASSY EXIT ] FUSER

GEAR EXIT

GEAR IDLER EXIT

[ HEAT ROLL ]

GEAR HR GEAR IDLER HR

DRIVE ASSY SUB

FRONT

Wsb10058FA

10-59

Chapter 10 Machine Overview 10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10-60

PUBLICATION COMMENT SHEET Use this feedback sheet to make us aware of the strengths and weaknesses of the material you have received. Please comment on adequacy, quality, usability, format, parts of manual not used, etc. Specific errors or deficiencies should be referenced by page and/or page number. Mail to your Technical Support Department and they will pass to us. (Customer Engineer→OpCo Technical Support Department→FX/CSS/IBS) Use black pencil or ink:

Name :

Date :

Job Title : OpCo (Country) :

Employee No. :

Publication No. :

Title of Publication :

Mailing Address : Date and Revision of Publication :

Page No. - Figure No.

Description of Error or Deficiency (please be specific).

Please check if answer is requested.

No

Yes

If yes, be sure to fill in Name, Job Title, Employee No., OpCo name and Mailing Address

CLEAR TAPE

SECOND FOLD

FIRST FOLD

Before sealing, please be sure that all information is completed on reverse side.

Attn: CSS/IBS KSP/R&D Business Park Bldg.6A7 3-2-1,Sakado Takatsu-ku,Kanagawa-ken 213-8508 Japan

FUJI XEROX Co., Ltd.

CLEAR TAPE

Place Postage Stamp Here